Symmetricom TimeProvider 2300, TimeProvider 2700 User Manual

Add to my manuals
338 Pages

advertisement

Symmetricom TimeProvider 2300, TimeProvider 2700 User Manual | Manualzz

....................

TimeProvider

 

2700

 

Edge

 

Grandmaster

 

Clock

....................

TimeProvider

 

2300

 

Edge

 

Boundary

 

Clock

            

.....................................................................................................

User’s   Guide

.....................................................................................................

Revision   A3  ‐  July,   2013

........................................................................................... Part   Number   098 ‐ 00564 ‐ 000

User’s Guide updates are available at: www.symmetricom.com

©   1999  ‐  2013   Symmetricom,   Inc.

  All   rights   reserved.

  Printed   in   U.S.A.

All   product   names,   service   marks,   trademarks,   and   registered   trademarks   used   in   this   document   are   the   property   of   their   respective   owners.

 

Contents

Purpose of This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Who Should Read This Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Structure of This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Conventions Used in This Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Warnings, Cautions, Recommendations, and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Related Documents and Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

Where to Find Answers to Product and Document Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

Chapter 1 Overview

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

TimeProvider 2300/2700 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Software Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

Security Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

Communications Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

Input Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

Output Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

Power and Ground Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

Functional Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

Communication Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Time Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Frequency Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Synchronization and Timing Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Configuration Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Web Interface for Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Chapter 2 Installing

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Security Considerations for TP 2300/2700 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Site Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Installation Tools and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Unpacking the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 3

Table of Contents

Rack Mounting the TimeProvider 2300/2700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Making Ground and Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Ground Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

DC Power Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

AC Power Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

Signal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

Communications Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

TP 2300/2700 Synchronization and Timing Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

Connecting the GNSS Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Installation Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

Applying Power to the TimeProvider 2300/2700. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

Normal Power Up Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Chapter 3 CLI Commands

CLI Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

CLI Command Keyboard Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

Command Line Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

Command User Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

show alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

show alarm-config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

set alarm-config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

show bridge-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

set bridge-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

show clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73

set clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73

set configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

show eia-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

show ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

set ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

show firewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

set firewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

show gnss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

set gnss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83

show hardware-status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

show hostname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

4 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Table of Contents

set hostname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

show image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

set image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

show input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

set input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

show inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

set inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

show ip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

set ip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

show led . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100

show license . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

set license . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

show log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104

show log-config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106

set log-config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106

logout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108

show output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109

set output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

show output-gen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

set output-gen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

ping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

show port-control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

set port-control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

show pql-ssm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

show ptp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

set ptp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132

reboot system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151

show ref . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152

set ref . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153

show-session-timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

set-session-timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

show snmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

set snmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159

show ssm-option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161

set ssm-option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161

show status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162

show synce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

set synce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167

test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 5

Table of Contents

upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170

show user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172

set user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172

show vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

set vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Establishing a Connection to the TimeProvider 2300/2700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

Communicating Through the Serial Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

Communicating Through the Ethernet Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

Managing the User Access List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184

Logging In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185

Adding a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186

Deleting A User. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187

Displaying Current Users and User Access Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187

Changing a User’s Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187

Changing a User’s Access Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188

Provisioning the Ethernet Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189

Provisioning MGMT Ethernet Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189

Provisioning the Service Ethernet Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190

Provisioning VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192

VLAN on the ETH2 Server Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192

VLANs on the ETH1 Client Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196

Provisioning the Input Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198

Reference Switching Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198

Reference Selection Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199

PQL Usage & Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200

Provisioning Input Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203

Setting PTP Input Client Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203

Setting GNSS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206

Setting E1/T1 Input Reference Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209

Provisioning SyncE Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212

Provisioning the PTP Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213

PTP Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213

PTP Server Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213

6 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Table of Contents

Provisioning the Non-PTP Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220

Quality Levels for Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220

Provisioning the T1/E1 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221

Provisioning TOD+1PPS Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

Provisioning the 10MHz & 1PPS Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224

Provisioning SyncE Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224

Provisioning Output Generation Behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225

Setting the System Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226

Provisioning Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227

Disabling Specific Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

Showing Current Alarm Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

Showing Current Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229

Displaying Alarm and Unit Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229

Saving and Restoring Provisioning Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230

Backing up Provisioning Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230

Restoring Provisioning Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231

Provisioning for SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231

Adding or Deleting a Manager IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232

Provisioning to Generate v2 Traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233

Provisioning to Generate v3 Traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233

Adding and Removing v2 Communities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233

Adding and Removing SNMP v3 Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234

Adding and Removing SNMP v3 Trap Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235

Testing TP 2300/2700 Provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235

LED Indications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235

Verifying the Port IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236

Verifying the Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239

Verifying GNSS (TP 2700 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240

Verifying PTP Master/Server Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242

Verifying PTP Input Client Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243

Verifying SyncE Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245

Verifying T1/E1 Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246

Verifying TOD Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248

Verifying 10 MHz/ 1PPS Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249

Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252

Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252

ESD Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 7

Table of Contents

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253

Diagnosing the TP 2300/2700 By Symptom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253

Diagnosing the TP 2300/2700- Reading LED Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . .258

Repairing the TimeProvider 2300/2700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264

Upgrading the Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265

TP 2300/2700 Upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266

TimeProvider 2300/2700 Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267

System and Accessory Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267

GNSS Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269

Returning the TimeProvider 2300/2700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270

Repacking the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270

Equipment Return Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270

User’s Guide Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271

Contacting Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272

Appendix A System Messages

Message Provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274

Facility codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274

Severity codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274

System Notification Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292

Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292

Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293

Compliance & Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294

Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296

MGMT Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296

Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296

Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300

Clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307

GNSS Antenna Kits Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308

GNSS Antennas with Internal LNA Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308

GNSS Lightning Arrestor Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310

GNSS Antenna Coaxial Cable Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311

8 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Table of Contents

Factory Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312

TP 2300/2700 Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312

Alarm Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322

Appendix C Installing GNSS Antennas

Antenna Kits Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324

Considerations for Antenna Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324

Antenna Kits Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325

Lightning Arrestor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325

GNSS L1 In-line Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325

Antenna Coaxial Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325

GNSS Antenna Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326

Planning the Antenna Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326

Antenna Installation Tools and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328

Cutting Antenna Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329

Installing the Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329

Connecting the Cable to the Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331

Installing the Lightning Arrestor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331

Connecting the GNSS Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332

Antenna Installation Completeness Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332

Available GNSS Antenna Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333

Antenna Coaxial Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334

Appendix D Software Licenses

Third-Party Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 9

Table of Contents

10 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Figures

1-1

1-2

1-3

1-4

1-5

1-6

1-7

1-8

TimeProvider 2700 DC Version Connectors and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

TimeProvider 2700 AC Version Connectors and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

TimeProvider 2300 DC Version Connectors and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

TimeProvider 2300 AC Version Connectors and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

Serial Port Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

GNSS Input Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

PTP Input Connections - R1 & S1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

T1/E1 Input Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

1-9 PTP Output Connections - R2 & S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

1-10 T1/E1 & TOD Output Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

1-11 10 MHz/1PPS Output Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

1-12 TimeProvider 2300/2700 DC Version Power and Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

1-13 TimeProvider 2300/2700 AC Version Power and Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

1-14 Functional Architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

1-15 LEDs for TP2700 - DC Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

1-16 LEDs for TP2700 - AC Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

1-17 LEDs for TP2300 - DC Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

1-18 LEDs for TP2300 - AC Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

1-19 Web Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

2-1 TP 2300/2700 - Location of Product Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

2-2

2-3

2-4

2-5

Dimensions for TimeProvider 2300/2700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Mounting Hole Placements for TP 2300/2700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Rack Mounting the TP 2300/2700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

TimeProvider 2700 Power & Ground Connections - DC Version . . . . . . . .46

2-6

2-7

2-8

2-9

TimeProvider 2700 Power & Ground Connections - AC Version. . . . . . . . .46

TimeProvider 2300 Power & Ground Connections - DC Version . . . . . . . .46

TimeProvider 2300 Power & Ground Connections - AC Version. . . . . . . . .46

Universal Ground Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

2-10 TimeProvider 2300/2700 DC Power Connector Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

2-11 Power and Ground Connections on DC Version of TP 2300/2700 . . . . . . .49

2-12 TimeProvider 2300/2700 AC Power Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

2-13 Serial Port Male Mating Connector Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

2-14 PTP Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

2-15 Optical SFP Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

2-16 T1 / E1 and TOD Outputs RJ-45 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

2-17 10MHz/1PPS Output Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

2-18 GNSS Input Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

3-1 Clock States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165

4-1

4-2

Set IP Command Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189

Set Ethernet Command Hierarchy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191

4-3

4-4

4-5

Set Vlan-Mode Command Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192

Fixed VLAN for Server Port— set vlan Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194

Non-Fixed VLAN for Server Port — set vlan Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 11

List of Figures

4-6

4-7

4-8

4-9

Fixed VLAN for Client Port— Set Vlan Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197

Set Ref Command Hierarchy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198

PQL Input and Output Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200

Set PTP Client Command Hierarchy (partial) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203

4-10 Set PTP Client Config Command Hierarchy (partial). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204

4-11 Set PTP Client Config Command Hierarchy (cont’d). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205

4-12 Set GNSS Command Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207

4-13 Set Port-Control Command Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209

4-14 Set Input Command Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210

4-15 Set SyncE Command Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212

4-16 Set PTP Master Command Hierarchy - Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . .214

4-17 Set PTP Master Command Hierarchy - Default Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215

4-18 Set PTP Master Command Hierarchy - Unicast Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216

4-19 Two-Step Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217

4-20 One-Step Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218

4-21 Set Output Command Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222

4-22 Set SyncE Command Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225

4-23 Output Generation Behavior Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226

4-24 Set Alarm-Config Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

4-25 Set Configuration Command Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230

4-26 Set SNMP Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232

B-1 Timing Relationship Between 1PPS and TOD for 1 PPS+TOD Outputs . .302

B-2

B-3

TOD China Mobile Frame Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303

TOD Cisco Message Frame Structure and Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306

C-1

C-2

Locating the GNSS Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326

GNSS Antenna Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330

12 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Tables

5-5

5-7

5-6

A-1

A-2

B-1

B-2

B-3

5-1

5-2

5-3

5-4

4-4

4-3

4-5

4-6

3-5

3-6

4-1

4-2

3-1

3-2

3-3

3-4

2-5

2-6

2-7

2-8

2-1

2-2

2-3

2-4

System Management Ethernet Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Serial Port Connector Pin Assignments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Recommended and Supported SFP Transceivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

T1/E1 Output Port Pin-Outs - RJ-48C Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

1PPS+TOD Port Pin-Outs - RJ45 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

Default Parameters for TOD Information Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Installation Completeness Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

LED Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

PTP Client Status Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

PTP Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132

PTP Master - Default Profile (Multicast) Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . .140

PTP Master - Telecom-2008 & ITU-G8265-1 Parameter Descriptions . . .142

PTP Client - Parameter Descriptions for Telecom-2008 Profile . . . . . . . . .144

Clock Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163

User Level and Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184

PQL for Frequency References - Converted from SSM or clockClass . . .200

PQL Values for Clock States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201

Time and Frequency References - Default Priorities and PQL Values . . .201

PTP Profiles for the TP 2300/2700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213

PQL for Frequency Outputs - Converted to SSM or clockClass . . . . . . . .220

Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252

Troubleshooting Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253

LED Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258

TP 2300 Component Part Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267

TP 2700 Component Part Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268

GNSS Antenna Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269

System Notification Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275

Secondary Index Descriptions for System Notification Messages. . . . . . .286

TimeProvider 2300/2700 Mechanical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292

TimeProvider 2300/2700 Environmental Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292

TimeProvider 2300/2700 Compliance Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294

B-4

B-5

B-6

B-7

TimeProvider 2300/2700 Serial Port Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296

TimeProvider 2300/2700 LAN Port Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296

TimeProvider 2700 GNSS Input Signal Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296

TimeProvider 2300/2700 DS1 Input Signal Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . .298

B-8

B-9

TimeProvider 2300/2700 E1 Input Signal Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298

TimeProvider 2300/2700 PTP Input Signal Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . .298

B-10 TimeProvider 2300/2700 SyncE Input Signal Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .299

B-11 TimeProvider 2300/2700 PTP Input Signal Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . .300

B-12 TimeProvider 2300/2700 SyncE Input Signal Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .300

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 13

List of Tables

B-13 TimeProvider 2300/2700 DS1 Input Signal Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . .301

B-14 TimeProvider 2300/2700 E1 Output Signal Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .301

B-15 TimeProvider 2300/2700 1PPS+TOD Output Signal Specifications . . . . .301

B-16 TOD China Mobile Frame Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303

B-17 TOD China Mobile Message Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304

B-18 TOD China Mobile Time Information Message Payload Contents. . . . . . .304

B-19 TOD China Mobile Time Status Message Payload Contents. . . . . . . . . . .305

B-20 TimeProvider 2300/2700 10 MHz Output Signal Specifications . . . . . . . .307

B-21 TimeProvider 2300/2700 1PPS Output Signal Specifications . . . . . . . . . .307

B-22 1PPS Time Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308

B-23 Holdover Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308

B-24 GNSS Antennas with Internal Low-Noise Amplifier Specifications . . . . . .308

B-25 GNSS Antenna Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309

B-26 Lightning Arrestor Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310

B-27 GNSS L1 Inline Amplifier Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310

B-28 Antenna Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

B-29 General and Communication Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312

B-30 GNSS Input Port Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314

B-31 PTP Client ETH1 Port IP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314

B-32 PTP Client ETH1 Input Port Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315

B-33 SyncE Input ETH1 Port IP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316

B-34 T1/E1 Input Port Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316

B-35 PTP Grand Master ETH2 Port IP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316

B-36 PTP Grand Master ETH2 Port VLAN Parameters - Fixed Index (1-16). . .317

B-37 PTP Grand Master ETH2 Port VLAN Parameters - Non-Fixed . . . . . . . . .317

B-38 PTP Grand Master ETH2 Port Active Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318

B-39 PTP Grand Master Telecom-2008 Profile Unicast Parameters . . . . . . . . .318

B-40 PTP Grand Master ITU-T G.8265.1 Profile Unicast Parameters . . . . . . . .319

B-41 PTP Grand Master Multicast Parameters (Default Profile) . . . . . . . . . . . .319

B-42 T1/E1 Output Port Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320

B-43 T1/E1 Input / Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321

B-44 10MHz/1PPS Output Port Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321

B-45 SSM Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322

B-46 GNSS Port Alarm Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322

C-1

C-2

C-3

GNSS Antenna Kits for TimeProvider 2700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333

LMR-400 Antenna Coaxial Cable Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334

LMR-400/LMR-400FR Antenna Coaxial Cable Specifications. . . . . . . . . .334

14 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

How to Use This Guide

This section describes the format, layout, and purpose of this guide.

In This Preface

Purpose of This Guide

Who Should Read This Guide

Structure of This Guide

Conventions Used in This Guide

Warnings, Cautions, Recommendations, and Notes

Related Documents and Information

Where to Find Answers to Product and Document Questions

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 15

How to Use This Guide

Purpose of This Guide

Purpose of This Guide

The TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide describes the procedures for unpacking, installing, using, maintaining, and troubleshooting the Symmetricom TimeProvider

2700 Precision Timing Protocol Grand Master and TimeProvider 2300 Carrier-Class

Boundary Clock. It also includes appendixes that describe alarms and events, the languages that you use to communicate with the TimeProvider 2300/2700, default values, and other information.

Who Should Read This Guide

Chapter 1, Overview

, is written for non-technical audiences who need general information about the product. Chapters 2 through 5 contain detailed information and instructions about the product. Other chapters and appendixes describe installation, maintenance, and configuration instructions or details primarily intended for qualified maintenance personnel.

This User’s Guide is designed for the following categories of users:

Systems Engineers –

Chapter 1

provides an introduction to the TimeProvider

2300/2700. Cross-references in this chapter direct you to detailed system information in other chapters as appropriate.

Installation Engineers

– Chapter 2 through

Chapter 5

and the appendixes provide detailed information and procedures to ensure proper installation, operation, configuration, and testing of the TimeProvider 2300/2700.

Maintenance Engineers –

Chapter 5 and the appendices

provide preventive and corrective maintenance guidelines, as well as procedures for diagnosing and troubleshooting fault indications and alarms.

Structure of This Guide

This guide contains the following sections and appendixes:

Chapter, Title

Chapter 1, Overview

Chapter 2, Installing

Chapter 3, CLI Commands

Description

Provides an overview of the product, describes the major hardware and software features, and lists the system specifications.

Contains procedures for unpacking and installing the system, and for powering up the unit.

Describes the CLI command conventions, functions, and features and the SNMP protocol option.

16 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

How to Use This Guide

Structure of This Guide

Chapter, Title Description

Chapter 4, Provisioning

Chapter 5, Maintenance and

Troubleshooting

Describes the commands and procedures required to provision the

TimeProvider 2300/2700 after installing the unit.

Contains preventive and corrective maintenance, and troubleshooting procedures for the product. Also contains part number and ordering information and procedures for returning the

TP 2300/2700.

Appendix A, System Messages

Lists the alarms and events and provides basic indications of the source of the alarm.

Appendix B, Specifications and

Factory Defaults

Lists the specifications and factory defaults for the TimeProvider

2300/2700.

Appendix C, Installing GNSS

Antennas

Appendix D, Software Licenses

Provides details about GNSS Antenna kits and procedures for installing the GNSS antenna.

Contains licensing information for third party software.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 17

How to Use This Guide

Conventions Used in This Guide

Conventions Used in This Guide

This guide uses the following conventions:

Acronyms and Abbreviations – Terms are spelled out the first time they appear in text. Thereafter, only the acronym or abbreviation is used.

Revision Control – The title page lists the printing date and versions of the product this guide describes.

Typographical Conventions – This guide uses the typographical conventions described in the table below.

When text appears this way...

TimeProvider 2300/2700

User’s Guide

CRITICAL

Select File , Open ...

Press Enter

Press ;

Username: ping status qualified personnel

Symmetricom does not recommend...

... it means:

The title of a document.

An operating mode, alarm state, status, or chassis label.

Click the Open option on the File menu.

A named keyboard key.

The key name is shown as it appears on the keyboard.

An explanation of the key’s acronym or function immediately follows the first reference to the key, if required.

Text in a source file or a system prompt or other text that appears on a screen.

A command you enter at a system prompt or text you enter in response to a program prompt. You must enter commands for case-sensitive operating systems exactly as shown.

A word or term being emphasized.

A word or term given special emphasis.

18 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

How to Use This Guide

Warnings, Cautions, Recommendations, and Notes

Warnings, Cautions, Recommendations, and Notes

Warnings, Cautions, Recommendations, and Notes attract attention to essential or critical information in this guide. The types of information included in each are explained in the following examples.

Warning: To avoid serious personal injury or death, do not disregard warnings. All warnings use this symbol. Warnings are installation, operation, or maintenance procedures, practices, or statements, that if not strictly observed, may result in serious personal injury or even death.

Caution: To avoid personal injury, do not disregard cautions. All cautions use this symbol. Cautions are installation, operation, or maintenance procedures, practices, conditions, or statements, that if not strictly observed, may result in damage to, or destruction of, the equipment. Cautions are also used to indicate a long-term health hazard.

ESD Caution: To avoid personal injury and electrostatic discharge

(ESD) damage to equipment, do not disregard ESD cautions. All ESD cautions use this symbol. ESD cautions are installation, operation, or maintenance procedures, practices, conditions, or statements that if not strictly observed, may result in possible personal injury, electrostatic discharge damage to, or destruction of, static-sensitive components of the equipment.

Electrical Shock Caution: To avoid electrical shock and possible personal injury, do not disregard electrical shock cautions. All electrical shock cautions use this symbol. Electrical shock cautions are practices, procedures, or statements, that if not strictly observed, may result in possible personal injury, electrical shock damage to, or destruction of components of the equipment.

Recommendation: All recommendations use this symbol.

Recommendations indicate manufacturer-tested methods or known functionality. Recommendations contain installation, operation, or maintenance procedures, practices, conditions, or statements, that provide important information for optimum performance results.

Note: All notes use this symbol. Notes contain installation, operation, or maintenance procedures, practices, conditions, or statements, that alert you to important information, which may make your task easier or increase your understanding.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 19

How to Use This Guide

Related Documents and Information

Related Documents and Information

See your Symmetricom representative or sales office for a complete list of available documentation.

To order any accessory, contact the Symmetricom Sales Department. See http://www.symmetricom.com/company/contact-information/sales-offices for sales support contact information. If you encounter any difficulties installing or using the product, contact Symmetricom Global Services:

North and South America and all countries not listed below :

Symmetricom, Inc.

2300 Orchard Parkway

San Jose, CA 95131-1017

Toll-free in North America: 1-888-367-7966

Telephone: 408-428-7907

Fax: 408-428-7998 email: [email protected]

Internet: www.symmetricom.com

Europe, Middle East, and Africa (EMEA)

Symmetricom Global Services EMEA

Altlaufstrasse 42

85635 Hoehenkirchen-Siegertsbrunn

Germany

Telephone: +49 700 3288 6435

Fax: +49 8102 8961 533

E-mail: [email protected]

[email protected]

South Asia:

Suite A201, 2nd Floor, West Wing,

Wisma Consplant 2, No. 7,

Jalan SS16/1, 47500 Subang Jaya

Selangor, Malaysia

Toll-free in North America: 1-888-367-7966

Telephone: 408-428-7907

E-mail: [email protected]

India

GLOBAL BUSINESS PARK (Tower B)

Unit No. 707, 7th Floor

Mehrauli Gurgaon Road, Sector 26, Gurgaon – 122 002, Haryana

Telephone: +91 124 4861717

E-mail: [email protected]

20 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

How to Use This Guide

Where to Find Answers to Product and Document Questions

Where to Find Answers to Product and Document

Questions

For additional information about the products described in this guide, please contact your Symmetricom representative or your local sales office. You can also contact us on the web at www.symmetricom.com

.

When this manual is updated the updated version will be available for downloading from Symmetricom’s internet web site. Manuals are provided in PDF format for ease of use. After downloading, you can view the manual on a computer or print it using

Adobe Acrobat Reader.

Manual updates are available at: www.symmetricom.com

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 21

How to Use This Guide

Where to Find Answers to Product and Document Questions

22 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 1 Overview

This chapter provides introductory information for the TimeProvider 2300/2700.

In This Chapter

Overview

TimeProvider 2300/2700 Features

Software Options

Security Features

Physical Description

Functional Description

Configuration Management

Alarms

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 23

Chapter 1 Overview

Overview

Overview

The Symmetricom® TimeProvider™ 2700 is an IEEE 1588 Precision Time Protocol

(PTP) Grandmaster scaled and optimized for deployment to support small cells and to meet the stringent phase timing and synchronization requirements of 4G/LTE networks.

With an integrated GNSS receiver (GPS or GLONASS) the TimeProvider 2700 meets requirements of the ITU-T G.8272 standard for a Primary Reference Time

Clock (PRTC). It can operate in Synchronous Ethernet (SyncE) networks, and supports from 8 to 64 PTP clients. The TimeProvider 2700 offers the optional capability to accept a PTP input or T1/E1 input to complement and backup the

GNSS signal. Additional output capabilities allow it to support legacy frequency timing applications.

The TimeProvider 2300 Advanced Boundary Clock accepts PTP input. It can operate in Synchronous Ethernet (SyncE) networks, and supports from 8 to 64 PTP clients. The TimeProvider 2300 offers the optional capability to accept T1/E1 input to complement and backup the PTP input signal. Additional output capabilities allow it to support legacy frequency timing applications.

TimeProvider 2300/2700 Features

IEEE 1588 Precision Time Protocol Grandmaster

– ITU-T G.8265.1, Telecom-2008, and Default (optional) profiles

Multi-Sync Enabled Boundary Clock (licensed on TP 2700)

GNSS (GPS and GLONASS), Primary Reference Time Clock (PRTC)

(TP 2700 only)

Support for 8 to 64 PTP clients

SyncE Input and Output

2 Gigabit Ethernet PTP/SyncE Interfaces (SFP or RJ45)

E1/T1 Input or Output (optional)

10 MHZ or PPS, and TOD output

1 Gigabit Ethernet MGMT Port

1 EIA-232 Serial (Craft) Port

LED indicators

Compact 1 RU Footprint

CLI management and SNMP traps

DC or AC power

HTTP/HTTPS/SSL Network Support

24 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 1 Overview

Overview

Software Options

The TimeProvider 2300/2700 also provides several software options. An activation key is required to access these options, which include:

Greater client capacity : Client capacity can be increased from 8 to 16, 32, or

64, clients, allowing network engineers to design for capacity they need today and be protected for increased requirements in the future.

GPS and GLONASS : The basic model of the TP 2700 uses GPS and GLONASS signals as its primary reference. A software license option adds support for concurrent GPS and GLONASS signals, adding another dimension of sync protection for your network. Use of GLONASS requires different antennas than if only GPS is used. (The TP 2300 does not have GNSS.)

PTP Input : Employing PTP distributed over the backhaul network provides a backup to GNSS, allowing the oscillator to hold accurate timing longer than otherwise possible. The PTP client option, enabling a boundary clock function, includes advanced algorithms that compensate for network asymmetry-particularly important for LTE-TDD and LTE-A networks with tight phase synchronization requirements. The PTP Input License is included as part of the TP 2300 base model.

SyncE Output : Synchronous Ethernet provides a stable frequency reference for

Ethernet networks. This software option enables SyncE on the Ethernet output port, operating in conjunction with PTP output on the same port. SyncE on the

Ethernet input port is supported in the basic configuration.

E1/T1 Input/Output : The E1/T1 software option activates this interface for frequency synchronization of equipment using this established reference for timing.

PPS+TOD RS422 Output : Commonly used in test equipment and other devices, this option enables an RS422 port for Pulse Per Second (PPS) and Time of Day

(TOD) signals

See

TimeProvider 2300/2700 Part Numbers , on page 267 for part numbers for all

available options.

Activation keys are associated with the serial number of the device on which the keys are stored and travel with that device. The user must manually enter key(s) with CLI commands to gain access to the licensed software options.

Security Features

The TP 2300/2700 was designed to provide a high level of security on the Ethernet ports. The protocols running on the unit run from behind an internal firewall. This allows access to the UDP ports to be limited or completely inaccessible by other systems.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 25

Chapter 1 Overview

Physical Description

Each of the service ports only allows PTP, ICMP, and IGMP. The MGMT port allows user-configuration of the firewall, which includes ICMP, FTP, SSH, telnet,

HTTPS/HTTP and SNMP.

The ETH1 and ETH2 service ports do not support routing protocols between the ports. This prevents a malicious attack on the ETH1 port (network 1) to be used to send a malicious attack via the ETH2 port (network 2) or vice-versa.

The ETH1 and ETH2 service ports also include a hardware traffic limiter. If the number of packets per second exceeds the limit, the unit will generate an alarm indicating excessive traffic is being seen. This could be an indication of a malicious attack or it could also be a large number of clients requesting service from the server. The system will drop packets received in excess of the limit. Packets received below the limit will be handled normally.

If the ETH1 and ETH2 service ports do come under attack, only the ports under attack will be affected due to the system's architecture. The MGMT port will continue to provide all management facilities for the system during this type of attack. To minimize system resource usage and deter denial of service attacks, the system is configured to allow a maximum ICMP ping request rate of 16 per second.

Conclusions

The TP 2300/2700's architecture isolates functional areas such as user interfaces and output signal generation to minimize the possible corruption of time and frequency outputs.

Only service-specific UDP protocols are enabled.

From a system security perspective the TP 2300/2700 provides the highest level of security while providing very accurate time and frequency outputs. However, it also requires that the user implement best-practice security safeguards in their networks for the most robust levels of security.

Physical Description

The TimeProvider 2300/2700 consists of a 19-inch (48 cm) rack mount chassis, plug-in modules, and hardware .

Note: The TP 2300/2700 comes equipped with 19-inch rack mounting brackets. 23-inch (58.42 cm) rack mounting adapters are also available as a separately ordered item. 21-inch (ETSI) rack mounting adapters are available as a separately ordered item.

26 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 1 Overview

Physical Description

All connections for the TimeProvider 2300/2700 are on the front panel. Figure 1-1

is a front view of the DC version TimeProvider 2300/2700 showing connectors and

LEDs. Figure 1-2 show the AC version.

Figure 1-1.

TimeProvider 2700 DC Version Connectors and LEDs

Figure 1-2.

TimeProvider 2700 AC Version Connectors and LEDs

Figure 1-3.

TimeProvider 2300 DC Version Connectors and LEDs

Figure 1-4.

TimeProvider 2300 AC Version Connectors and LEDs

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 27

Chapter 1 Overview

Physical Description

Communications Connections

The TimeProvider 2300/2700 can be controlled through either the Ethernet

Management port or the serial port.

Ethernet Management Port

The Ethernet Management port on the front panel of the TimeProvider 2300/2700 is a standard 10/100/1000 Base-T shielded RJ-45 receptacle. To connect the

TimeProvider 2300/2700 to an Ethernet network, use a standard twisted-pair

Ethernet RJ-45 cable (CAT5 minimum).

Serial (Craft) Port

The serial port connection is made through a DB-9 female connector on the front panel of the TimeProvider 2300/2700. This port, which supports a baud rate of

57.6k (57600-8-1-N-1), allows you to connect to a terminal or computer using a terminal emulation software package. When connecting to this port, use a shielded serial direct connect cable.

Figure 1-5

shows the DB-9 female connector for the serial port.

Figure 1-5.

Serial Port Connector

Input Connections

GNSS Connection

The TimeProvider 2700 features an SMA connector for input from GPS or

GLONASS navigation satellites to provide a frequency and time reference. GNSS is not available on the TImeProvider 2300.

Figure 1-6.

GNSS Input Connection

28 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 1 Overview

Physical Description

PTP / SyncE Input Connections

The TimeProvider 2300/2700 provides two possible PTP/SyncE input connections, labeled S1 and R1, although only one connection can be used at any time. The

TimeProvider 2300/2700 features a single Ethernet 1000 Small-form Factor

Pluggable (SFP) connection, labeled S1, for PTP/SyncE input (see

Figure 1-7

).

Only optical SFPs are supported. See Table 2-3

for a list recommended and supported SFPs.

Note: A license is required to enable PTP/SyncE Input functionality on the TP 2700.

Figure 1-7.

PTP Input Connections - R1 & S1

T1/E1 Input Connections

The TimeProvider 2300/2700 provides an RJ48c connector (

Figure 1-8 ) that can

accept the following signal types:

2.048 Mb/s (G.703/9)

2.048 MHz (G.703/13)

1.544 Mb/s (G.703)

1.544 MHz (G.703)

This port is also software configurable as a T1 or E1 output.

Note: A license is required to enable T1/E1 functionality.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 29

Chapter 1 Overview

Physical Description

Figure 1-8.

T1/E1 Input Connection

Output Connections

PTP / SyncE Output Connections

The TimeProvider 2300/2700 provides two possible PTP/SyncE output connections, labeled S2 and R2, although only one connection can be used at any time. The TimeProvider 2300/2700 features a single Ethernet 1000 Small-form

Factor Pluggable (SFP) connection (optical only), labeled S2, for PTP/SyncE output

(see

Figure 1-9 ). The TimeProvider 2300/2700 features a single RJ45 connector,

labeled R2. The TimeProvider 2300/2700 supports a maximum from 8 to 64 clients per system in various profiles.

Figure 1-9.

PTP Output Connections - R2 & S2

T1/E1 Output Connections

The TimeProvider 2300/2700 provides an RJ48c connector (

Figure 1-10

) with the following signal types:

2.048 Mb/s (G.703/9)

2.048 MHz (G.703/13)

1.544 Mb/s (G.703)

1.544 MHz (G.703)

This port is also software configurable as a T1 or E1 input.

Note: A license is required to enable T1/E1 functionality.

30 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 1 Overview

Physical Description

Figure 1-10. T1/E1 & TOD Output Connections

TOD Output Port

The TimeProvider 2300/2700 provides an RJ45 connector (

Figure 1-10 ) with Time

of Day (TOD) output.

10MHz & 1PPS Output Connections

The TimeProvider 2300/2700 features a BNC male connector that is software

configurable for either 10 MHz or 1PPS output. See Figure 1-11

.

Figure 1-11. 10 MHz/1PPS Output Port

Reset Button

The reset button has two functions. When pressed quickly, the system reboots.

When held for over 10 seconds, the system configuration is set to the factory default settings. This feature is useful if you have forgotten your password.

Power and Ground Connections

The TimeProvider 2300/2700 is available with either –48 VDC power or 120/240

VAC power. The TimeProvider 2300/2700 is not equipped with a Power switch; DC power is controlled by a power distribution panel connected to the power connectors. AC power is controlled by the unplugging the AC power cord. Frame ground connections on the TP 2300/2700 are made on the grounding stud located on the left side and right side of the front panel, as identified with the international

Ground marking, as shown in

Figure 1-12

and

Figure 1-13

.

Warning: To avoid serious personal injury or death, exercise caution when working near high voltage lines and follow local building electrical codes for grounding the chassis.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 31

Chapter 1 Overview

Functional Description

Figure 1-12. TimeProvider 2300/2700 DC Version Power and Ground (TP 2700 shown)

Figure 1-13. TimeProvider 2300/2700 AC Version Power and Ground (TP 2700 shown)

Functional Description

See

Figure 1-14

below for a representation of the functional architecture for the

TimeProvider 2300/2700.

32 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Figure 1-14. Functional Architecture

.

Chapter 1 Overview

Functional Description

Note: The TP 2300 does not include a GNSS receiver.

LEDs

The TimeProvider 2300/2700 provides from three to six LEDs on the front panel, based on the specific model, that indicate the following:

Power Status

Battery A Status (DC power version only)

Battery B Status (DC power version only)

Alarm Status

GNSS Signal Status (TP 2700 only)

Clock Status

Figures 1-15 through 1-18 show the LEDs

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 33

Chapter 1 Overview

Functional Description

Figure 1-15. LEDs for TP2700 - DC Version

Figure 1-16. LEDs for TP2700 - AC Version

Figure 1-17. LEDs for TP2300 - DC Version

Figure 1-18. LEDs for TP2300 - AC Version

Communication Ports

Communication ports on the TimeProvider 2300/2700 allow you to provision, monitor, and troubleshoot the chassis. You can communicate with the TimeProvider

2300/2700 using either CLI or SNMP protocols.

Local Craft Serial Port

The serial port supports local control; you can configure the TimeProvider

2300/2700 with CLI commands using a terminal or computer with terminal emulation software. The connector is located on the front panel. The Local port is configured as a DCE interface and the default settings are as follows:

Baud = 57.6K

Data Bits = 8 bits

Parity = None

Stop bits = 1

Flow Control = None

Management Ethernet Port

The Management Ethernet connector provides connectivity to an Ethernet local area network. Each Ethernet port has a unique internet protocol (IP) address. Once the IP address is set and a connection is made to a Local Area Network (LAN), you can access the TimeProvider 2300/2700.

34 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 1 Overview

Functional Description

Time Inputs

The TimeProvider 2700 can use either GNSS, or PTP as external input references.

The TimeProvider 2300 can use PTP. The PTP signal connects to an SFP (S1) or

RJ45 (R1) connector on the front panel. The GNSS (GPS or GLONASS) reference connects to an SMA connector on the front panel of the TP 2700.

Note: A license is required to enable PTP Input functionality on the

TP 2700.

Frequency Inputs

The TimeProvider 2700 can use either GNSS, PTP, SyncE, or E1/T1 signals as external frequency input references. The TimeProvider 2300 can use either

PTP/SyncE or E1/T1 signals as frequency input references. The PTP/SyncE signals connect to an SFP (S1) or RJ45 (R1) connector on the front panel. The GNSS (GPS or GLONASS) reference connects to an SMA connector on the front panel. The

E1/T1 input connects to an RJ48c connector on the front panel.

Note: A license is required to enable T1/E1 functionality.

A license is required to enable PTP/SyncE Input functionality on the

TP 2700.

Synchronization and Timing Outputs

The TimeProvider 2300/2700 can provide PTP/SyncE, E1/T1, 10 MHz/1PPS, or

TOD output signals. The PTP/SyncE signal connects to an SFP (S1) or RJ45 (R1) connector on the front panel. The T1/E1 output connects to an RJ48c connector on the front panel. The 10MHz/1PPS output connects to a BNC connector on the front panel, and the TOD output connects to an RJ45 connector on the front panel.

Note: A license is required to enable T1/E1 functionality.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 35

Chapter 1 Overview

Configuration Management

Configuration Management

The Command Line Interface (CLI), also called the ASCII command set, can be used to control the TimeProvider 2300/2700 from a terminal connected to the

EIA-232 serial port, or the Ethernet MGMT port. Refer to Chapter 3, CLI Commands

for further details.

Note: Before you can communicate with the TimeProvider 2300/2700 through an Ethernet connection, you must first configure the Ethernet

port using the serial connection (see Provisioning the Ethernet

Ports , on page 189).

Web Interface for Status Information

The TP 2300/2700 also allows the user to access status information via the MGMT port using HTTP or HTTPS protocol. To use the TP 2300/2700 web interface, enter the MGMT port IP address into a web browser. Enter your user name and password for the TP 2300/2700 when prompted. See

Figure 1-19 for an example of the status

screen that will appear.

36 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Figure 1-19. Web Interface

Chapter 1 Overview

Alarms

Alarms

The TP 2300/2700 uses alarms to notify you when certain conditions are deteriorating below specified levels or when issues arise like loss of power or loss of connectivity. These alarms are indicated by status LEDs and by SNMP traps. You can provision the alarm to either be enabled or disabled and the current alarm state can be obtained via the communication ports. For more information, see

Provisioning Alarms , on page 227 and

Appendix A, System Messages .

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 37

Chapter 1 Overview

Alarms

38 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 2 Installing

This chapter describes the procedures for installing the TimeProvider 2300/2700.

In This Chapter

Getting Started

Unpacking the Unit

Rack Mounting the TimeProvider 2300/2700

Installation Check List

Signal Connections

Communications Connections

TP 2300/2700 Synchronization and Timing Connections

Connecting the GNSS Antenna

Installation Check List

Applying Power to the TimeProvider 2300/2700

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 39

Chapter 2 Installing

Getting Started

Getting Started

Before you begin to install the TimeProvider 2300/2700, review the information in this section.

If you encounter any difficulties during the installation process, contact

Symmetricom Global Services (SGS). See Contacting Technical Support , on page

272 for telephone numbers. Contact SGS - Product Technical Support for technical

information. Contact Customer Service for information about your order, RMAs, and other information.

Security Considerations for TP 2300/2700 Installation

The TP 2300/2700 should be installed in a physically secure and restricted location.

The TP 2300/2700's management Ethernet port should be installed behind the company's firewall to prevent public access.

Whenever possible, the TP 2300/2700's Ethernet service ports should be installed behind the company's firewall to prevent public access.

Site Survey

The TimeProvider 2300/2700 is intended for installation in the following locations:

Central Office intra-building

Cell site intra-building

NEC site

Aggregate site

Before you begin installation, determine the chassis location, ensure the appropriate power source is available (–48 VDC or 120/240 VAC), and ensure that the equipment rack is properly grounded.

The TimeProvider 2300/2700 is designed to mount in a 19-inch (48 cm) rack, occupies 1.75 in (4.5 cm, 1 RU) of vertical rack space, and has a depth of 10 in

(25.4 cm).

Note: 1RU above the TimeProvider 2300/2700 must be left unoccupied for heat dissipation.

23-inch (58.42 cm) rack mounting adapters are available as a separately ordered item. 21-inch (ETSI) rack mounting adapters are also available.

40 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 2 Installing

Getting Started

The DC version of the TimeProvider 2300/2700 is to be installed into a rack with permanent connection to the -48VDC mains. This connection is to be made to a branch over-current, short-circuit protection device with replaceable fusing of 1.5 amps, maximum. For permanently connected equipment, a readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated in the building installation wiring.

The AC version of the TimeProvider 2300/2700 is to be installed into a rack. The AC power connection is to be made to a 120 or 240 VAC power receptacle following local codes and requirements. An external Surge Protective Device is required to be used with the AC version of the TimeProvider 2300/2700.

Warning: The intra-building ports of the equipment is suitable for connection to intra-building or unexposed wiring or cabling only. The intra-building ports of the equipment MUST NOT be metallically connected to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use as intra-building interfaces only (Type

2 or Type 4 ports as described in GR-1089-CORE) and require isolation from the exposed OSP cabling. The addition of Primary

Protectors is not sufficient protection in order to connect these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.

Environmental Requirements

To prevent the unit from malfunctioning or interfering with other equipment, install and operate the unit according to the following guidelines:

Operating temperature: –40  F  to 149  F (–20  C to 65  C) for TP 2300/2700 with quartz oscillator (OCXO); 23  F  to 131  F (–5  C to 55  C) for TP 2300/2700 with

Rubidium oscillator. Startup temperature > -20  C (-4  F) for TP 2300/2700 with

OCXO.

Operating Humidity: 5% to 95% RH, maximum, w/condensation

Use only shielded cable for all signal wiring, including I/O, clocks and Ethernet.

Ground appropriately at both ends, or as required by local standards.

Secure all cable screws to their corresponding connectors.

Caution: To avoid interference, you must consider the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) of nearby equipment when you install the TP 2300/2700.

Electromagnetic interference can adversely affect the operation of nearby equipment.

Installation Tools and Equipment

You will need the following tools and equipment to install the TimeProvider

2300/2700:

Standard tool kit

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 41

Chapter 2 Installing

Unpacking the Unit

Cable ties, waxed string, or acceptable cable clamps

1 mm² / 18 AWG (minimum) stranded wire at 300 volt insulation for –48 VDC

1 mm² / 16 AWG wire to connect grounding lug to permanent earth ground

Two UL listed Ring Lugs for grounding connections

Crimping tool to crimp the ring lug

Shielded cabling of the appropriate impedance required by the specific signal type for signal wiring (including GNSS, and Ethernet)

Mating connectors for terminating signal wiring

ESD wrist strap for installing modules

Fasteners for mounting the equipment in rack

Digital multimeter or standard Voltmeter for verifying power connections to the chassis

Laptop computer with communications software (e.g., Microsoft Hyperterminal,

ProComm Plus or EmTec ZOC) for setting system parameters

Unpacking the Unit

The TimeProvider 2300/2700 is packaged to protect them from normal shock, vibration and handling damage. (Each unit is packaged separately.)

Caution: To avoid ESD damage to parts that are packaged with the

TP 2300/2700, observe the following procedures.

Unpack and inspect the unit as follows:

1. Wear a properly grounded protective wrist strap or other ESD device.

2. Inspect the container for signs of damage. If the container appears to be damaged, notify both the carrier and your Symmetricom distributor. Retain the shipping container and packing material for the carrier to inspect.

3. Open the container, being careful to cut only the packaging tape.

4. Locate and set aside the printed information and paperwork that is included in the container.

5. Remove the unit from the container and place it on an anti-static surface.

6. Locate and set aside small parts which may be packed in the container.

7. Remove the accessories from the container.

42 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 2 Installing

Rack Mounting the TimeProvider 2300/2700

8. Remove the anti-static packaging from the unit and accessories.

9. Verify that the model and item number shown on the shipping list agrees with the model and item number on the equipment. The item number can be found on a label affixed to the bottom of the unit. See

Figure 2-1 for the location of the label

on the TP 2300/2700. Contact your Symmetricom distributor if the model or item number do not match.

For a complete listing of item numbers, see

Table 5-4

and Table 5-5 .

Figure 2-1.

TP 2300/2700 - Location of Product Label

Rack Mounting the TimeProvider 2300/2700

The installation procedure described in this section provides general guidelines for installing the TimeProvider 2300/2700. Always follow applicable local electrical standards.

Use the following steps to mount the TimeProvider 2300/2700 in a rack.

Note: 1RU above the TimeProvider 2300/2700 must be left unoccupied for heat dissipation.

The TimeProvider 2300/2700 comes equipped with 19-inch rack mounting brackets.

23-inch (58.42 cm) rack mounting adapters are available as a separately ordered item. 21-inch (ETSI) rack mounting adapters are also available.

1. TimeProvider 2300/2700 is shipped with rack mounting brackets attached. The rack mounting brackets can be removed and reattached in a different orientation,

if desired. See Figure 2-3

for mounting hole placements. See

Figure 2-2 and for

chassis dimensions. Ensure that the mounting brackets on both sides are

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 43

Chapter 2 Installing

Rack Mounting the TimeProvider 2300/2700 attached to the chassis at equal distances from the front of the unit (see

Figure 2-4

) using 6-32 x 1/4-inch screws.

2. Mount the chassis to the front of the equipment rack rails with four screws and associated hardware. Use the proper screws for the equipment rack.

Figure 2-2.

Dimensions for TimeProvider 2300/2700

Figure 2-3.

Mounting Hole Placements for TP 2300/2700

44 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Figure 2-4.

Rack Mounting the TP 2300/2700

Chapter 2 Installing

Making Ground and Power Connections

Making Ground and Power Connections

Warning: To avoid accidental power-up of the chassis, remove the A and B fuses on the branch over-current protection unit before beginning installation of the DC version of the TP 2300/2700. The unit is not equipped with a power on/off switch.

The DC version of the TimeProvider 2300/2700 has –48 VDC power connectors which are located on the left side of the front panel (see

Figure 2-5 ). Separate frame

ground terminals are on the left side and right side of the front panel.

The AC version of the TimeProvider 2300/2700 has a 120/240 VAC connector,

which is located on the left side of the front panel. (see Figure 2-6

). Separate frame ground terminals are on the left side and right side of the front panel.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 45

Chapter 2 Installing

Making Ground and Power Connections

Ground Connections

Frame ground connections are made using the M4 Grounding Terminal Studs,

which are marked with the universal ground symbol, as shown in Figure 2-9

. These studs are located on the left and right sides of the front panel for the TP 2300/2700.

Figure 2-5.

TimeProvider 2700 Power & Ground Connections - DC Version

Figure 2-6.

TimeProvider 2700 Power & Ground Connections - AC Version

Figure 2-7.

TimeProvider 2300 Power & Ground Connections - DC Version

Figure 2-8.

TimeProvider 2300 Power & Ground Connections - AC Version

46 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 2 Installing

Making Ground and Power Connections

Figure 2-9.

Universal Ground Symbol

Note: If only one ground connection is to be used,

Symmetricom recommends connecting to the frame ground connection closest to the power connector (AC or DC).

After installing the TimeProvider 2300/2700 into the rack, connect the chassis to the proper grounding zone or master ground bar. The DC version of the TimeProvider

2300/2700 can be part of a Common Bonding network (CBN) or an Isolated

Bonding network (IBN). The AC version of the TimeProvider 2300/2700 can only be part of a CBN. The System is to be connected as a DC-I configuration. All bonding and grounding connection shall be made of copper (tinned or untinned), per

GR-1089, R9-17 [82].

Run a 16 AWG green/yellow-striped insulated wire from the TimeProvider

2300/2700 grounding terminal to the earth Ground on the rack. The rack grounding method is below.

Recommendation: Although there are a number of methods for connecting the equipment to earth ground, Symmetricom recommends running a cable of the shortest possible length from the ground lug to earth ground.

1. Crimp the customer-supplied UL listed Ring Lug to one end of the 16 AWG wire.

Connect the ring lug to the ground terminal on the left side of the front panel using the supplied M4 Kept machine nut, tightening to a torque value of 15.95 in-lbs. The surface of the TimeProvider 2300/2700 earth grounding terminal must be clean of contaminants and oxidation.

2. Crimp the appropriate customer-supplied UL listed Ring Lug to the other end of the 1 mm² / 16 AWG green/yellow-striped wire. Remove the paint and sand the area around the screw hole to ensure the proper conductivity. Coat the connection with an electrically conductive antioxidant compound such as

Kopr-shield spray. Connect this Ring Lug to the rack with appropriate customer supplied screws and external star lock washers, tightening to a torque value of

53.45 in-lbs.

3. Using a digital voltmeter, measure between the ground and chassis and verify that no voltage exists between them.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 47

Chapter 2 Installing

Making Ground and Power Connections

DC Power Connections

Use the following procedure to make the power connections for the DC version of the TimeProvider 2300/2700.

Warning: To avoid possible damage to equipment, you must provide power source protective fusing as part of the installation. The

TimeProvider 2300/2700 is intended for installation in a restricted-access location.

Caution: To avoid damage to the unit, remove the fuses in the fuse panel which provides power to the TimeProvider 2300/2700 before making power connections.

1. Ensure the power source is turned off.

2. Connect the two frame ground terminals to earth ground.

3. Locate the power connectors included in the installation kit.

4. Using 1 mm² / 18 AWG (minimum) stranded wire, connect primary and secondary power to the connectors per the polarity markings. Use the polarity markings of "A", “B” and "RTN" as a reference for the proper polarity connections. Tighten the screws for Returns to a torque value of 9.6 in-lbs.

Note: The -48VDC power must be connected with the proper polarity.

The unit will not be damaged by reverse polarity, but the unit will not operate if the polarity is reversed.

5. Attach the DC power connector cover, as shown in

Figure 2-10 , and tighten the

screws.

Figure 2-10. TimeProvider 2300/2700 DC Power Connector Cover

48 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 2 Installing

Making Ground and Power Connections

Testing DC Power Connections

To verify that the power connections to the TimeProvider 2300/2700 are correct, follow the steps in this section. The primary DC power connections on the TP

2300/2700 are referred to as Power A and Return A. The secondary DC power connections are referred to as Power B and Return B. Use a digital multimeter

(Fluke 77 or equivalent) to make the measurements.

1. Remove all fuses that supply power to the unit from the fuse panel.

2. Remove the power connector cover and disconnect the -48V battery leads from the unit’s power connector terminals. See the primary and secondary power connections in

Figure 2-11 . Leave the Return battery leads connected to the unit.

Figure 2-11. Power and Ground Connections on DC Version of TimeProvider 2300/2700

3. At the chassis end of the battery leads, use the multimeter to measure the voltage between the following test points:

Test Point

Battery A lead

Battery A lead

Battery A lead

Battery B lead

Battery B lead

Test Point

Battery B lead

Primary: Return A

Earth Ground

Result

0 V

0 V

0 V

Secondary: Return B 0 V

Earth Ground 0 V

4. Reconnect the – 48V battery A and battery B leads to the – 48V A and – 48V B terminal connectors.

5. Install the A fuse in the power source fuse panel.

6. Measure the voltage between the – 48V A and Return terminals on the primary power module. The multimeter should indicate –38.4 VDC to –72 VDC.

7. Install the B fuse in the power source fuse panel.

8. Measure the voltage between the – 48V B and Return terminals on the secondary power module. The multimeter should indicate –38.4 VDC to –72 VDC.

9. Reconnect the DC power connector cover.

The unit is now powered up.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 49

Chapter 2 Installing

Signal Connections

AC Power Connection

Use the following procedure to make the power connections for the AC version of the TimeProvider 2300/2700. An external Surge Protective Device is required to be used with the AC version of the TimeProvider 2300/2700.

Figure 2-12. TimeProvider 2300/2700 AC Power Connector

Warning: To avoid possible damage to equipment, you must provide power source protective fusing as part of the installation. The

TimeProvider 2300/2700 is intended for installation in a restricted-access location.

1. Insert the female end of the AC power cord into the AC power connector on the

TP 2300/2700.

2. Secure the power cord to the tab on the lower-left corner of the unit with a zip tie

(or similar) to prevent accidental removal of the power cord.

3. Plug the male end of the AC power cord into an active 120 VAC or 240 VAC power socket.

The unit is now powered up.

Signal Connections

The connectors for the TP 2300/2700 and TP 2300 are located on the front panel.

Communications Connections

The communication connections allow user control of the TimeProvider 2300/2700.

The EIA-232 serial port and Ethernet Management port are located on the front panel are shown in

Figure 1-1 .

System Management (MGMT) Port

The System Management port is standard 10/100/1000 Base-T shielded RJ-45 receptacle. To connect the TimeProvider 2300/2700 to an Ethernet network, use an

Ethernet RJ-45 cable. See

Table 2-1 for connector pinouts.

50 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 2 Installing

Signal Connections

RJ-45 Pin

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

Table 2-1. System Management Ethernet Connector Pin Assignments

10Base-T

100Base-T

Signal

TX+ (Transmit positive)

TX- (Transmit negative)

RX+ (Receive positive)

Not Used

Not Used

RX- (Receive negative)

Not Used

Not Used

1000Base-T

Signal

BI_DA+

BI_DA 

BI_DB+

BI_DC+

BI_DC 

BI_DB 

BI_DD+

BI_DD 

Serial (Craft) Port

The serial port connection is made through a DB-9 female connector on the front panel of the unit. This port, which supports a baud rate of 57.6k (57600-8-1-N-1), allows you to connect to a terminal or computer using a terminal emulation software package for remote monitoring and control. When connecting to this port, use a shielded serial direct connect cable.

Figure 2-13

shows the DB-9 male connector that mates with the serial port on the

TimeProvider 2300/2700.

Figure 2-13. Serial Port Male Mating Connector Pins

Table 2-2 describes the DB-9 connector pin assignments for the serial port.

Table 2-2. Serial Port Connector Pin Assignments

Signal

TXD (Received Data) 2

Pin

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 51

Chapter 2 Installing

Signal Connections

Table 2-2. Serial Port Connector Pin Assignments (Continued)

Signal

RXD (Transmitted Data)

Ground

3

5

Pin

TP 2300/2700 Synchronization and Timing Connections

The TimeProvider 2700 has one GNSS input, one PTP timing input (license required), and one PTP timing output. The TimeProvider 2300 has one PTP timing input and one PTP timing output. The TimeProvider 2300/2700 also has one E1 or

T1 output, one 10MHz or 1PPS output, and one TOD output.

GNSS Connection (TP 2700 Only)

To connect a GNSS signal to the TP 2700, you must install a GPS or GLONASS antenna. See

Connecting the GNSS Antenna , on page 56.

Caution: The GNSS cable should only be connected while the unit is properly earth grounded.

Warning: To avoid possible damage to equipment, you must provide external lightning protection when installing the GNSS antenna to prevent transients.

PTP Connections

The TimeProvider 2300/2700 features two Ethernet 1000 Small-form Factor

Pluggable (SFP) connections, S1 and S2. The S1 port is a PTP input connection.

The S2 port is a PTP output connection. See

Figure 2-14 .

Figure 2-14. PTP Input/Output

52 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 2 Installing

Signal Connections

The TimeProvider 2300/2700 also features two standard 100/1000Base-T shielded

RJ-45 receptacles, R1 and R2, that can be used instead of the SFP ports. R1 is the

PTP input connection. R2 is the PTP output connection.

Note: The SFP ports, S1 and S2, are mutually exclusive of the RJ-45 ports, R1 and R2

Only the SFP transceivers in Table 2-3

are recommended and supported. Other

SFP transceivers are not supported and may cause the TimeProvider 2300/2700 to

not comply with regulatory requirements. Figure 2-15

shows a typical optical SFP transceiver.

Figure 2-15. Optical SFP Transceiver

Table 2-3. Recommended and Supported SFP Transceivers

Type

Optical 1000 Base-LX

Single-Mode Ethernet 1310nm

(Symmetricom 121-20621-10-2)

Optical 1000 Base-SX

Multi-Mode Ethernet 850nm

(Symmetricom 121-20621-11-2)

Transceiver

Avago AFCT-5701PZ

Finisar FTLF1319P1BTL

Avago AFBR-5710PZ

Finisar FTLF8519P2BNL

Distance (max)

10km on 9/125  m single-mode fiber

500m on 50/125  m multi-mode fiber

275m on 62.5/125  m multi-mode fiber

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 53

Chapter 2 Installing

Signal Connections

Note: Recommended and supported SFP connectors comply with

FDA radiation performance standards, 21 CFR Subchapter J.

T1/E1 Connection

The TimeProvider 2300/2700 features a single RJ-48C port for either a T1 or E1 output signal, as shown in

Figure 2-16

. This RJ-48C port is software configurable as either a T1 output port or E1 output port.

The T1/E1 port can provide the following output signal types:

2.048 Mb/s (G.703/9)

2.048 MHz (G.703/13)

1.544 Mb/s (G.703)

1.544 MHz (G.703)

Note: A license is required to enable T1/E1 functionality.

Figure 2-16. T1 / E1 and TOD Outputs RJ-45 Connection

Table 2-4. T1/E1 Output Port Pin-Outs - RJ-48C Connector

Pin

1

2

3

4

5

Signal

Rx Ring

Rx Tip

NC

Tx Ring

Tx Tip

54 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 2 Installing

Signal Connections

Table 2-4. T1/E1 Output Port Pin-Outs - RJ-48C Connector

Pin

6

7

8

Signal

NC

NC

NC

TOD Connection

The TimeProvider 2300/2700 features a RJ-45 port for the TOD output signal, as

shown in Figure 2-16

. See Table 2-5

for pin-outs for this RJ-45 connector. See Table

2-6 for TOD default parameters.

Table 2-5. 1PPS+TOD Port Pin-Outs - RJ45 Connector

Pin

6

7

4

5

8

1

2

3

Signal

422_1_Pos

422_1_Neg

No Connection

No Connection

No Connection

No Connection

422_2_Pos

422_2_Neg

Comment

1PPS

1PPS

Default state is open (high impedance)

Default state is open (high impedance)

Default state is open (high impedance)

Default state is open (high impedance)

TOD time information

TOD time information

See

Table B-16 ,

Table B-17 , Table B-18

, and Table B-19

in Appendix B for TOD format details.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 55

Chapter 2 Installing

Connecting the GNSS Antenna

1PPS/10MHz Connections

Table 2-6. Default Parameters for TOD Information Transmission

Pin

Baud Rate

Parity Check

Start Bit

Stop Bit

Idle Frame

Data Bits

Default

9600

None

1 (low level)

1 (high level)

High level

8

Comment

Cannot be changed

The TimeProvider 2300/2700 features a single BNC male port for the 10 MHz or

1PPS signal. See Figure 2-17 . This port is software-configurable to provide either a

1PPS or 10 MHz signal.

Figure 2-17. 10MHz/1PPS Output Connection

Connecting the GNSS Antenna

Caution: The GNSS cables should only be connected while the unit is properly earth grounded.

The antenna connections for the TP 2700 are made at the connector labeled

GNSS. Allow at least one hour for the unit to track and lock to GPS or GLONASS satellites.

Figure 2-18. GNSS Input Connection

56 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 2 Installing

Installation Check List

Proper cable, grounding techniques, and lightning arrestors should be used. Mount the antenna outside, preferably on the roof with an unobstructed view of the sky. Do not mount the antenna near a wall or other obstruction blocking part of the sky.

Mount the antenna well above roads or parking lots.

Note: Cable delay must be determined and entered into TP 2700 with the “

set gnss

cable-delay” command.

Warning: To avoid serious personal injury or death, exercise caution when working near high voltage lines. In particular:

Use extreme caution when installing the antenna near, under, or around high voltage lines.

Follow local building electrical codes for grounding the chassis.

Installation Check List

To verify that the installation of the TimeProvider 2300/2700 is complete, perform the checks and procedures in

Table 2-7 .

Table 2-7. Installation Completeness Checklist

Operation

Ensure the TimeProvider 2300/2700 chassis is securely attached to mounting rack

Verify that all power and ground wires are installed correctly and securely

Verify that all communications cables are properly installed

Verify that all input and output cables are properly installed

Complete

Applying Power to the TimeProvider 2300/2700

The TimeProvider 2300/2700 is not equipped with a Power switch. DC power is controlled by a power distribution panel. After installing the unit in a rack and making the necessary connections described in previous sections, turn on power at the distribution panel.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 57

Chapter 2 Installing

Applying Power to the TimeProvider 2300/2700

Normal Power Up Indications

As the TimeProvider 2300/2700 powers up and begins normal operation, the LEDs all turn on. After the self-test is complete and the firmware is operational, the LED states may change to indicate the appropriate state or status.

Table 2-8 provides a description of the TP 2300/2700 LEDs.

Table 2-8. LED Descriptions

Label

POWER

PWR A

PWR B

CLOCK

ALARM

GNSS

MGMT

ETH1 -S1

LED

Power

Module Power Indicator

-48V A-Bus

A-Bus Battery Indicator

-48V B-Bus

B-Bus Battery Indicator

Clock Status

Alarm

System alarm/fault indicator

GNSS Status

GPS / GLONASS engine status indicator

Ethernet Management Port

LEDs on the Ethernet connector

Ethernet Port 1 - SFP (s1)

LEDs on the Ethernet connector

Description

Green - Power available

Off - Power not available

Off - A-No Power

Green - A-Bus power OK

Off - B-No Power

Green - A-Bus power OK

Green - Time or Frequency clock in Normal or

Bridging state

Flashing Green - Time or Frequency clock in

Fast Lock or Recovery state

Amber - Time or Frequency clock in Freerun or

Holdover state

Flashing Amber - Clock in Warmup state

Off -Operating normally

Amber - Minor Alarm(s)

Red - Major/Critical Alarm(s)

Green - GNSS enabled and GNSS engine/interface is operating and tracking normally

Amber - GNSS enabled and GNSS engine or antenna interface has operational issues, not tracking normally

Red - Short circuit or open circuit

Off - GNSS disabled or not installed

Left Flashing Green - Activity for 10/100/1000M

Left Green - Link Established for 10/100/1000M

Left Off - Link has not been established

Right Amber - Link established for 100M

Right Green - Link established for 1000M

Right Off -No link for 100/1000M

Green - Activity on link for 1000M

Off - No Activity

58 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 2 Installing

Applying Power to the TimeProvider 2300/2700

Table 2-8. LED Descriptions (Continued)

Label LED

ETH1 - R1 Ethernet Port 1 - RJ45 (r1)

LEDs on the Ethernet connector

ETH2 - S2 Ethernet Port 2 - SFP (S2)

LEDs on the Ethernet connector

ETH2 - R2 Ethernet Port 2 - RJ45 (R2)

LEDs on the Ethernet connector

Description

Left Amber Flashing - Activity on link for 100M

Left Amber On - Link established for 100M

Left Amber Off - No link for 100M

Right Green Flashing - Activity on link for 1000M

Right Green On - Link established for 1000M

Right Green Off - No Link for 1000M

Green - Activity on link for 1000M

Off - No Activity

Left Amber Flashing - Activity on link for 100M

Left Amber On - Link established for 100M

Left Amber Off - No link for 100M

Right Green Flashing - Activity on link for 1000M

Right Green On - Link established for 1000M

Right Green Off - No Link for 1000M

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 59

Chapter 2 Installing

Applying Power to the TimeProvider 2300/2700

60 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3 CLI Commands

This chapter describes the CLI command conventions, the prompts, line editing functions, and command syntax. The CLI command functions and features are organized by user security access levels and are listed alphabetically.

In This Appendix

CLI Overview

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 61

Chapter 3

CLI Overview

CLI Overview

The Command Line Interface (CLI), also called the ASCII command set, can be used to control the TimeProvider 2300/2700 from a terminal connected to the

EIA-232 serial port, or the Ethernet port.

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Conventions

The following are conventions used for the TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI command set.

Commands are not case sensitive.

{ }  Braces indicate more than one parameter data option. When entering options in the CLI command, enter one option from those available within the braces. Options within braces { } are separated by a pipe ( | ).

[ ]  Brackets provide information about the allowed range. The first value is the minimum, and the last value is the maximum.

Bold highlights keywords in the command syntax

Italics indicate variable options.

CLI Command Keyboard Usage

You must press the SPACE key, and then press the TAB key after entering a CLI command. Also, after entering a command, you may see <enter>. This is a prompt for you to press ENTER to execute the command that you entered.

The interface has built-in features for navigating within the CLI command hierarchy, which are as follows:

The TAB key can be used at any time while typing a command (including at the prompt) to provide continuation options. Press the TAB key to display a list of the available commands. Press the TAB key at any time while typing a command 

TimeProvider 2300/2700 will respond with the completion of the keyword or available completion choices based on the letters you typed.

The ?

(SHIFT+QUESTION MARK) accesses the CLI online help. It can be used at any time while typing a command (including at the prompt) to provide continuation options. These options include brief descriptions of commands, or data type, format, and range.

If typing of a keyword is partially complete, the completion will display if it is unique, otherwise, the completion choices will be available.

If the keyword is complete, and you press the TAB key or ? (SHIFT+QUESTION

MARK), the choices for the next syntax element will display.

62 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

CLI Overview

In the following example, if you press the TAB key, or the ?

(SHIFT+QUESTION MARK), after typing s, the CLI commands set , set-timeout , show , and sync display.

Typing s at the prompt:

TP2700> s

Then pressing the TAB key : set set-timeout show sync

Or pressing the ? (SHIFT+QUESTION MARK) will display the available commands that start with s (for this example) and brief descriptions of those commands: set -Set TP2700 information or setting show -Display TP2700 information or setting set-session-timeout -Set the inactivity timeout to the defined seconds

Previously typed commands can be recalled by using the UP ARROW key. You can recall up to five previously typed commands. Continually pressing UP

ARROW will show previously typed commands but does not cycle. After pressing the UP ARROW key five times, you will go back to the last command you previously typed. Use the DOWN ARROW key to cycle the five prior typed commands in the opposite direction.

You can use the BACKSPACE to correct keystroke errors, or to reuse parts of a previously typed command. When using BACKSPACE, the removed characters will still appear on the screen, but they have been removed to the position shown by the cursor. When you start typing, the removed characters are overwritten.

Command Line Format

The command line format is as follows:

[Verb] Command [Parameter] [Data] EOL

Verb - the type of action to be taken with the command.

– Set - enables you to provision a defined parameter.

– Show - enables you to display the provisioned state of a parameter.

Parameter - command input that defines the particular command element to be shown or modified.

Data - the data input for the parameter.

EOL - this parser responds only to <CR Return>. When the parser receives

<CR Return>, the input is terminated, and the command line entry is processed.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 63

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

Command User Levels

The TimeProvider 2300/2700 provides a hierarchy of CLI command user levels that permit an increasing level of access to system parameters. This allows the system administrator to add users who can only view but not change system parameters and users who can view and change system parameters.

The users assigned to each security level have access options available as follows:

Level 1 - user class, with read-only rights

Level 2 - config user class, with read-write rights

Level 3 - administrator user class, with read-write rights and can also configure users and upgrade firmware

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

This section provides an alphabetical listing and details of all CLI commands.

show alarm

Displays the system's standing (active) alarms and events.

Command Syntax: show {alarm | event}

Example 1:

TP2700> show alarm

Response 1:

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

|ID |Severity|Date-Time |Descriptions |

|---|--------|-------------------|---------------------------------------------|

|111|minor |2013-05-09 17:14:49|Ethernet port ETH2 link down |

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Example 2:

TP2700> show event

Response 2:

64 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

-------------------------------------------------------------------

|ID |Date-Time |Descriptions |

|---|-------------------|-----------------------------------------|

|4 |2013-05-09 17:53:26|Entered time normal-track state |

|...|...................|.........................................|

|4 |2013-05-09 17:53:26|Entered frequency normal-track state |

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Remarks: The information displayed is expected to be identical to an entry in the

Event/Alarm Log File.

Level : User, Config, and Admin

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 65

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

show alarm-config

Displays the alarm configuration including alarm ID, severity, state, reporting delay and description for the TP 2300/2700 alarms. This also displays if the alarm is transitory.

Command Syntax:

Example: show alarm-config

TP2700> show alarm-config

Response :

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

|ID |Severity|State |Delay |Event/Alarm Descriptions |

|----|--------|-------|-------|------------------------------------------------|

|1 |minor |enable |0 |"Entered time/frequency warm-up state" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|2 |minor |enable |0 |"Entered time/frequency free-run state" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|3 |event |enable |0 |"Entered time/frequency fast-track state" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|4 |event |enable |0 |"Entered time/frequency normal-track state" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|5 |event |enable |0 |"Entered time/frequency bridging state" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|6 |minor |enable |0 |"Entered time/frequency holdover state" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|7 |major |enable |0 |"Entered time/frequency ext holdover state" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|8 |minor |enable |0 |"Entered time/frequency holdover rec state" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|21 |minor |enable |0 |"GNSS/SYNCE/PTP/T1E1 input poor quality" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|22 |event |enable |0 |"GNSS/PTP input time qualified" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|23 |event |enable |0 |"GNSS/SYNCE/PTP/T1E1 input freq qualified" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|24 |event |enable |0 |"GNSS/PTP input selected as time reference" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|25 |event |enable |0 |"GNSS/SYNCE/PTP/T1E1 input sel as freq ref" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|26 |minor |enable |0 |"T1E1 input Loss Of Signal (LOS)" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|27 |minor |enable |0 |"T1E1 input Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|28 |minor |enable |0 |"T1E1 input Out Of Frame (OOF)" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|29 |minor |enable |0 |"T1E1 input CRC error (CRC)" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|30 |minor |enable |0 |"T1E1 input Bipolar Violation (BPV)" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|31 |minor |enable |0 |"T1E1 input frequency error" |

66 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|32 |event |enable |0 |"SYNCE/T1E1 input SSM changed" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|51 |minor |enable |0 |"Incompatible transport type" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|52 |minor |enable |0 |"PTP input lost" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|53 |event |enable |0 |"PTP master switched" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|54 |event |enable |0 |"PTP time/frequency input not traceable" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|71 |minor |enable |0 |"PTP server near client limit on ETH2" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|72 |event |enable |0 |"PTP client dropped from ETH2 client list" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|73 |event |enable |0 |"PTP client added to ETH2 client list" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|74 |event |enable |0 |"PTP client list on ETH2 refreshed" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|75 |event |enable |0 |"PTP state changed to disabled on ETH2" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|76 |event |enable |0 |"PTP state changed to listening on ETH2" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|77 |event |enable |0 |"PTP state changed to master on ETH2" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|78 |event |enable |0 |"PTP state changed to passive on ETH2" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|91 |minor |enable |0 |"GNSS receiver communications failed" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|92 |minor |enable |0 |"GNSS receiver not tracking satellite" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|93 |minor |enable |0 |"GNSS signal low" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|94 |major |enable |0 |"GNSS antenna voltage out of range" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|95 |major |enable |0 |"GNSS antenna current out of range" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|96 |minor |enable |0 |"GNSS antenna short-circuit" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|97 |minor |enable |0 |"GNSS antenna open-circuit" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|111 |minor |enable |0 |"Ethernet port link down" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|112 |minor |enable |0 |"Excessive traffic on port ETH{1|2}" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|113 |minor |enable |0 |"Unsupported SFP on ETH{1|2}" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|131 |critical|enable |0 |"Power out of range" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|132 |critical|enable |0 |"Operational failure" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|133 |major |enable |0 |"Battery(-48V)-A failure" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|134 |major |enable |0 |"Battery(-48V)-B failure" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|135 |critical|enable |0 |"FPGA failure" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|136 |critical|enable |0 |"Flash partition failure" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 67

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

|137 |critical|enable |0 |"PLL synthesizer unlock" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|138 |critical|enable |0 |"Rubidium unlock" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|139 |event |enable |0 |"Temperature out of range" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|151 |critical|enable |0 |"Production configuration data error" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|152 |event |enable |0 |"Timeline has been changed" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|153 |event |enable |0 |"Phase has been aligned" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|154 |event |enable |0 |"System log time has been updated" |

|....|........|.......|.......|................................................|

|155 |event |enable |0 |"System reboot" |

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Level : User, Config and Admin

set alarm-config

Use this command to provision the alarm state, alarm level, and reporting delay time for the specified alarms. The reporting delay time is the amount of time from when the alarm occurred to when it is reported. The delay parameter will delay the reporting of an alarm by the configured amount.

Note : If an alarm condition is set and then cleared before the delay expires, then the alarm will not be reported.

Command Syntax:

To provision the state of the specified alarm number: set alarm-config state {alarm [0 to 300] | all} {enable | disable}

To provision the level of the specified Alarm number: set alarm-config level {alarm [0 to 300] | all}

{2 |3 | 4 | 5} where:

68 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

2 - Critical

3 - Major

4 - Minor

5 - Event

To provision the reporting delay of the specified Alarm number in seconds: set alarm-config delay {alarm [0 to 300] | all}[0 to 500000]

Note: Use “show alarm-config” command to view the max-alarm-id of current TP 2300/2700 release.

Example 1:

To Disable alarm #31 

TP2700> set alarm-config state alarm 31 disable

Example 2:

To set the level of alarm #31 to Error - major (3):

TP2700> set alarm-config level alarm 31 3

Example 3:

To set the reporting delay of alarm #31 to 5 seconds:

TP2700> set alarm-config delay alarm 31 5

Remarks: The severity level and delay of transitory events cannot be changed.

Level : Config and Admin

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 69

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

alias

This command is used to assign an alias for a CLI command (or any character string). The alias can then be used as a convenient substitution for the CLI command to which it has been assigned.

The alias command can also be used to display all defined aliases and the commands to which they have been assigned.

Command Syntax:

To assign an alias name to a command (or any portion of a command): alias <user-defined-alias> “<character-string>”

To display all defined aliases and the commands to which they have been assigned: alias

Example 1:

To set the alias “abc” for the command show ip status mgmt . The command string must be contained within double quote marks (“”)  tp2700> alias abc “show ip status mgmt”

Example 1a:

To use the alias “abc” to execute the command show ip status mgmt : tp2700> abc

Response 1a:

MGMT Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:B0:AE:00:00:05 inet addr:192.168.5.14 Bcast:192.168.5.255 Mask:255.255.255.0

UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1

RX packets:70867 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0

TX packets:1986 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0 collisions:0 txqueuelen:1000

RX bytes:4511319 (4.3 MiB) TX bytes:162895 (159.0 KiB)

Interrupt:21 Base address:0xe000

Example 2:

To display the aliases assigned for the TP 2300/2700: tp2700> alias

Response 2:

70 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Level : alias abc='show ip status mgmt'

User, Config, and Admin

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 71

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

show bridge-time

Displays the bridging time that is used to allow the frequency servo to coast through short periods when the system does not have qualified reference. The bridging time is in seconds.

Command Syntax:

Example: show bridge-time

TP2700> show bridge-time

Response:

Bridging Time : 900

Remarks: If the system has not qualified a time or frequency reference within the specified bridging time the system transitions into holdover mode of operation.

Level : User, Config, and Admin

set bridge-time

Provisions the amount of time, in seconds, the system remains in bridging mode before transitioning into the holdover mode of operation. The bridge-time applies to both clock-timing loop and clock-frequency.

Note: Updates to the bridging-time value are only used at the start of the next bridging event. Any changes to this value while the unit is in bridging mode will not be implemented until the next bridging event.

Command Syntax:

Example: set bridge-time <bridge-time-value>

TP2700> set bridge-time 1000

Level : Config and Admin

72 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

show clock

Displays the system date, time, and leapseconds in several formats.

– Current system date and time

– Accumulated leapseconds between TAI and UTC time

– Pending leapseconds

Command Syntax:

Example: show clock

TP2700> show clock

Response 1: system time: 2012-11-30 22:35:24

Leap sec: 34

Leap pending: 0

Response 2:

After the system powered up, the date and time are entered or not entered by user, but the system has never been locked to GNSS, the response will be as follows:

System time : 2013-05-09 16:11:17

Leap Seconds : 35

Leap pending : +0

Level : User, Config, and Admin

set clock

Provisions the user-assigned Date, Time, and accumulated leapseconds.

Note: The user can only enter the date and time, and accumulated leap seconds when the system has never acquired time from PTP or

GNSS (GPS or GLONASS) satellite.

Command Syntax:

To set the Date and Time:

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 73

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set set clock date-time <date-time>

Enter date and time in YYYY-MM-DD,HH:MM:SS format (UTC)

To set the Accumulated leapseconds: set clock leapseconds <value>

Note: If your GNSS is in GLONASS tracking mode, this command also provides the user-provisioned leap second to GPS-GLONASS.

Example 1:

To set date to June 09 2013, and time to 10:35 PM and 24 sec.(UTC):

TP2700> set clock date-time 2013-06-09,22:35:24

Example 2:

To set the accumulated leapseconds to 29 seconds:

TP2700> set clock leapseconds 29

Level : Config and Admin

74 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

set configuration

Use this command to backup the current configuration, restore the current configuration from a backup copy, or set the current configuration to factory default values.

Command Syntax:

To set the current configuration to factory or default values: set configuration {default | factory}

– Default preserves user logins and communication attributes, such as ip addresses of MGMT port.

– Factory resets all attributes, including user logins.

Note: The system will automatically reboot after receiving either the " set configuration default " or " set configuration factory " commands

To backup the current configuration to non-volatile storage: set configuration backup local

– Backup “local” saves the configuration to local non-volatile storage immediately.

Example 1:

To backup the current configuration to non-volatile storage: set configuration backup local

Example 2:

To set the configuration to default levels (will not overwrite user login info or current IP address of MGMT port):

TP2700>set configuration default

Remarks :

The “default” setting preserves user logins and communication attributes, such as IP address of MGMT port.

The “factory” setting resets all attributes, including user logins.

Installed licenses are not affected by setting the configuration to “default” or

“factory” levels.

Level : Admin

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 75

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

show eia-232

This command displays the serial port’s operating parameters: baud rate, parity, word length, and stop bits.

Command Syntax:

Example: show eia-232

TP2700> show eia-232

Response:

Baud rate : 57600

Data length : 8

Stop bit : 1

Parity : 0

Flow control : none

Remarks: The system's serial interface is fixed at 57.6K, 8, 1, 0; there is no handshaking. There is no associated Set command.

Level : User, Config, and Admin

76 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

show ethernet

The show ethernet command displays the packet service ports auto-negotiation state and speed for all Ethernet service ports.

Command Syntax: show ethernet { config | status }

Example 1:

TP2700> show ethernet config

Response 1a:

-----------------------------------------------------------

| Port | Auto-neg | Speed | Active-connector |

|--------|-------------|-----------|----------------------|

| eth1 | enable | all | r1- rj45 |

|........|.............|...........|......................|

| eth2 | disable | 1000 | s2- sfp |

|.........................................................

Response 1b:

----------------------------------------------

|Port| Auto-neg | Speed | Active-connector|

|----|------------|--------|-----------------|

|eth1| enable | all | r1-rj45 |

|----|------------|--------|-----------------|

|eth2| enable | all | r2-rj45 |

----------------------------------------------

Example 2:

TP2700> show ethernet status

Response 2a:

Eth1 current speed: all

Eth2 current speed: 100M

Response 2b:

Eth1 current speed: all

Eth2 current speed: non eth-link connected on this port

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 77

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

Level : User, Config, and Admin

set ethernet

Use this command to configure the Ethernet ports: the port state, the connector type, the auto-negotiation state and speed, and the Ethernet signal type. When

Ethernet auto-negotiation is enabled, the TP 2300/2700 will advertise connection speeds of 100M, 1000M, or 100/1000M. Users can specify a connection speed for a port, 100 MB, 1000 MB, or All, to configure speed used by auto-negotiation. If auto negotiation is disabled, the Ethernet connection speed will be forced to 100M for

RJ45 and to 1000M for Optical SFPs.

Command Syntax:

To provision the connector type, RJ45 (R1) or SFP (S1), for ETH1 packet service port: set ethernet active-connector eth1 {r1-rj45 | s1-sfp}

To provision the connector type, RJ45 (R2) or SFP (S2), for ETH2 packet service port: set ethernet active-connector eth2 {r2-rj45 | s2-sfp}

To set the Ethernet Auto Negotiation state for the specified packet service port: set ethernet auto-neg state {eth1 | eth2} {enable | disable}

To set the advertised speed for Ethernet Auto Negotiation: set ethernet auto-neg speed {eth1 | eth2} {100m | 1000m | all}

Note: If the auto negotiation state is DISABLE for a packet service port, the Ethernet connection speed will be forced to 100M if the port connector is RJ45, and to 1000M if the port connector is Optical SFP.

Example 1:

To set the advertised speed for Ethernet auto negotiation speed to "all" for ETH1 port:

TP2700>set ethernet auto-neg speed eth1 all

Example 2:

To set the Ethernet auto negotiation state to ENABLE for ETH2:

TP2700>set ethernet auto-neg state eth2 enable

Example 3:

To set the Ethernet connector type to RJ45 for ETH2:

78 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

TP2700>set ethernet active-connector eth2 r2-rj45

Level : Config and Admin

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 79

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

show firewall

This command displays the firewall configuration.

Command Syntax:

Example: show firewall

TP2700> show firewall

Response:

TELNET Firewall : allow

SSH Firewall : allow

FTP Firewall : block

ICMP Firewall : allow

SNMP Firewall : allow

HTTPS Firewall : block

Level : User, Config and Admin

set firewall

Use this command to configure the system’s Ethernet management port firewall.

The firewall can control Telnet, SSH, FTP, ICMP, and SNMP on the Ethernet management port.

Command Syntax:

Example: set firewall mgmt telnet {allow|block} set firewall mgmt ssh {allow|block} set firewall mgmt ftp {allow|block} set firewall mgmt snmp {allow|block} set firewall mgmt icmp {allow|block} set firewall mgmt https {allow|block} set firewall mgmt telnet allow

Remarks: Telnet and FTP are disabled by default on Ethernet management port.

On Ethernet sync service ports, all ports are blocked except ICMP and PTP. The firewall configuration for packet service ports cannot be changed.

Level : Admin

80 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

show gnss

This command displays the GNSS port state, position (latitude, longitude, height), elevation mask value (positioning filter), mode of operation (manual or automatic), and track-mode selection, GPS or GLONASS, or GPS+GLONASS. It also displays information for all satellite vehicles being tracked: vehicle number, health, noise ratio, satellite elevation, satellite azimuth.

Command Syntax:

To show the GNSS configuration: show gnss config

To show the GNSS status: show gnss status

Example 1:

TP2700>show gnss config

Response 1 :

GNSS Configuration

State : enable

PosMode : auto

Track-Mode : gps

Mask : 10

Antenna Delay : 0

GNSS manual position

Latitude : N37:22:43.425

Longitude : W121:55:34.815

Height : 13.7

Example 2:

TP2700>show gnss status

Response 2 :

GNSS Status:

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 81

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

Current Status : ok

Current Position Status : positionHold

Current Antenna Position:

Latitude : N37:22:42.98

Longitude : W121:55:34.87

Height : 14.40

Current GNSS Satellite View:

-------------------------------------------------------------

|Index | No |SNR | Health | Azimuth |Elevation| Sat Type |

|------|-----|----|----------|---------|---------|----------|

| 1 | 3 |37 | healthy | 313 | 23 | glonass |

|......|.....|....|..........|.........|.........|..........|

| 2 | 6 |38 | healthy | 309 | 35 | glonass |

|......|.....|....|..........|.........|.........|..........|

| 3 | 15 |43 | healthy | 57 | 31 | glonass |

|......|.....|....|..........|.........|.........|..........|

| 4 | 16 |39 | healthy | 259 | 24 | glonass |

|......|.....|....|..........|.........|.........|..........|

| 5 | 18 |39 | healthy | 300 | 82 | glonass |

|......|.....|....|..........|.........|.........| ........|

| 6 | 21 |42 | healthy | 36 | 67 | glonass |

|......|.....|....|..........|.........|.........| ........|

| 7 | 22 |42 | healthy | 240 | 47 | glonass |

|......|.....|....|..........|.........|.........| .........|

| 8 | 24 |42 | healthy | 85 | 29 | gps |

|......|.....|....|..........|.........|.........| .........|

| 9 | 26 |38 | healthy | 42 | 18 | gps |

|......|.....|....|..........|.........|.........|..........|

| 10 | 29 |42 | healthy | 150 | 26 | gps |

|......|.....|....|..........|.........|.........|..........|

| 11 | 21 |42 | healthy | 36 | 67 | gps |

|......|.....|....|..........|.........|.........|..........|

| 12 | 22 |42 | healthy | 240 | 47 | gps |

|......|.....|....|..........|.........|.........|..........|

| 13 | 24 |42 | healthy | 85 | 29 | gps |

|......|.....|....|..........|.........|.........|..........|

| 14 | 26 |38 | healthy | 42 | 18 | gps |

|......|.....|....|..........|.........|.........|..........|

| 15 | 29 |42 | healthy | 150 | 26 | glonass |

------------------------------------------------------------|

Level : User, Config and Admin

82 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

set gnss

Use this command to configure the GNSS port state, mask, position mode, and the position configuration if the position mode is set as manual. It is also used to select the track-mode as GPS, GLONASS , or GPS+GLONASS (if the concurrent GPS &

GLONASS feature is enabled by a license):

Command Syntax:

To change GNSS state: set gnss state {enable | disable}

To select the GNSS track mode: set gnss track-mode {gps | glonass | gps-glonass}

Note: The TimeProvider 2300/2700 requires a license to enable access to the concurrent GPS and GLONASS feature.

To change the GNSS position mode: set gnss posmode auto or set gnss posmode manual latitude <lat-value> longitude

<lon-value> height <height-value>

– Position can only be provisioned manually when GNSS posmode is

“manual”.

Where

Latitude is in the format N|Sddd:mm:ss.sss, for example:

N37:22:45.123

S48:33:67.456

Longitude is in the format E|Wddd:mm:ss.sss, for example:

W121:55:36.123

E157:33:47.456

Height is in meters with one digit after the decimal point, for example:

17.5

Note: Symmetricom recommends that the Auto mode be used. Any error in the manually-specified system position will generate timing errors.

To set the GNSS mask value set gnss mask <mask-value>

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 83

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

To set the GNSS cable-delay value set gnss cable-delay <delay-value>

See

Table B-25 for cable delay values. The delay values shown correspond to the

cable kit being used in its entirety without modification. The values assume that a splitter is not used. Splitters are not recommended.

Example 1:

To set GNSS position mode to auto:

TP2700>set gnss posmode auto

Example 2:

To manually set the GNSS with a system position of latitude of N37:22:45.123, longitude of W121:55:36.123, and a height 17.5 meters 

TP2700>set gnss posmode manual latitude N37:22:45.123 longitude W121:55:36.123 height 17.5

Example 3:

To enable GNSS on the GNSS port:

TP2700>set gnss state enable

Example 4:

To set the GNSS mask to a value of 25 degrees:

TP2700>set gnss mask 25

Example 5:

To set the GNSS cable delay to a value of 220 nanoseconds:

TP2700>set gnss cable-delay 220

Restrictions: The system must have the GNSS posmode provisioned as “manual” before you can successfully provision the position manually.

Level : Config and Admin

84 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

show hardware-status

This command displays the status of the specified hardware.

Command Syntax:

Example: show hardware-status

TP2700> show hardware-status

Response:

-48V-A : ok (DC only)

-48V-B : ok (DC only)

+1.2V : 1.211V

+3.3V : 1.830V

+2.5V : 2.513V

+5.0V : 5.016V

-5.0V : -5V

+1.5V : 1.5V

GPS Power : 5.042V

GPS Current : 37mA

GPS Antenna : ok

FPGA : ok

Temperature : 53.0000 C

Level : User, Config, and Admin

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 85

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

history

This command shows the command history for the current session.

Command Syntax:

Example: history tp2700> history

Response:

0 2013-06-10 00:11:28 show eth-status

1 2013-06-10 00:12:24 show event

2 2013-06-10 00:13:15 show firewall

3 2013-06-10 00:16:02 set firewall ssh

4 2013-06-10 00:16:31 generate message

5 2013-06-10 00:17:07 show gnss

6 2013-06-10 00:19:59 set gnss posmode auto

7 2013-06-10 00:21:49 set gnss mask 10

8 2013-06-10 00:22:40 set gnss cable-delay 1

9 2013-06-10 00:22:48 set gnss cable-delay 0

10 2013-06-10 00:23:47 show hardware-status

11 2013-06-10 00:24:14 show hardware-status

12 2013-06-10 00:25:19 history

Level : User, Config, and Admin

86 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

show hostname

This command displays the host name for the TimeProvider 2300/2700.

Command Syntax:

Example: show hostname tp2700> show hostname

Response:

Host name : Timeprovider

Level : User, Config, and Admin

set hostname

This command sets the host name for the TimeProvider 2300/2700. Hostname can contain up to 20 characters.

Command Syntax: set hostname <hostname_string>

Example:

To set the hostname to “EdgeMaster05”  tp2700> set hostname EdgeMaster05

Level : Config and Admin

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 87

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

show image

This command displays the firmware image and the firmware version in the system.

The backup image is the non-active image.

Command Syntax:

Example: show image tp2700> show image

Response:

SYSTEM IMAGE DETAILS

Active image : 2 1.0.3

Backup image : 1 1.0.2

Next boot image : 2

Level : User, Config, and Admin

set image

Use this command to provision the firmware image from which to boot. The backup image is the non-active image.

Note: Each image has its own set of configuration data. When Image

1 is set as the boot image, the configuration data for Image 1 is applied when the TP 2300/2700 is rebooted. When Image 2 is set as the boot image, the configuration data for Image 2 is applied when the

TP 2300/2700 is rebooted.

A firmware upgrade is applied to the backup image, and the backup image is set to be the next boot image. The TP 2300/2700 copies the currently running configuration data to the data used with the next boot. Therefore, the configuration should be the same after rebooting, except for changes due to differences in supported configuration items between firmware revisions.

Command Syntax: set image {1 | 2}

Example 1:

88 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

To set the system to boot from image 1:

TP2700> set image 1

Example 2:

To set the system to boot from image 2:

TP2700> set image 2

Remark: The system must be rebooted to implement the boot image.

Level : Config and Admin

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 89

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

show input

This command displays the current configuration or status for input signals for the

T1/E1 port. The values displayed with this command will be applied to the T1/E1 port only when the IO-direction of the port is configured as an Input with the set port-control t1e1 io input command.

Command Syntax: show input config <port-name> show input status <port-name>

Example 1:

TP2700> show input config t1e1

Response 1a:

Input config

-------------------------------------------------|

| signal | Frame Type | CRC | ssmbit |

|------------|-------------|---------|-----------|

| e1 input | cas | enable | 6 |

|............|.............|.........|...........|

| t1 input | esf | enable | na |

|................................................|

Port config

----------------------------------------------

| Port | State | Io dir | Signal/format|

|--------|---------|----------|--------------|

| t1e1 | enable | input | e1 |

|........|.........|..........|..............|

Response 1b:

Input config

-------------------------------------------------|

| signal | Frame Type | CRC | ssmbit |

|------------|-------------|---------|-----------|

| e1 input | cas | enable | 6 |

|............|.............|.........|...........|

| t1 input | freq1544khz| na | na |

|.................................................|

90 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

Port config

----------------------------------------------

| Port | State | Io dir | Signal/format|

|--------|---------|----------|--------------|

| t1e1 | enable | output | e1 |

|........|.........|..........|..............|

Example 2:

TP2700> show input status t1e1

Response 2a:

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

|Port |input status|ssm |los |ais |oof |bpv |crc |

|---------|------------|--------|--------|--------|--------|--------|--------|

|t1 input |fault |na |fault |ok |ok |ok |na |

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Response 2b:

Status: Input port is disabled

Response 2c:

Status: Port is configured as output

Remarks:

– Line code, SSMBIT and CRC do not apply to freq2048khz, and freq1544khz.

– CRC for T1 input is not user-configurable. It is always ENABLE for ESF, and does not apply for D4.

– SSMBIT only applies to E1 frame signal CCS or CAS.

– Use the "show ref" command to display SSM state information.

Level : User, Config, and Admin

set input

When the T1/E1 port is configured as an input port, use this command to provision all other configurable parameters for the input signal on the T1/E1 port:

Framing Type

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 91

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

– CCS, CAS, or freq 2048KHz for E1

– D4, ESF, or freq 1544KHz for T1

CRC state for E1

SSM Bit position for E1

All the configurations provisioned by this command apply to the T1/E1 input port only when the IO-direction of the port is configured as an Input with the set port-control t1e1 io input command.

Command Syntax:

To set the frametype, CRC, and SSM bit position for E1 Input: set input e1 frametype t1e1 {ccs | cas | freq2048kz} set input e1 crc t1e1 {enable | disable} set input e1 ssmbit t1e1 {4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8}

To set the frametype for T1 Input: set input t1 frametype t1e1 {d4 | esf | freq1544kz}

Example 1:

To provision the T1/E1 port for E1 input with CAS frametype, CRC enabled, with

SSM bit position of 6:

TP2700> set input e1 frametype t1e1 cas

TP2700> set input e1 crc t1e1 enable

TP2700> set input e1 ssmbit t1e1 6

Example 2:

To provision the T1/E1 port for T1 input with D4 frametype:

TP2700> set input t1 frametype t1e1 d4

Remarks:

– The port state, IO direction (input or output) and signal type (e1 or t1) are configured by set port-control command.

– No user provisioning for line code when the port is set as input by set port-control command. It is hardcoded as HDB3 for E1 and B8ZS for

T1 (zs=enable, i.e., zero suppression is on), and in this way, the input port will accepts both HDB3 (B8ZS for t1) and AMI code.

92 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

– SSM state is configured by set ref command.

– No CRC required for framing types of D4, freq2048khz, and freq1544khz.

– No user provisioning CRC for ESF. It is hardcoded as ENABLE.

Level : Config and Admin

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 93

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

show inventory

This command displays the following inventory information of the systems.

Description of the product

Part number

CLEI number

Serial number

Software version

Hardware version

GNSS Device ID, Device type and firmware revision

FPGA version

Asset Number

Command Syntax:

Example: show inventory

TP2700> show inventory

Response 1:

General Inventory Info

Product Model : TP2700-DC-OCXO

Part Number : 090-50201-111

CLEI Number : C000000

Serial Number : SYM31455

Software version : 1.0.3

Hardware version : A

GNSS : CSM23,0179, 0x02

FPGA Version : 0x14

Asset Number : A000000

Level : User, Config, and Admin

94 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

set inventory

Use this command to provision the system's user-assigned asset value information.

Command Syntax:

Example: set inventory asset <asset-value>

To set the inventory asset to a value of "tcb121" set inventory asset tcb121

Level : Config and Admin

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 95

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

show ip

This command displays the Host, Mask, and Gateway IP addresses for Ethernet interfaces. It also indicates if DHCP is enabled and if the port is enabled.

Command Syntax:

To show the configuration of the Ethernet interface (some settings will only be implemented after restarting the IP interface): show ip config {mgmt | eth1 | eth2}

To show the current status of the Ethernet interfaces for the specified module: show ip status {mgmt | eth1 | eth2}

Note: Packet and byte counts do not include most PTP and NTP packets.

Example 1:

To display the configuration of the Ethernet interfaces for the MGMT module: tp2700> show ip config mgmt

Response 1:

MGMT PORT PARAMETERS

IP mode : dhcp

IP state : enable

Static mode Parameters

IP address : 192.168.0.100

IP mask : 255.255.255.0

IP gateway : 0.0.0.0

DNS Domain : 192.168.0.100

DNS nameserver1 : 0.0.0.0

DNS nameserver2 : 0.0.0.0

Example 2:

To display the configuration of the Ethernet interfaces for the ETH1 port: tp2700> show ip config eth1

Response 2:

ETH1 PORT PARAMETERS

IP state : enable

96 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

Static mode Parameters

IP address : 192.168.9.44

IP mask : 255.255.255.0

IP gateway : 0.0.0.0

Example 3:

To display the status of the Ethernet interfaces for the Ethernet management port: tp2700> show ip status mgmt

Response 3: mgmt0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:B0:AE:00:00:05 inet addr:192.168.5.14 Bcast:192.168.5.255 Mask:255.255.255.0

UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1

RX packets:70867 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0

TX packets:1986 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0 collisions:0 txqueuelen:1000

RX bytes:4511319 (4.3 MiB) TX bytes:162895 (159.0 KiB)

Interrupt:21 Base address:0xe000

Example 4:

To display the status of the Ethernet interfaces for the ETH2 port  tp2700> show ip status eth2

Response 4: eth2 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:B0:AE:01:32:4A inet addr:192.168.2.11 Bcast:192.168.2.255

Mask:255.255.255.0

UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1

RX packets:6 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0

TX packets:32 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0 collisions:0 txqueuelen:1000

RX bytes:360 (360.0 B) TX bytes:1920 (1.8 KiB)

Interrupt:128

Level : User, Config, and Admin

set ip

Use this command to provision the Host, Mask, and Gateway IPv4 addresses for the Ethernet management port and ETH1 and ETH2 ports. It also supports the DNS client function by provisioning the DNS server,

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 97

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

The IP addresses for the MGMT, ETH1 and ETH2 ports must be on different networks/subnets.

Note: To configure a VLAN, use the command the IP addresses.

set vlan

to provision

The special value of 0.0.0.0 should be used for the gateway value if a gateway router is not required. Support for IPv6 addresses will be added in a future release.

Command Syntax:

To provision the state of the IPv4 Ethernet interfaces for the specified port: set ip state {mgmt | eth1 | eth2} ipv4 [enable | disable | restart]

To set the IPv4 address, mask and gateway of the Ethernet interfaces for the specified port: set ip ip-address {mgmt | eth1 | eth2} ipv4 address

<addrv4_value> netmask <maskv4_value> gateway

<gatewayv4_value>

To provision the IPv4 address mode on the Ethernet management port as DHCP or STATIC: set ip address-mode mgmt ipv4 {dhcp | static}

Note: For the configuration change to take effect, the interface must be restarted with the set ip state {mgmt | eth2 | eth2} ipv4 restart command.

To provision the DNS servers and domain for support of the DNS client function in Ethernet management port: set ip mgmt dns nameserver1 { nameserver_ip_address } nameserver2 {nameserver_ip_address } domain { domain_name }

Example 1:

To restart the Ethernet management interface: tp2700> set ip state mgmt ipv4 restart

Example 2:

To enable the IP interface for packet service port ETH1: tp2700> set ip state eth1 ipv4 enable

Example 3:

98 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

To set the IPv4 address for the Ethernet management packet service port ETH1 to

192.168.2.11, the mask to 255.255.255.0, and the gateway 0.0.0.0: tp2700> set ip ip-address eth1 ipv4 address 192.168.2.11 netmask

255.255.255.0 gateway 0.0.0.0

tp2700> set ip state eth1 ipv4 restart

Note: PTP will be restarted after the IPv4 interface is restarted for the packet service ports ETH1 or ETH2.

Level : Config and Admin

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 99

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

show led

This command displays the LED status for each LED on the front panel. See Table

2-8 for LED descriptions.

Command Syntax: show led

Example 1:

TP2700> show led

Response 1:

------------------------------

|LED ID |LED Status |

|------------|---------------|

|power |green |

|............|...............|

|powerA |green |

|............|...............|

|powerB |off |

|............|...............|

|gnss |red |

|............|...............|

|alarm |amber |

|............|...............|

|Clock |green |

------------------------------

Level : User, Config, and Admin

100 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

show license

Use this command to display the licensed features.

Command Syntax: show license

Example 1:

TP2700> show license

Response 1:

................................................................................|

|No. | Features | Description |

|....|...........................|..............................................|

| 1 | ptp-input | Precision Time Protocol Input |

|....|...........................|..............................................|

| 2 | gps-glonass | Concurrent GPS + GLONASS Satellite Tracking |

|....|...........................|..............................................|

| 3 | t1-e1 | TDM (T1/E1) with Input and Output |

|....|...........................|..............................................|

| 4 | ptp-default-profile | PTP Default Profile |

|....|...........................|..............................................|

| 5 | ptp-client-capacity-64 | PTP Master with max capacity of 64 clients |

|....|...........................|..............................................|

| 6 | pps-tod | 1PPS+TOD (One Pulse Per Sec with Time Of Day)|

|....|...........................|..............................................|

| 7 | syncE | Synchronous Ethernet Input and Output |

|....|...........................|..............................................|

| 8 | ptp-master | PTP Master functionality |

|....|...........................|..............................................|

Level : User, Config, and Admin

Note: A license key is required to enable licensed features.

Please contact your local sales representative or Symmetricom

Technical Support at 1-888-367-7966 (USA) or 1-408-428-7907 for additional information.

set license

Use this command to enter the 40-character license key for new features, and to delete features. The license is associated with the serial number of the system.

When a license key is added, all the states of that license’s features will be enabled.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 101

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

Command Syntax:

To enter a license key for new features: set license add

The TP 2300/2700 will prompt for the license key and the user needs to enter the

40-character key string.

To remove an installed feature license: set license delete

The TP 2300/2700 will respond with all installed features that can be deleted. The user chooses from the list for the feature to delete

Note: When a feature license is deleted, the feature will still function until the next reboot.

Reinstalling the license key with the “set license add” command will enable the feature again.

Example 1:

To add a feature with a license key value of

“ABCDEFGHIJ1234567890KLMNOPQRST0987654321”:

TP2700> set license add

The TP 2300/2700 will prompt for the license key:

License key: ABCDEFGHIJ1234567890KLMNOPQRST0987654321

Note: Feature licenses require a valid key. The key shown in this example is intended to illustrate the concept.

Example 2:

To delete the PTP_INPUT license:

TP2700> set license delete

The TP 2300/2700 will prompt the user with a list of features that can be deleted.

102 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set ptp-input t1-e1

- Precision Time Protocol Input

- TDM (T1/E1) with Input and Output ptp-client-capacity-64 - PTP Master with max capacity of 64 clients syncE - Synchronous Ethernet Input and

Output ptp-master - PTP Master functionality

Enter License Feature to be deleted:

Select the feature to be deleted from the list and press Enter . The TP 2300/2700 will prompt the user to verify that the license is to be deleted.

Are you sure you want to delete this license? (Yes | No)

Select “Yes” and press Enter .

Level : Admin

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 103

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

show log

This command displays the specified log file from the local storage.

When showing the log content, the Index parameter selects one of the seven rotated log files. The Head parameter, along with the count value, displays the specified number of events from the beginning of the file. The Tail parameter, along with the count value, displays the specified number of events from the end of the file. If the Index is not specified or set to zero, the current log file is displayed. If neither Head nor Tail parameter is issued, the 20 most recent entries are displayed.

The log files are:

Alarm-Event Log

Command Log

Security Log

Command Syntax: show log {alarm-event | command | security}

[<index-value>][{head|tail} <number-of-lines>]

Example 1:

To display the first 5 entries of the alarm-event log (5 lines from the head of current log):

TP2700> show log alarm-event head 5

Response 1:

2012-11-30 00:00:10 TIMEPROVIDER alarmid: 028,000,MINOR,

GNSS receiver not tracking satellite

2012-11-30 00:00:34 TIMEPROVIDER alarmid: 009,000,MAJOR,

GNSS input poor quality

2012-11-30 00:01:06 TIMEPROVIDER alarmid: 027,000,MINOR,

GNSS receiver communications failed

2012-11-30 00:01:08 TIMEPROVIDER alarmid: 034,000,MINOR,

Management port link down

2012-11-30 00:01:09 TIMEPROVIDER alarmid: 011,000,MAJOR*,

GPS antenna current out of range (6mA)

*-- escalated alarm level

Example 2:

104 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

To display the last 10 entries of the alarm-event log (10 lines from the tail of current log):

TP2700> show log alarm-event tail 10

Response 2:

2012-12-29 00:00:10 TIMEPROVIDER alarmid: 006,000,EVENT, time Entered bridging state

2012-12-29 00:00:34 TIMEPROVIDER alarmid: 006,000,EVENT, freq Entered bridging state

2012-12-29 00:22:06 TIMEPROVIDER alarmid: 010,000,EVENT,

GNSS input time qualified

2012-12-29 00:22:06 TIMEPROVIDER alarmid: 010,000,EVENT,

GNSS input freq qualified

. . . . . .

Level : User, Config, and Admin

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 105

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

show log-config

Use this command to display the configuration for log size and remote-syslog.

Command Syntax:

To show configuration of the log size: show log-config size {alarm-event | command | security}

To show configuration of the remote-syslog: show log-config remote-syslog

Example 1:

To display size of the alarm log:

TP2700> show log-config size alarm-event

Response 1:

Log size of alarm-event log is : 100 kilobytes

Example 2:

To display the configuration of the remote-syslog:

TP2700> show log-config remote-syslog

Response 2:

Remote-syslog config:

State : disable

Remote Address : 0.0.0.0

Level : User, Config, and Admin

set log-config

Use this command to provision the specified log file buffer size, the maximum number of kilobytes to be stored in the file before it is rotated, and to configure a remote syslog server to receive log messages from the TimeProvider 2700.

Command Syntax:

To configure the size of the log:

106 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set set log-config size {alarm-event | command | security}

<size-value>

To enable or disable the remote-syslog: set log-config remote-syslog {enable | disable}

Example 1:

To set the size of the alarm-event log to 100 kilobytes:

TP2700> set log-config size alarm-event 100

Example 2:

To set the size of the command log to 80 kilobytes:

TP2700> set log-config size command 80

Example 3:

To disable the remote-syslog:

TP2700> set log-config remote-syslog disable

Remarks: Provisioning a log file size to zero disables the logging of that type of data.

Level : Config and Admin

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 107

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

logout

This command terminates the current user connection.

Command Syntax:

Example: logout

TP2700> logout

Level : User, Config, and Admin

108 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

show output

This command displays the current configuration or status for output signals for the

T1/E1 port and the PPS offset on the PPS/10M output port. The provisioning displayed with the show output config t1e1 command will apply to the T1/E1 port only when the IO-direction of the port is configured as OUTPUT with the set port-control t1e1 io output command.

Command Syntax:

To display the configuration of the T1/E1 output port or 10MHz/PPS port: show output config {t1e1 | pps10m}

To display the status of the T1/E1 output port: show output status t1e1

To display the status of the TOD port: show output status tod

Example 1:‘

TP2700> show output config t1e1

Response 1a:

Output Config

--------------------------------------------------------------

|Signal |FrameType |CRC |SSMBit |zero suppression|

|------------|------------|--------|--------|----------------|

|e1 output |ccs |enable |all |off |

|............|............|........|........|................|

|t1 output |esf |na |na |na |

--------------------------------------------------------------

Port Config

--------------------------------------------------------

|Port |state |io dir |Signal / Format |

|------------|------------|------------|----------------|

|t1e1 |enable |output |e1 |

--------------------------------------------------------

Response 1b:

Output Config

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 109

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

--------------------------------------------------------------

|Signal |FrameType |CRC |SSMBit |zero suppression|

|------------|------------|--------|--------|----------------|

|e1 output |ccs |enable |all |off |

|............|............|........|........|................|

|t1 output |esf |na |na |na |

--------------------------------------------------------------

Port Config

--------------------------------------------------------

|Port |state |io dir |Signal /Format |

|------------|------------|------------|---------------|

|t1e1 |enable |output |t1 |

--------------------------------------------------------

Example 2:‘

TP2700> show output config pps10m

Response 2a:

1PPS output phase offset compensation: 0 ns

Port config

--------------------------------------

| Port | state | Signal/format |

|---------|---------|----------------|

| pps10m | enable | pps |

|.........|.........|................|

Response 2b:

1PPS output phase offset compensation: 0 ns

Port config

--------------------------------------

| Port | state | Signal/format |

|---------|---------|----------------|

| pps10m | disable | pps |

|.........|.........|................|

Response 2c:

1PPS output phase offset compensation: 0 ns

110 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Port config

---------------------------------------

| Port | state | Signal/format |

|---------|----------|----------------|

| pps10m | enable | 10MHz |

|.........|..........|................|

Example 3:

TP2700> show output status t1e1

Response 3a:

---------------------------

|io status |port status |

|------------|------------|

|t1 output |on |

---------------------------

Response 3b:

---------------------------|

| io status | port status |

|------------|-------------|

| t1 output | off |

...........................|

Response 3c:

Status: port is configured as input.

Response 3d

Status: port is disabled.

Level : User, Config, and Admin

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

set output

Use this command to configure output parameters for the T1/E1 and PPS/10M port.

When the T1/E1 port is configured as an output port, use this command to provision all parameters for the output signal that are defined in ITU-T G.704:

Framing Type

– CCS, CAS, or freq2048khz for E1

– D4, ESF, freq1544KHz or isolateOne for T1 (isolateOne is for test purposes only)

CRC state for E1

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 111

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

SSM Bit position for E1

Zero-Suppression (On or Off) for E1

All the configurations provisioned by this command apply to the T1/E1 port only when the IO-direction of the port is configured as an Output with the set port-control t1e1 io output command.

The provisioning displayed with the show output config t1e1 command will apply to the T1/E1 port only when the IO-direction of the port is configured as

OUTPUT with the set port-control t1e1 io output command.

Command Syntax:

To provision the output frame type for an E1 output signal: set output e1 frametype t1e1 {ccs | cas | freq2048khz}

To provision CRC for an E1 output signal: set output e1 crc t1e1 {enable | disable}

To provision the output SSM Bit for an E1 output signal: set output e1 ssmbit t1e1 {4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | all }

To provision zero-suppression for an E1 output signal: set output e1 zero-suppression t1e1 {on | off}

To provision the output frame type for a T1 output signal: set output t1 frametype t1e1 {d4 | esf | freq1544khz | isolateOne}

To provision the 1PPS time offset on the PPS/10M output port: set output pps offset pps10m <offset-value>

Example 1:

To set the frame type to 2048 kHz for E1 output on the T1/E1 port:

TP2700> set output e1 frametype t1e1 freq2048khz

Example 2:

To Enable CRC for E1 output on T1/E1 port:

TP2700> set output e1 crc t1e1 enable

Example 3:

To provision the SSM Bit position to 6 for E1 output on T1/E1 port:

112 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

TP2700> set output e1 ssmbit t1e1 6

Example 4:

To provision the frame type of the T1 output signal that might apply to T1/E1 port as

D4:

TP2700> set output t1 frametype t1e1 d4

Level : Config and Admin

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 113

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

show output-gen

This command displays the configuration for Output Port behavior during the warm-up, free-run, fast-track and holdover states.

Command Syntax:

Example: show output-gen

TP2700> show output-gen

Response:

Output generation configuration:

--------------------------------------------------------------

|Port |warm-up |free-run |holdover |fast-track |

|--------|------------|------------|------------|------------|

|t1e1 |squelch |squelch |on |on |

|........|............|............|............|............|

|tod |squelch |squelch |on |on |

--------------------------------------------------------------

Level : User, Config, and Admin

set output-gen

Use this command to provision the System's output port behaviors during the warm-up, free-run, fast-track, and holdover states.

Command Syntax:

To provision the output generation behavior for the T1/E1 port: set output-gen {warm-up| free-run | holdover |fast-track} t1e1 {on | ais | squelch}

To provision the output generation behavior for the TOD port: set output-gen {warm-up| free-run | holdover |fast-track} tod {on | squelch}

Example 1:

To provision the output behavior to squelch during the free-run state for the T1/E1 port when it is configured as an output port:

TP2700> set output-gen free-run t1e1 squelch

114 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

Example 2:

To provision the output behavior to ON during the holdover state for the TOD output port:

TP2700> set output-gen holdover tod on

Level : Config and Admin

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 115

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

password

Use this command to modify the password of the current user.

Command Syntax:

Example: password

TP2700> password

Response:

For new user password, only chars {a-z, A-Z, 0-9, ! ( ) - _ .

? ~ *} are accepted

Password:

Prompt for password confirmation

Level : User, Config, and Admin

Note: Be sure to not lose or forget the password. Contact

Symmetricom support for the password recovery procedure if all admin-level user passwords are lost.

116 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

ping

Use this command to ping the host specified by the address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) and display ping statistics from Ethernet maintenance port or PTP service port.

Note: To minimize system resource usage and deter denial of service attacks, the system is configured to allow a maximum

ICMP ping request rate of 1 per second.

Command Syntax: ping mgmt <ip-address> ping {eth1 | eth2} [<vlan-id>] <ip-address>

Example 1:

To ping IPv4 address 192.168.5.100 from Ethernet management port 

TP2700> ping mgmt 192.168.5.100 <enter>

Response 1:

Ping mgmt success

Response 1a:

Error: action failed

Ping mgmt failed

Example 2:

To ping IPv4 address 192.168.5.110, from ETH2 port, which has VLAN ID of 23:

TP2700> ping eth2 23 192.168.5.110

Response 2:

Ping eth2 success

Level : User, Config, and Admin

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 117

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

show port-control

This command provisions the sync service port, legacy port, or packet time service ports configurations.

Command Syntax: show port-control

Example 1:

TP2700>show port-control

Response 1:

--------------------------------------------

|# |Port |State |IO dir |Signal/Format|

|---|-------|--------|-------|-------------|

|1 |t1e1 |enable |input |t1 |

|...|.......|........|.......|.............|

|2 |pps10m |enable |output |10MHz |

|...|.......|........|.......|.............|

|3 |tod |enable |output |cisco |

--------------------------------------------

Note: The IO direction for the TOD and PPS10M ports are not configurable - they are both hardcoded as “output”.

Level : User, Config, and Admin

set port-control

Use this command to provision the sync service port, legacy port, or packet time service port. This includes configuration of port states, port directions, port connector types, and/or service types.

Command Syntax:

To provision the state for the T1/E1 port: set port-control t1e1 state {enable | disable}

To provision the IO direction of the T1/E1 port: set port-control t1e1 io {input | output}

118 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

To provision the signal type for the T1/E1 port: set port-control t1e1 signal-type {e1 | t1}

To provision the port state for the PPS/10M port: set port-control pps10m state {enable | disable}

To provision the signal type for the PPS/10M port: set port-control pps10m signal-type {pps | 10m}

To provision port state for the TOD output port: set port-control tod state {enable | disable}

To provision the TOD message format for the TOD output port: set port-control tod format {cisco | china_mobile}

Note: The Cisco TOD message format reports leap seconds using

TAI-UTC. The China Mobile TOD message format reports GPS leap second using GPS-UTC.

Example 1:

To set the T1/E1 port as an E1 input port and to enable it:

TP2700> set port-control t1e1 io input

TP2700> set port-control t1e1 signal-type e1

TP2700> set port-control t1e1 state enable

Example 2:

To set the TOD format for the TOD output port as Cisco format:

TP2700> set port-control tod format cisco

Example 3:

To set the PPS/10M port as an 10 MHz output port and to enable it: set port-control pps10m signal-type 10m set port-control pps10m state enable

Remarks: If the T1/E1 port is provisioned as an input port (with any signal types), and the port state is set to DISABLE, all alarms related to this port will be cleared.

The alarm will be reported again if the alarm condition is still existing when the port state is set to ENABLE.

Level: Config and Admin

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 119

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

show pql-ssm

This command displays the Priority Quality Level (PQL) values for reference input signal types. The PQL corresponds to the “ssm-value” parameter that is used with the “set ref” command for reference selection. The PQL is a representation of traceability for the signal presented at the input ports, where a PQL value of 16 represents an invalid SSM. If SSM is disabled for an input port ( set ref use-config-pql ), then the TP 2300/2700 will use the user-assigned SSM-value

(PQL) for that input port.

Note: SSM during bridging will be the last SSM value of input reference while clock was in normal lock state.

See

PQL Usage & Mapping

, on page 200, Reference Selection Criteria , on page

199, and

Quality Levels for Output Signals , on page 220 for more information.

Command Syntax:

Example: show pql-ssm

TP2700> show pql-ssm

Response:

PQL-SSM-ClockClass Option I

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

|PQL|E1 SSM |SyncE |clock |clock |Clock QL/ Option I, Description |

| | |SSM |class |class | |

| | | |g8265-1 |tele-2008| |

| | | | |default | |

|---|-------|-------|--------|---------|--------------------------------------|

|1 |0x2 |0x2 |80 |6 |QL-PRC/G.811 |

|...|.......|.......|........|.........|......................................|

|2 |0x0* |0x0* |82 |6 |input: QL-STU, output: QL-PRC |

|...|.......|.......|........|.........|......................................|

|3 |0x2 |0x2 |84 |6 |QL-PRC/G.811 |

|...|.......|.......|........|.........|......................................|

|4 |0x4 |0x4 |86 |7 |QL_SSU_A/g.812,Type I |

|...|.......|.......|........|.........|......................................|

|5 |0x4 |0x4 |88 |7 |QL_SSU_A/g.812,Type I |

|...|.......|.......|........|.........|......................................|

|6 |0x4 |0x4 |90 |7 |QL_SSU_A/g.812,Type I |

|...|.......|.......|........|.........|......................................|

|7 |0x8 |0x8 |92 |13 |QL_SSU_B/G.812 Type VI |

|...|.......|.......|........|.........|......................................|

|8 |0x8 |0x8 |94 |13 |QL_SSU_B/G.812 Type VI |

|...|.......|.......|........|.........|......................................|

|9 |0x8 |0x8 |96 |14 |QL_SSU_B/G.812 Type VI |

|...|.......|.......|........|.........|......................................|

120 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

|10 |0x8 |0x8 |98 |14 |QL_SSU_B/G.812 Type VI |

|...|.......|.......|........|.........|......................................|

|11 |0x8 |0x8 |100 |14 |QL_SSU_B/G.812 Type VI |

|...|.......|.......|........|.........|......................................|

|12 |0xB |0xB |102 |52 |QL-SEC/EEC1/G.813 Opt1,G.8264 |

|...|.......|.......|........|.........|......................................|

|13 |0xB |0xB |104 |58 |QL-SEC/EEC1/G.813 Opt1,G.8264 |

|...|.......|.......|........|.........|......................................|

|14 |0xF |0xF |106 |248 |QL-SEC/EEC1/G.813 Opt1,G.8264 |

|...|.......|.......|........|.........|......................................|

|15 |0xF |0xF |108 |248 |QL-DNU |

|...|.......|.......|........|.........|......................................|

|16 |0xF |0xF |110 |248 |Any Invalid SSM or ClockClass |

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

PQL-SSM-ClockClass Option II

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

|PQL|T1 SSM |SyncE |clock |clock |Clock QL/ Description |

| | |SSM |class |class | |

| | | |g8265-1 |tele-2008| |

| | | | |default | |

|---|-------|-------|--------|---------|--------------------------------------|

|1 |0x04FF |0x1 |80 |6 |QL-PRS/G.811 |

|...|.......|.......|........|.........|......................................|

|2 |0x08FF |0x0 |82 |6 |QL-STU/G.811 |

|...|.......|.......|........|.........|......................................|

|3 |0x04FF |0x1 |84 |6 |QL-PRS/G.811 |

|...|.......|.......|........|.........|......................................|

|4 |0x0CFF |0x7 |86 |7 |QL-ST2/G.812, typeII |

|...|.......|.......|........|.........|......................................|

|5 |0x0CFF |0x7 |88 |7 |QL-TNC/G.812Type V |

|...|.......|.......|........|.........|......................................|

|6 |0x78FF |0x4 |90 |7 |QL-TNC/G.812Type V |

|...|.......|.......|........|.........|......................................|

|7 |0x7CFF |0xD |92 |13 |QL-ST3E/G.812 typeIII |

|...|.......|.......|........|.........|......................................|

|8 |0x7CFF |0xD |94 |13 |QL-ST3E/G.812 typeIII |

|...|.......|.......|........|.........|......................................|

|9 |0x7CFF |0xD |96 |14 |QL-ST3E/G.812 typeIII |

|...|.......|.......|........|.........|......................................|

|10 |0x7CFF |0xD |98 |14 |QL-ST3E/G.812 typeIII |

|...|.......|.......|........|.........|......................................|

|11 |0x7CFF |0xD |100 |14 |QL-ST3E/G.812 typeIII |

|...|.......|.......|........|.........|......................................|

|12 |0x10FF |0xA |102 |52 |QL-ST3/G.812 typeIV |

|...|.......|.......|........|.........|......................................|

|13 |0x10FF |0xA |104 |58 |QL-SMC/EEC2/G.813/G.8262 OPT2 |

|...|.......|.......|........|.........|......................................|

|14 |0x30FF |0xF |106 |58 |QL-SMC/EEC2/G.813/G.8262 OPT2 |

|...|.......|.......|........|.........|......................................|

|15 |0x30FF |0xF |108 |248 |QL-PROV |

|...|.......|.......|........|.........|......................................|

|16 |0x30FF |0xF |110 |248 |QL-DUS or Invalid SSM |

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 121

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

* Item 2 in Option I Table:

For E1 or SycnE input with received SSM = 0x00, PQL = 2.

For E1 or SycnE output with the system PQL = 2, SSM = 0x02 .

Related : SSM during bridging will be the last SSM value of input reference while clock was in normal lock state.

Level : User, Config, and Admin

122 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

show ptp

Use this command to display the PTP master and PTP client configuration information: the active profile selection, and all the parameters under different profiles, the client list for PTP master, the grand master table for PTP client, and the status for PTP master and PTP client.

Command Syntax:

PTP MASTER:

To display the the active profile selected for PTP master on the ETH2 port: show ptp master active-profile eth2

To display PTP master’s configurable attributes under different profiles on the

ETH2 port: show ptp master config eth2 {telecom-2008 | itu-g8265-1 | default}

To display the client list of PTP master on the ETH2 port: show ptp master client-list eth2 {all | clock-id}

To display the status of PTP master on the ETH2 port: show ptp master status eth2

PTP CLIENT:

To display the active profile selected for PTP client on the ETH1 port: show ptp client active-profile eth1

To display the status of PTP client on the ETH1 port: show ptp client status eth1

To display the VLAN attachment for the master(s) of PTP client on ETH1 port: show ptp client vlan-attach eth1

To display the asymmetry information for PTP client on the ETH1 port: show ptp client eth1 asymmetry

To display the configuration of network transport type for PTP client on the ETH1 port: show ptp client config eth1 transport

To display the configuration of the service tier for PTP client on the ETH1 port: show ptp client config eth1 service-tier

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 123

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

To display the asymmetry state for PTP client on the ETH1 port: show ptp client config eth1 asymmetry state

To display detailed configurable attributes for PTP client on the ETH1 port: show ptp client config eth1 telecom-2008

Example 1:

To show info for PTP client with known clock ID 00:B0:AE:FF:FE:01:1A:85 for PTP master on ETH2 port:

TP2700>show ptp master client-list eth2 clock-id

00:B0:AE:FF:FE:01:1A:85

Response 1:

ETH2 PTP CLIENT INFORMATION:

IP Address VLAN PRI Clock Id Ann Sync Delay

192.168.1.15 0 0 00:B0:AE:FF:FE:01:1A:85 0 0 -6

Example 2:

To show all the clients for the PTP master on the ETH2 port:

TP2700> show ptp master client-list eth2 all

Response 2 :

ETH2 PTP CLIENT INFORMATION:

IP Address VLAN PRI Clock Id Ann Sync Delay

192.168.5.13 0 0 00:B0:AE:FF:FE:01:1A:85 0 0 -6

192.168.5.23 0 0 00:B0:AE:FF:FE:01:1B:85 0 0 -6

192.168.5.33 0 0 00:B0:AE:FF:FE:01:1C:85 0 0 -6

Example 3  :

To show the active profile for the PTP master on the ETH2 port:

TP2700>show ptp master active-profile eth2 <enter>

Response 3a :

ETH2 PTP MASTER ACTIVE-PROFILE: telecom-2008

124 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

Response 3b :

ETH2 PTP MASTER ACTIVE-PROFILE: itu-g8265-1

Response 3c :

ETH2 PTP MASTER ACTIVE-PROFILE: default

Example 4  :

To show the PTP client active-profile:

TP2700>show ptp client active-profile eth1

Response 4 :

ETH1 PTP CLIENT ACTIVE-PROFILE: telecom-2008

Example 5  :

To show the Telecom-2008 configuration info for PTP master on ETH2 port:

TP2700>show ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008

Response 5 :

EHT2 PTP MASTER CONFIGURATION WITH PROFILE TELECOM-2008:

PTP State : enable

PTP TTL : 64

PTP DSCP : 0

PTP Dither : disable

PTP Max Number Clients : 256

PTP Two Steps : disable

PTP Unicast Negotiation : enable

PTP Unicast Lease Duration : 300

PTP Sync Limit : -7

PTP Announce Limit : -4

PTP Delay Limit : -7

PTP Clock Id : 00:b0:ae:ff:fe:03:46:05

PTP Priority 1 : 128

PTP Priority 2 : 128

PTP Domain : 0

PTP Timescale : auto

Example 6  :

To show the profile ITU-G.8265-1 configuration info for PTP master on ETH2 port:

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 125

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

TP2700>show ptp master config eth2 itu-g8265-1

Response 6 :

EHT2 PTP MASTER CONFIGURATION WITH PROFILE ITU-G8265-1:

PTP State : enable

PTP TTL : 64

PTP DSCP : 0

PTP Dither : disable

PTP Max Number Clients : 256

PTP Two Steps : disable

PTP Unicast Negotiation : enable

PTP Unicast Lease Duration : 300

PTP Sync Limit : -7

PTP Announce Limit : -3

PTP Delay Limit : -7

PTP Clock Id : 00:b0:ae:ff:fe:03:46:05

PTP Priority 1 : 128

PTP Priority 2 : 128

PTP Domain : 4

PTP Timescale : auto

Example 7:

To show the default profile (Layer 3 multicast) configuration info for PTP master on

ETH2 port:

TP2700>show ptp master config eth2 default

Response 7 :

ETH2 PTP MASTER CONFIGURATION WITH PROFILE DEFAULT:

PTP State : enable

PTP Vlan ID : 0

PTP TTL : 16

PTP DSCP : 0

PTP Dither : disable

PTP Max Number Clients : 8

PTP Two Step : enable

PTP Clock Id : 00:b0:ae:ff:fe:03:46:05

PTP Priority 1 : 128

PTP Priority 2 : 128

PTP Timescale : auto

PTP Announce Interval : 1

PTP Sync Interval : 0

PTP Announce Receipt Timeout : 3

PTP Multicast Client Timeout : 300

PTP Domain : 0

126 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

Example 8:

To show the status of PTP master on ETH2 port:

TP2700>show ptp master status eth2

Response 8 :

ETH2 PTP MASTER STATUS :

Port enabled : yes

Clock Id : 00:b0:ae:ff:fe:03:46:69

Port Number : 2

Profile : telecom-2008

Port state : master

Clock class : 6

Clock accuracy : within 100 ns

Timescale : ptp

Maximum allowed clients : 64

Number of attached clients : 1

Client load : 1%

Example 9:

To show the Telecom-2008 configuration info for PTP client on ETH1 port:

TP2700>show ptp client config eth1 telecom-2008

Response 9 :

ETH1 PTP CLIENT CONFIGURATION WITH PROFILE TELECOM 2008:

PTP State : enable

PTP TTL : 64

PTP DSCP : 0

PTP Unicast Negotiation : enable

PTP Unicast Lease Duration : 300

PTP Sync Interval : -6

PTP Announce Interval : 1

PTP Delay Interval : -6

PTP Clock Id : 00:b0:ae:ff:fe:03:46:05

PTP Domain : 0

PTP Announce Receipt Timeout : 3

PTP master-table:

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 127

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

------------------------------

|Index |address |

|-------|--------------------|

|1 |192.168.9.41 |

|.......|....................|

|2 |0.0.0.0 |

------------------------------

Example 10:

To show the status for PTP clients on ETH1 port:

TP2700>show ptp client status eth1

Response 10:

ETH1 PTP CLIENT STATUS:

Client Status : OK

Minimal Round Trip Delay(us) : 0.74

METRIC : FORWARD REVERSE

Flow Weight (%) : 47.79 52.21

Transient free out of 900s : 900 900

Transient free out of 3600s : 3600 3600

Percentile Clustering (%) : 100.0 100.0

Operational Min TDEV (ns) : 98.0 98.1

Operational MAFE (ppb) : 0.00 0.00

Min Cluster Width (ns) : 15000.0 7500.0

Mode width (ns) : 30000.0 15000.0

Packet Rate (pkts/s) : 64 64

Currently Used Master:

IP Address : 192.168.9.41

Clock ID : 00:b0:ae:ff:fe:03:46:69

Port Number : 2

Clock Class : 6

Clock Accuracy : within 100 ns

Time Scale : PTP

Time Source : GPS

Time Traceable : true

Frequency Traceable : true

Steps Removed : 1

128 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

Table 3-1. PTP Client Status Descriptions

Status Parameter

Client Status

Minimal Round Trip Delay (µs)

Flow Weight (%)

Transient free out of 900s

Transient free out of 3600

Percentile Clustering (%)

Operational Min TDEV (ns)

Operational MAFE (ppb)

Min Cluster Width (ns)

Description

Indicates whether the client has established flow with the master.

Indicates the smallest round trip delay between this slave port and its upstream master.

Indicates the percentage contribution of the sync packets.

Values are rolling 15 minute (900 s) metrics.

Transients include loss of sync flow, phase steps, and pops against both dynamic and static thresholds. If a given second includes a transient, it is not considered "transient-free".

Generally if 80% or more of the time is transient-free (720 s or more), transient packet behavior should not be causing performance issues.

Values are rolling 1 hour (3600 s) metrics.

Transients include loss of sync flow, phase steps, and pops against both dynamic and static thresholds. If a given second includes a transient, it is not considered "transient-free".

Generally if 80% or more of the time is transient-free (2880 s or more), transient packet behavior should not be causing performance issues.

Indicates percentage of sync packets that meet all clustering criteria and are therefore included in extracting lock offset estimates.

An operational stability estimate using the minimum TDEV metric defined in G.8261.

Smaller values correlate to better output performance. This value is based on forward flow

(sync).

Operational stability estimate proposed to the

ITU-T. MAFE (maximum Average Frequency

Error) estimates the maximum frequency error of a packet clock based on a clustering and averaging window. The clustering window is 1 minute and the averaging window I 15 minutes.

Current operational minimum cluster width used in the clock estimate.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 129

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

Table 3-1. PTP Client Status Descriptions

Status Parameter

Mode width (ns)

Packet Rate (pkts/s)

IP address

Clock ID

Clock Class

Clock Accuracy

Time Scale

Time Source

Time Traceable

Frequency Traceable

Steps Removed

Description

Current estimate of the main mode width of the forward packet delay variation. The mode width is used in both weighting and compensation.

Mode width is a good indicator of loading.

Measured rate of SYNC packets in the forward path and the DELAY_RESP packet in the reverse path.

Identifies the IPv4 address of the master.

Identifies the Clock ID of the master.

Identifies the PTP clockClass of the grandmaster.

Identifies the clock accuracy of the grandmaster.

Timescale whether PTP or ARB is used by the grandmaster.

Identifies the time source of the grandmaster.

Time source is defined in Table 7 of IEEE Std

1588-2008.

Identifies whether the slave clock time is traceable to the grandmaster.

Identifies whether the slave clock frequency is traceable to the grandmaster.

Identifies the number of hops between this slave clock and the grandmaster clock.

Example 11:

To show the vlan attachments for masters of PTP client on ETH1 port:

TP2700>show ptp client vlan-attach eth1

Response 11:

PTP client port VLAN attachment : 0

Example 12:

To display the configuration of network transport type for PTP client on ETH1 port:

TP2700> show ptp client config eth1 transport

130 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

Response 12:

ETH1 PTP client port transport type : Ethernet

Example 13:

To display the configuration of the service tier for PTP client on ETH1 port:

TP2700> show ptp client config eth1 service-tier

Response 13:

ETH1 PTP client port service-tier : sync-mask

Example 14:

To display the asymmetry state for PTP client port:

TP2700> show ptp client config eth1 asymmetry state

Response 14:

ETH1 PTP client port asymmetry state : disable

Example 15:

To display the asymmetry information for PTP client port:

TP2700> show ptp client eth1 asymmetry

Response 15:

ETH1 PTP client port asymmetry information:

Current table : Table 1

Current path calibration noise (ns) : 451

Table 1 Clock ID : 00-B0-AE-FF-FE-01-D8-86

Table 1 Path rearrangements per day : 4

Table 1 Number of total paths

Table 2 Clock ID

: 3

: 00-B0-AE-FF-FE-01-D8-45

Table 2 Path rearrangements per day : 4

Table 2 Number of total paths : 23

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 131

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

set ptp

The command is used to provision the configurable parameters for PTP output

(master) and PTP input (client), including the profile selection, the attributes under different profiles, and to provision the Grand Master table for PTP client.

Table 3-2. PTP Profiles

PTP Profile

Default

Telecom-2008

ITU-T G.8265-1 default

Syntax telecom-2008 g8265-1

Transport Mode

Layer 3 Multicast

Unicast

Unicast

Description

IEEE 1588-2008 Annex J multicast over UDP/IP

Generic unicast profile created for telecom before ITU-T

G.8265.1

Telecom profile for frequency sync described in ITU-T

G.8265.1

See

Table 3-3 for descriptions of the attributes specific to the Default (multicast)

PTP Master profile. See

Table 3-4

for descriptions of the attributes specific to the

Telecom-2008 and ITU-T G.8265.1 (unicast) PTP Master profile. See

Table 3-5

for descriptions of the attributes specific to the PTP Client profile.

Command Syntax:

PTP MASTER - Default Profile Multicast Attributes:

To provision the active profile for PTP master with the Default (multicast) active profile: set ptp master active-profile eth2 default

To provision the state of the Two-Step Clock mode for the Master with the Default

(multicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 default two-step {enable | disable}

– If the Two-Step Clock state is Disable, a One-Step Clock is used.

To provision the timescale to Automatic, Arbitrary, or PTP for the Master with the

Default (multicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 default timescale {auto| arb | ptp}

132 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

– If the timescale is set to “auto”, the TP 2300/2700 will make the decision based on the input. The TP 2300/2700 will set the timescale to “ptp” if the unit is locked to GNSS or PTP. The TP 2300/2700 will set the timescale to

“arb” if the unit is locked to any other reference besides GNSS or PTP (i.e.,

E1, T1 or SyncE).

To provision the state for the Master with the Default (multicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 default ptp-state {enable | disable}

To provision the PTP priority-1 value for the Master with the Default (multicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 default priority-1

<priority-1-value>

To provision the PTP priority-2 value for the Master with the Default (multicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 default priority-2

<priority-2-value>

To provision the PTP domain value for the Master with the Default (multicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 default domain <domain-value>

To provision the PTP Diffserv Code Point value for the Master with the Default

(multicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 default dscp <dscp-value>

To provision the PTP dither value for the Master with the Default (multicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 default dither {enable | disable}

To provision the IP Header Time to Live (TTL) field for PTP packets for the

Master with the Default (multicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 default ttl <TTL-value>

To provision the announce receipt timeout value for a Master with the Default

(multicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 default announce-receipt-timeout

<timeout-value>

To provision the announce interval value for a Master with the Default (multicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 default announce-interval

<announce-interval-value>

– The interval is 2 z

seconds, where z= <announce-interval-value>.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 133

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

To provision the sync-interval value for a Master with the Default (multicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 default sync-interval

<sync-interval-value>

To provision the client-timeout value for a Master with the Default (multicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 default client-timeout

<client-timeout-value>

To provision the VLAN ID value for a Master with the Default (multicast) active profile set ptp master config eth2 default vlanid <vlanid-value>

PTP MASTER - Telecom-2008 Profile Attributes:

To provision the active profile to Telecom-2008 for PTP master: set ptp master active-profile eth2 telecom-2008

To provision the state of the Two-Step Clock mode, for the Master with the

Telecom-2008 (unicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 two-step {enable | disable}

– If the Two-Step Clock state is Disable, a One-Step Clock is used.

To provision the timescale to Automatic, Arbitrary or PTP for the Master with the

Telecom-2008 (unicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 timescale {auto| arb

| ptp}

– If the timescale is set to “auto”, the TP 2300/2700 will make the decision based on the input. The TP 2300/2700 will set the timescale to “ptp” if the unit is locked to gnss or ptp. The TP 2300/2700 will set the timescale to

“arb” if the unit is locked to any other reference besides gnss or ptp (i.e.,

E1, T1 or SyncE).

To provision the state for the Master with the Telecom-2008 (unicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 ptp-state {enable | disable}

To provision the PTP priority1 value for the Master with the Telecom-2008

(unicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 priority-1

<priority-1-value>

134 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

To provision the PTP priority-2 value for the Master with the Telecom-2008

(unicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 priority-2

<priority-2-value>

To provision the PTP domain value for the Master with the Telecom-2008

(unicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 domain

<domain-value>

To provision the PTP Diffserv Code Point value for the Master with the

Telecom-2008 (unicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 dscp <dscp-value>

To provision the PTP dither value for the Master with the Telecom-2008 (unicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 dither {enable | disable}

To provision the IP Header Time to Live (TTL) field for PTP packets for a Master with the Telecom-2008 (unicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 ttl <TTL-value>

To provision the PTP unicast negotiation state for the Master with the

Telecom-2008 (unicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 unicast-negotiation

{enable | disable}

To set the PTP unicast maximum lease-limit value for the Master with the

Telecom-2008 (unicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 lease-limit

<limit-value>

To provision the announce limit, the minimum interval (maximum rate) between

PTP announce messages, for the Master with the Telecom-2008 (unicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 announce-limit

<announce-limit value>

– The interval is 2 z

seconds, where z= <announce-limit-value>.

To provision the synchronization limit, the minimum interval (maximum rate) between PTP synchronization messages, for the Master with the Telecom-2008

(unicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 sync-limit

<sync-limit value>

– The interval is 2 z seconds, where z= <sync-limit-value>.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 135

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

To provision the delay limit, the minimum interval (maximum rate) between PTP delay response messages, for the Master with the Telecom-2008 (unicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 delay-limit

<delay-limit-value>

– The interval is 2 z

seconds, where z= <delay-limit-value>.

PTP MASTER - ITU-G.8265-1 Profile Attributes:

To provision the active profile for PTP master: set ptp master active-profile eth2 itu-g8265-1

To provision the state of the Two-Step Clock mode, for the Master with the

ITU-G.8265-1 (unicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 itu-g8265-1 two-step {enable | disable}

– If the Two-Step Clock state is Disable, a One-Step Clock is used.

To provision the timescale to Automatic, Arbitrary or PTP for the Master with the

ITU-G.8265-1 (unicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 itu-g8265-1 timescale {auto| arb

| ptp}

– If the timescale is set to “auto”, the TP 2300/2700 will make the decision based on the input. The TP 2300/2700 will set the timescale to “ptp” if the unit is locked to gnss or ptp. The TP 2300/2700 will set the timescale to

“arb” if the unit is locked to any other reference besides gnss or ptp (i.e.,

E1, T1 or SyncE).

To provision the state for the Master with the ITU-G.8265-1 (unicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 itu-g8265-1 ptp-state {enable | disable}

To provision the PTP priority1 value for the Master with the ITU-G.8265-1

(unicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 itu-g8265-1 priority-1

<priority-1-value>

To provision the PTP priority-2 value for the Master with the ITU-G.8265-1

(unicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 itu-g8265-1 priority-2

<priority-2-value>

136 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

To provision the PTP domain value for the Master with the ITU-G.8265-1

(unicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 itu-g8265-1 domain <domain-value>

To provision the PTP Diffserv Code Point value for the Master with the

ITU-G.8265-1 (unicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 itu-g8265-1 dscp <dscp-value>

To provision the PTP dither value for the Master with the ITU-G.8265-1 (unicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 itu-g8265-1 dither {enable | disable}

To provision the IP Header Time to Live (TTL) field for PTP packets for a Master with the ITU-G.8265-1 (unicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 itu-g8265-1 ttl <TTL-value>

To provision the PTP unicast negotiation state for the Master with the

ITU-G.8265-1 (unicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 itu-g8265-1 unicast-negotiation

{enable | disable}

To set the PTP unicast maximum lease-limit value for the Master with the

ITU-G.8265-1 (unicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 itu-g8265-1 lease-limit

<limit-value>

To provision the announce limit, the minimum interval (maximum rate) between

PTP announce messages, for the Master with the ITU-G.8265-1 (unicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 itu-g8265-1 announce-limit

<announce-limit value>

– The interval is 2 z

seconds, where z= <announce-limit-value>.

To provision the synchronization limit, the minimum interval (maximum rate) between PTP synchronization messages, for the Master with the ITU-G.8265-1

(unicast) active profile: set ptp master config eth2 itu-g8265-1 sync-limit

<sync-limit value>

– The interval is 2 z

seconds, where z= <sync-limit-value>.

To provision the delay limit, the minimum interval (maximum rate) between PTP delay response messages, for the Master with the ITU-G.8265-1 (unicast) active profile:

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 137

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set set ptp master config eth2 itu-g8265-1 delay-limit

<delay-limit-value>

– The interval is 2 z seconds, where z= <delay-limit-value>.

PTP CLIENT:

To provision the active profile for PTP client: set ptp client active-profile eth1 telecom-2008

To provision a VLAN for a master in the acceptable master table for PTP client: set ptp client vlan-attach eth1 vlanid < 2-4094>

To provision the transport for PTP client on ETH1 port: set ptp client config eth1 transport ethernet

To provision the service tier for PTP client on ETH1 port: set ptp client config eth1 service-tier {sync-mask | traffic_mask | modified_traffic_mask}

To provision the asymmetry state for PTP client on ETH1 port: set ptp client config eth1 asymmetry state

{enable | disable}

To clear the asymmetry for PTP client on ETH1 port: set ptp client config eth1 asymmetry clear

To provision the PTP unicast negotiation state for the Client: set ptp client config eth1 telecom-2008 unicast-negotiation

{enable|disable}

To set the PTP unicast maximum lease duration value for the Client: set ptp client config eth1 telecom-2008 lease-duration

<duration-value>

To set the PTP announce receipt timeout value for the Client: set ptp client config eth1 telecom-2008 announce-receipt-timeout <timeout-value>

To provision the state for the ETH1 PTP Client port: set ptp client config eth1 telecom2008 ptp-state {enable | disable}

138 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

To provision the acceptable master table for PTP client: set ptp client config eth1 telecom2008 master-table add index {1 | 2} address < ipv4-address>

Note: All master IP addresses configured in the master table must be reachable, either by being in the same subnet as the port (ETH1) IP address, or through a configured gateway. If either of the master addresses is not reachable through the network configuration, then neither of the masters will be utilized for PTP even if one master is correctly addressed.

set ptp client config eth1 telecom2008 master-table delete index {1 | 2} set ptp client config eth1 telecom2008 master-table clear

To provision the PTP domain value for the Client: set ptp client config eth1 telecom2008 domain <domain-value>

To provision the PTP Diffserv Code Point value for the Client: set ptp client config eth1 telecom2008 dscp <dscp-value>

– If the Two-Step Clock state is Disable, a One-Step Clock is used.

To provision the announce interval for the Client: set ptp client config eth1 telecom2008 announce-interval

<announce-interval-value>

– The interval is 2 z

seconds, where z= <announce-limit-value>.

To provision the sync interval for the Client: set ptp client config eth1 telecom2008 sync-interval

<sync-interval-value>

– The interval is 2 z seconds, where z= <sync-interval-value>.

To provision the delay request interval for the Client: set ptp client config eth1 telecom2008 delay-req-interval

<delay-req-interval-value>

– The interval is 2 z

seconds, where z= <delayReqInterval-value>.

To provision the IP Header Time to Live (TTL) field for PTP packets for a Client: set ptp client config eth1 telecom2008 ttl <TTL-value>

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 139

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

Table 3-3. PTP Master  Default Profile (Multicast) Parameter Descriptions

Parameter two-step timescale ptp-state ttl priority-1 priority-2 domain

Description

Use to enable the grandmaster for two-step clock mode on the specified port. If two-step clock mode is disabled, the grandmaster uses one-step clock mode.

Use to select the timescale for the selected port. Use the PTP timescale if the Grandmaster has a GNSS or

PTP connection for the clock. Use the ARB timescale if the Grandmaster has an E1, T1, or SyncE signal for the clock. Use the AUTO setting (recommended) to have the Grandmaster automatically set the timescale based on the selected clock source, GPS, T1/E1,

PTP, or SyncE.

Use to enable or disable PTP functionality for the specified port.

Use to set the IP header Time-to-Live value This field is used to limit how many hops a packet will be transmitted in a network.

Sets the advertised Priority 1 value for the

Grandmaster for the specified port. PTP clients use the Best Master Clock (BMC) algorithm to determine which Grandmaster provides the best signal by first comparing Priority 1 values, then dynamic elements from the Grandmasters (such as clock class, accuracy and variance), and then Priority 2 values.

Sets the advertised Priority 2 value for the

Grandmaster for the specified port. Clients use the

Best Master Clock (BMC) algorithm to determine which Grandmaster provides the best signal by first comparing Priority 1 values, then dynamic elements from the Grandmasters (such as clock class, accuracy and variance), and then Priority 2 values.

Sets the domain value for the Grandmaster clock.

IEEE-1588-2008 defines a domain as a logical grouping of clocks that synchronize to each other using the protocol, but that are not necessarily synchronized to clocks in another domain.

140 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

Table 3-3. PTP Master  Default Profile (Multicast) Parameter Descriptions (Continued)

Parameter Description dscp The Differentiated Services Code Point is an 6-bit field in the 8-bit Differentiated Services (DS) field of the IP packet header to specify what classes of traffic will be provided, what guarantees are needed for each class, and how much data will be sent for each class. When used with the TP 2300/2700, it provides a way to prioritize packets for PTP traffic.

dither This is an advanced feature in which an intentionally applied form of noise is used to randomize quantization error, and thus to break up any undesirable synchronizing effects with the network.

With dither enabled, the TP 2300/2700 varies the T1 timestamp by a pseudo-random sequence with peak variations of no more than +/- 800  sec. client-timeout announce-receipt-timeout Sets the announce timeout value for Multicast. This should be set to a consistent value in the PTP domain.

vlanid Sets the VLAN ID for the Grandmaster in Multicast (default) profile. A VLAN ID of 0 is used to specify that no VLAN is being used. Only one VLAN will be supported in this profiles. announce-interval

Sets the client timeout value. If less than several hundred delay request messages have been received from a client before the specified client timeout value, the Grandmaster removes that client from the client list. If delay requests are sent at a slow rate, then the client-timeout value must be increased.

Applies to Default (Multicast) ptp profile.

sync-interval

Sets the announce interval for the TP 2700 Grandmaster, how often to send announce messages to clients on the specified port. Applies to Default (Multicast) PTP profiles

The interval is 2 z seconds, where z= <announce-int-value>.

Sets the synchronization interval for the TP 2300/2700

Grandmaster, how often to send synchronization messages to clients on the specified port. Applies to Default (Multicast)

PTP profiles.

The interval is 2 z seconds, where z= <sync-int-value>.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 141

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

Table 3-4. PTP Master  Telecom-2008 & ITU-G8265-1 Profiles (Unicast) Parameter Descriptions

Parameter two-step timescale ptp-state ttl priority-1 priority-2 domain

Description

Use to enable the grandmaster for two-step clock mode on the specified port. If two-step clock mode is disabled, the grandmaster uses one-step clock mode.

Use to select the timescale for the selected port. Use the

PTP timescale if the Grandmaster has a GNSS or PTP connection for the clock. Use the ARB timescale if the

Grandmaster has an E1, T1, or SyncE signal for the clock.

Use the AUTO setting (recommended) to have the

Grandmaster automatically set the timescale based on the selected clock source, GPS, T1/E1, PTP, or SyncE.

Use to enable or disable PTP functionality for the specified port.

Use to set the IP header Time-to-Live value This field is used to limit how many hops a packet will be transmitted in a network.

Sets the advertised Priority 1 value for the Grandmaster for the specified port. PTP clients use the Best Master Clock

(BMC) algorithm to determine which Grandmaster provides the best signal by first comparing Priority 1 values, then dynamic elements from the Grandmasters

(such as clock class, accuracy and variance), and then

Priority 2 values.

Sets the advertised Priority 2 value for the Grandmaster for the specified port. Clients use the Best Master Clock

(BMC) algorithm to determine which Grandmaster provides the best signal by first comparing Priority 1 values, then dynamic elements from the Grandmasters

(such as clock class, accuracy and variance), and then

Priority 2 values.

Sets the domain value for the Grandmaster clock.

IEEE-1588-2008 defines a domain as a logical grouping of clocks that synchronize to each other using the protocol, but that are not necessarily synchronized to clocks in another domain.

142 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

Table 3-4. PTP Master  Telecom-2008 & ITU-G8265-1 Profiles (Unicast) Parameter Descriptions dscp

Parameter dither announce-limit sync-limit delay-limit unicast-negotiation lease-limit

Description

The Differentiated Services Code Point is an 6-bit field in the 8-bit Differentiated Services (DS) field of the IP packet header to specify what classes of traffic will be provided, what guarantees are needed for each class, and how much data will be sent for each class. When used with the

TP 2300/2700, it provides a way to prioritize packets for

PTP traffic.

This is an advanced feature in which an intentionally applied form of noise is used to randomize quantization error, and thus to break up any undesirable synchronizing effects with the network. With dither enabled, the TP

2300/2700 varies the T1 timestamp by a pseudo-random sequence with peak variations of no more than +/- 800

 sec.

Use to limit the minimum interval between announcements

(maximum rate) from the specified TP 2300/2700. This is a way to restrict how network resources will be utilized.

The interval is 2 z seconds, where z=

<announce-limit-value>.

Use to limit the minimum interval between synchronization messages (maximum rate) from the specified TP

2300/2700 port. This is a way to restrict how network resources will be utilized.

The interval is 2 z seconds, where z= <sync-limit-value>.

Use to limit the minimum interval between between delay requests for the specified TP 2300/2700 port. This is a way to restrict how network resources will be utilized.

The interval is 2 z seconds, where z= <delay-limit-value>.

Use to enable or disable the Grandmaster’s ability to dynamically negotiate with clients for service in Unicast mode.

Sets the maximum duration of the lease for clients that have dynamically negotiated for service in Unicast mode.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 143

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

Table 3-5. PTP Client  Parameter Descriptions for Telecom-2008 Profile

Parameter transport service-tier asymmetry ptp-state ttl announce-interval sync-interval delay-req-interval announce-receipt-timeout unicast-negotiation lease-limit

Description

Network (PTP packet delivery): Ethernet

PTP sync service tier applies to PTP client and is defined by a performance mask which is used to monitor performance.

Use to enable or disable compensation for network path asymmetry between PTP client input port and master. Also use to clear asymmetry information.

Use to enable or disable PTP functionality for the specified port.

Use to set the IP header Time-to-Live value This field is used to limit how many hops a packet will be transmitted in a network.

Used on client port to negotiate with master the announce message rate. This parameter is applicable to Unicast profiles only.

The interval is 2 z

seconds, where z=

<announce-limit-value>.

Used on client port to negotiate with master the Sync message rate. This parameter is applicable to Unicast profiles only.

The interval is 2 z seconds, where z= <sync-limit-value>.

Used on client port to negotiate with master the delay-request message rate. This parameter is applicable to Unicast profiles only.

The interval is 2 z seconds, where z= <delay-limit-value>.

The announce-receipt-timeout specifies the announce interval that has to pass without receipt of an announce message before the occurrence of this event. If this event happens on the client port, the client port will switch to the backup Master.

Use to enable or disable the client’s ability to negotiate with

Grandmasters for service in Unicast profiles.

Sets the PTP lease limit of service with the master. This parameter is applicable to client port while running Unicast profiles.

144 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

Table 3-5. PTP Client  Parameter Descriptions for Telecom-2008 Profile (Continued) domain

Parameter dscp master-table

Description

Sets the domain value for the Client clock.

IEEE-1588-2008 defines a domain as a logical grouping of clocks that synchronize to each other using the protocol, but that are not necessarily synchronized to clocks in another domain.

The Differentiated Services Code Point is an 6-bit field in the 8-bit Differentiated Services (DS) field of the IP packet header to specify what classes of traffic will be provided, what guarantees are needed for each class, and how much data will be sent for each class. When used with the

TP 2300/2700, it provides a way to prioritize packets for

PTP traffic.

QoS code = 0 means no special priority

A list of IP address, priority, and vlan related to acceptable

PTP masters. The address 0.0.0.0 means no Master is added under this index.

Vlanid = 0 means no vlan

Example 1:

To set the active-profile of PTP master in eth2 port as telecom-2008:

TP2700>set ptp master active-profile eth2 telecom-2008

Example 2:

To provision the following attributes of profile telecom-2008 for PTP master in eth2 port:

 ptp state ttl

 dscp dither two-step unicast-negotiation

 lease-limit announce-limit sync-limit

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 145

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

 delay-limit priority-1

 priority-2 domain timescale

Refer to

Table B-39

, Table B-40 , and Table B-41 in Appendix B for range and default

values for PTP parameters.

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 ptp-state enable

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 ttl 100

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 dscp 5

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 dither enable

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 two-step enable

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 unicast-negotiation enable

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 lease-limit 300

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 announce-limit -4

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 sync-limit -7

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 delay-limit -7

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 priority-1 128

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 priority-2 128

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 domain 8

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 timescale auto

Example 3:

To set the active-profile of PTP master in eth2 port as itu-g8265-1:

TP2700>set ptp master active-profile eth2 itu-g8265-1

Example 4:

146 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

To provision the following attributes of profile itu-g8265-1 for PTP master in eth2 port:

 ptp-state ttl dscp dither

 two-step unicast-negotiation lease-limit announce-limit

 sync-limit delay-limit priority-1 priority-2

 domain timescale

Refer to

Table B-39

, Table B-40 , and Table B-41 in Appendix B for range and default

values for PTP parameters.

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 itu-g8265-1 ptp-state enable

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 itu-g8265-1 ttl 200

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 itu-g8265-1 dscp 200

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 itu-g8265-1 dither enable

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 itu-g8265-1 two-step enable

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 itu-g8265-1 unicast-negotiation enable

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 itu-g8265-1 lease-limit 800

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 itu-g8265-1 announce-limit -4

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 itu-g8265-1 sync-limit -7

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 itu-g8265-1 delay-limit -7

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 itu-g8265-1 priority-1 0

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 itu-g8265-1 priority-2 0

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 147

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 itu-g8265-1 domain 0

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 itu-g8265-1 timescale auto

Example 5:

To set the active-profile of PTP master on ETH2 port as default:

TP2700>set ptp master active-profile eth2 default

Example 6:

To provision the following attributes of profile default for PTP master in eth2 port:

 ptp-state ttl

 dscp dither two-step priority-1

 priority-2 timescale domain announce-receipt-timeout

 announce-interval sync-interval client-timeout

Refer to

Table B-39

, Table B-40 , and Table B-41 in Appendix B for range and default

values for PTP parameters.

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 default ptp-state enable

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 default ttl 20

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 default dscp 25

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 default dither enable

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 default two-step enable

148 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 default priority-1 200

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 default priority-2 200

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 default domain 10

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 default timescale auto

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 default announce-interval 2

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 default sync-interval -6

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 default announce-receipt-timeout 4

TP2700>set ptp master config eth2 default client-timeout 100

Example 7:

To set the active-profile of PTP client in eth1 port as telecom-2008:

TP2700>set ptp client active-profile eth1 telecom-2008

Example 8:

To provision the following attributes of profile telecom-2008 for PTP client in eth1 port:

 ptp-state ttl dscp unicast-negotiation

 lease-duration announce-interval sync-interval delay-req-interval

 announce-receipt-timeout domain

Refer to

Table B-39

, Table B-40 , and Table B-41 in Appendix B for range and default

values for PTP parameters.

TP2700>set ptp client config eth1 telecom-2008 ptp-state enable

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 149

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

TP2700>set ptp client config eth1 telecom-2008 ttl 10

TP2700>set ptp client config eth1 telecom-2008 dscp 8

TP2700>set ptp client config eth1 telecom-2008 unicast-negotiation enable

TP2700>set ptp client config eth1 telecom-2008 lease-duration 300

TP2700>set ptp client config eth1 telecom-2008 announce-interval -4

TP2700>set ptp client config eth1 telecom-2008 announce-receipt-timeout

5

TP2700>set ptp client config eth1 telecom-2008 sync-interval -7

TP2700>set ptp client config eth1 telecom-2008 delay-req-interval -7

TP2700>set ptp client config eth1 telecom-2008 domain 5

Example 9:

To add masters to the PTP master table for PTP client in eth1 port:

TP2700>set ptp client config eth1 telecom-2008 master-table add index 1 address 192.168.1.11

TP2700>set ptp client config eth1 telecom-2008 master-table add index 2 address 192.168.5.11

Example 10:

To delete a master from the PTP master table for PTP client in eth1 port:

TP2700>set ptp client config eth1 telecom-2008 master-table delete index 2

Example 11:

To delete all masters from the PTP master table for PTP client in eth1 port:

TP2700>set ptp client config eth1 telecom-2008 master-table clear

Level : Config and Admin

150 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

reboot system

This command restarts the TimeProvider 2300/2700 system. Using this command can cause a loss of outputs.

Command Syntax: reboot system

Remarks:

Example 1:

TP2700> reboot system

Response 1:

The system is going down for REBOOT NOW!

........................................

Symmetricom TimeProvider: login:

TP2700>

Level : Admin

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 151

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

show ref

Use this command to display the configuration for reference selection including reference selection criteria, input priorities and configured PQL values, switching mode, and the reference status.

Command Syntax: show ref config show ref status

Example 1:

TP2700> show ref config

Response 1:

Reference Criteria : priority

Reference Switch Mode : AutoReturn

Time Reference Config

--------------------------------------------------

|Reference |Priority |config-PQL |use-config-pql |

|----------|---------|-----------|---------------|

|GNSS |2 |3 | enable |

|..........|.........|...........|...............|

|PTP |1 |1 | enable |

--------------------------------------------------

Frequency Reference Config

--------------------------------------------------

|Reference |Priority |config-PQL |use-config-pql |

|----------|---------|-----------|---------------|

|GNSS |2 |3 |enable |

|..........|.........|...........|...............|

|PTP |1 |1 |enable |

|..........|.........|...........|...............|

|SYNCE |4 |3 |enable |

|..........|.........|...........|...............|

|T1E1 |3 |3 |disable |

--------------------------------------------------

Example 2:

152 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

TP2700> show ref status

Response 2:

Time Reference Status

------------------------------------

|Reference |final-pql|status |

|----------|---------|-------------|

|GNSS |1 |disqualified |

|..........|.........|.............|

|PTP |3 |selected |

------------------------------------

Frequency Reference Status

------------------------------------

|Reference |final-pql|status |

|----------|---------|-------------|

|GNSS |1 |disqualified |

|..........|.........|.............|

|PTP |3 |selected |

|..........|.........|.............|

|SYNCE |3 |qualified |

|..........|.........|.............|

|T1E1 |16 |disqualified |

------------------------------------

Level : User, Config, and Admin

set ref

Use this command to provision the system's reference port(s) priority, configured quality Level (PQL), reference selection criteria, and reference switching mode.

The Timing References includes GNSS (GPS/GLONASS), and PTP (with PTP timescale) inputs.

The frequency references includes GNSS, T1/E1, SyncE and PTP inputs.

Command Syntax:

To set the priority for a time reference input: set ref time priority {gnss | ptp} {1 - 10}

To set the config-PQL value for a time reference input: set ref time config-pql {gnss | ptp} {1 - 16}

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 153

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

To set the priority for a frequency reference input: set ref frequency priority {gnss | ptp |synce | t1e1}

{1 - 10}

To set the config-PQL value for a frequency reference input: set ref frequency config-pql {gnss | ptp |synce | t1e1}

{1 - 16}

To configure reference inputs (time or frequency) to use either the user-provisioned PQL value or the received PQL value : set ref use-config-pql {gnss | ptp |synce | t1e1}

{enable | disable

– A setting of enable for use-config-pql means that the system will apply the user-provisioned PQL value rather than the received PQL value for reference selection.

To set the criteria for reference selection from reference inputs (time and frequency)  set ref criteria {priority | pql}

– When reference criteria is set to PRIORITY, the system selects the reference based on the priority setting. When reference criteria is set to

PQL, the system selects the reference based on the PQL (received or provisioned).

– Manual selection of a reference input can be done by disabling all reference input ports except the desired one.

To set the reference switching mode  set ref switch-mode {auto-return | auto-switch}

– In auto-return mode, the reference auto selection algorithm switches to the best reference immediately whenever it detects a better priority or PQL value than the current reference among the qualified input ports. In this mode, the system is fully automatic.

– In auto-switch mode, the current selected reference will not switch to another valid input port until it is disqualified or the reference is manually disabled.

Example 1:

To set the priority to 2 for a GNSS time reference input: set ref time priority gnss 2

Example 2:

154 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

To set the config-PQL value to 4 for a GNSS time reference input: set ref time config-pql gnss 4

Example 3:

To set the priority value to 6 for a SyncE frequency reference input: set ref frequency priority synce 6

Example 4:

To set the config-PQL value to 5 for a T1/E1 frequency reference input: set ref frequency config-pql t1e1 5

Example 5:

To configure the PTP reference inputs to use either the user-provisioned PQL value: set ref use-config-pql ptp enable

Example 6:

To set the unit for reference selection based on Priority values  set ref criteria priority

Example 7:

To set the reference switching to auto-return mode:

Defaults :

TP2700> set ref switch-mode auto-return use-config pql = enable reference switch = auto-return (for both time and frequency)

Reference Priority pql

-------------------------------------------

GNSS 1

PTP 2

1

3

SYNCE

T1E1

3

4

3

3

Level : Config and Admin

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 155

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

show-session-timeout

For current opened user interface session, this command displays the inactivity timeout to the defined time interval, in seconds. 0 means the time-out for this session is disabled.

Command Syntax:

To display the session timeout: show-session-timeout

Example:

TP2700>show-session-timeout

Response:

The current session timeout - 1800 sec

Level : User, Config, and Admin

set-session-timeout

This command sets the inactivity timeout to the defined time interval, in seconds.

This setting is only used for the current CLI session.

Command Syntax:

Example: set-session-timeout <value>

TP2700>set-session-timeout 1800

Range : 0, 600 to 86400 seconds

Default : 900 seconds

Level : User, Config, and Admin

156 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

show snmp

Use these commands to display the SNMP Manager assigned to the agent, all assigned users (username only), and the SNMP trap version and SNMP trap user.

Command Syntax:

To display the SNMP manager assignment: show snmp manager

To display the SNMPv3 user configuration: show snmp user

To display the SNMP TRAP user information (user names only): show snmp trapuser

To display the SNMP v2-community information: show snmp v2-community

To display the SNMP V2 state: show snmp state-v2

To display the SNMP trap version: show snmp trapversion

Example 1:

TP2700> show snmp manager

Response 1:

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

|Index|Manager ID |Manager Addr |Engine ID |

|-----|---------------|--------------------|--------------------------------|

|1 |m192.168.5.187 |192.168.5.187 |0x63000000a1c0a805bb |

|.....|...............|....................|................................|

|2 |m192.168.5.144 |192.168.5.144 |0x0123456789010384 |

|.....|...............|....................|................................|

|3 |m192.168.5.171 |192.168.5.171 |0x63000000a1c0a805bb |

|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Example 2:

TP2700> show snmp user

Response 2:

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 157

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

|Index|User Name |User Type |Auth. Key |Priv. Key |

|-----|--------------------|-------------|---------------|---------------|

|1 |test |snmpnoauth |********** |********** |

|.....|....................|.............|...............|...............|

|2 |harsha |snmpshades |********** |********** |

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Example 3:

TP2700> show snmp trapuser

Response 3:

No SNMP trap user configured.

Example 4:

TP2700> show snmp v2-community

Response 4:

-----------------------------------------

|Index|Community Name |Access Level|

|-----|--------------------|------------|

|1 |test |readwrite |

|.....|....................|............|

|2 |testteam |readwrite |

-----------------------------------------

Example 5:

TP2700> show snmp state-v2

Response 5:

SNMP v2 state : enable

Example 6:

TP2700> show snmp trapversion

Response 6:

Trap version - v3

Level : User, Config, and Admin

158 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

set snmp

Use this command to provision the SNMP v2 state, trap version, user assignment, manager assignment, and trapuser and v2 community assignments.

Role

SNMP User

Trapuser

Manager v2 Community

Max Number

10

3

3

10

Command Syntax:

To add an SNMP user or trapuser: set snmp add {user | trapuser} <name> securelvl {noauth | auth | priv}

To add an SNMP v2-community: set snmp add v2-community <name> securelvl {read-only| read-write}

To add an SNMP manager: set snmp add manager <ip-address> engineid <engine-id>

To delete an SNMP user, trapuser, or v2-community: set snmp delete {user | trapuser | v2-community} <name>

To delete an SNMP manager: set snmp delete manager <ip-address>

To set the SNMP trap version to either v2c or v3: set snmp trapversion {2|3}

To provision the state of SNMP v2 communities: set snmp state-v2 {enable | disable}

Example 1:

To add SNMP user named “maynard”, with a security level of “priv” :

TP2700> set snmp add user maynard securelvl priv

Response 1:

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 159

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

For security level of priv , the TP 2300/2700 will prompt for:

Authentication protocol (MD5 or SHA):

Authentication key [Only chars {a-z,A-Z,0-9,! ( )- _ . ? ~ * @ ^ +

= : / %} are accepted] :

Privacy protocol (DES or AES):

Privacy key [Only chars {a-z,A-Z,0-9,! ( )- _ . ? ~ * @ ^ + = : / %} are accepted]:

If the security level is auth , the TP 2300/2700 will prompt for: authkey <authkey-value> authtype {MD5 | SHA}

Example 2:

To add SNMP v2-community named “groupv2”, with a security level of read-write:

TP2700> set snmp add v2-community groupv2 securelvl read-write

Example 3:

To add SNMP manager with the IP address 192.168.5.177 and engine ID of

0x12345678901234: set snmp add manager 192.168.5.177 engineid 0x12345678901234

Example 4:

To delete SNMP trap user named “george3”: set snmp delete trapuser george3

Example 5:

To delete SNMP manager at IP address 192.168.5.177:

TP2700> set snmp delete manager 192.168.5.177

Example 6:

To set the trap version to SNMP v3:

TP2700> set snmp trapversion 3

Example 7:

To enable SNMP v2 on the TP 2300/2700:

TP2700> set snmp state-v2 enable

Level : Admin

160 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

show ssm-option

Use this command to display whether the E1 or T1 sync network option is selected, as defined in G.781, for the ETH1 and ETH2 SyncE ports.

Command Syntax:

Example: show ssm-option tp2700> show ssm-option

Response:

------------------------------

|Ethernet port|SSM Option |

|-------------|--------------|

|eth1 |ITU option I |

|.............|..............|

|eth2 |ITU option I |

------------------------------

set ssm-option

Use this command to select either E1 or T1 sync network options as defined in

G.781 and used for SyncE.

Command Syntax:

Example: set ssm-option all {option1 | option2}

To set the ssm-option for ETH1 and ETH2 ports to option1: tp2700> set ssm-option all option1

Note: The ssm-option only applies to syncE and the ITU-G.8265.1 profile of PTP.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 161

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

show status

Use this command to display the following system status information:

Assigned System Name

System Date And Time

System Uptime

Time Traceable

Clock Frequency Status

Clock Timing Status

Frequency State Duration in Minutes

Time State Duration in Minutes

Currently Selected Timing reference Input

Currently Selected Frequency reference Input

Packet Service Eth1 mode: PTP client

Packet Service Eth2 mode: PTP Master

Eth1 active connector interface: RJ45

Eth2 active connector interface: SFP

Frequency Offset

Phase Offset Value (Valid in fast-lock and normal states)

Active Alarms #

System Frequency PQL

Command Syntax:

Example: show status

TP2700> show status

Response:

System name : Timeprovider

System Date and time : 2013-05-09,15:29:31

Time Traceable : YES

System uptime (sec) : 1976

Clock Frequency Status : NORMAL

Clock Time Status : NORMAL

Frequency State Duration (min) : 10

Time State Duration (min) : 10

Currently Selected Frequency reference : GNSS

162 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

Currently Selected Timing reference : GNSS

Packet Service Eth1 mode : CLIENT PORT

Packet Service Eth2 mode : MASTER PORT

Eth1 Active connector interface : R1-RJ45

Eth2 Active connector interface : R2-RJ45

Frequency Offset (MDEV ppb) : 0.15

Phase Offset (TDEV ns) : 63.61

Active Alarms : 2

System Frequency PQL : 1

Level : User, Config, and Admin

Table 3-6. Clock Status

TP 2300/2700

Clock Status

Warmup

Description

Possible Next

State

The unit is warming up. This is the first clock state following power-up or reboot.

Freerun

Conditions Required for Next Transition

State

Warm-up complete

Typical Warm-up time is:

Freerun

Quartz: 6 minutes

Rubidium: 9 minutes

Note: Warm-up times may vary based on environmental conditions and other factors.

The unit is operating without an input reference, but is ready to use one. This state will persist if no qualifiable input reference is provided.

While in this state, the stability of the clock output is tied to the internal reference oscillator.

Fast-track Input becomes qualified

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 163

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

Table 3-6. Clock Status (Continued)

TP 2300/2700

Clock Status

Fast-track

Description

The selected input has been qualified and the firmware clock servo begins to actively converge the output to the selected input. This is the transitional phase that leads to the Normal clock state.

Possible Next

State

Freerun

Normal

Conditions Required for Next Transition

State

The unit no longer has a qualified input.

Clock stabilized

Normal

Typical duration for Quartz and Rubidium: 20 minutes

The unit has a qualified input and is locked to the reference.

Recovery

Bridging

Bridging

Holdover

Recovery

The unit no longer has a qualified reference, but remains operating within performance associated with

Normal operation.

The unit no longer has a qualified reference.

Holdover

Normal

Recovery

The selected input has been qualified and the firmware clock servo begins to actively converge the output to the selected input.

Holdover

Normal

Clock not stabilized adequately

The unit no longer has a qualified input.

Bridging time exceeded

Input reference re-qualified in less than bridging time.

Input becomes qualified

See Table B-23 for

typical holdover times.

The unit no longer has a qualified input.

Clock stabilized

164 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Figure 3-1.

Clock States

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 165

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

show synce

Use this command to display SyncE status and configuration.

Command Syntax: show synce status {eth1 | eth2 | all} show synce config {eth1 | eth2 | all}

Example 1:

TP2700> show synce config eth1

Response 1:

SyncE Config:

----------------------------

|Port |State |QL State|

|------|----------|--------|

|eth1 |enable |enable |

----------------------------

Example 2:

TP2700> show synce config eth2

Response 2:

----------------------------

|Port |State |QL State|

|------|----------|--------|

|eth2 |enable |enable |

----------------------------

Example 3:

TP2700> show synce config all

Response 3:

----------------------------

|Port |State |QL State|

|------|----------|--------|

|eth1 |enable |enable |

|......|..........|........|

|eth2 |enable |enable |

----------------------------

166 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

Note: QL is always ENABLE on ETH1.

Example 4:

TP2700> show synce status eth1

Response 4:

--------------------------------------------------------

| Port | Direction | Ethernet Mode | RxSSM | TxSSM |

|.......|...........|................|........|........|

| Eth1 | input | asynchronous | 0x0f | 0x0f |

|......................................................|

Example 5:

TP2700> show synce status eth2

Response 5:

--------------------------------------------------------

| Port | Direction | Ethernet Mode | RxSSM | TxSSM |

|.......|...........|................|........|........|

| Eth2 | output | synchronous | 0x0f | 0x0f |

............................................ ...........

Example 6:

TP2700> show synce status all

Response 6:

--------------------------------------------------------

| Port | Direction | Ethernet Mode | RxSSM | TxSSM |

|.......|...........|................|........|........|

| Eth1 | input | asynchronous | 0x0f | 0x0f |

|.......|...........|................|........|........|

| Eth2 | output | synchronous | 0x0f | 0x0f |

............................................ ...........

set synce

Use these commands to:

 enable or disable the state for SyncE on the PTP-SyncE service port enable or disable the QL state for PTP-SyncE service port

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 167

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

Command Syntax:

To set the SyncE state for the specified PTP/SyncE port: set synce state {eth1 | eth2} {enable | disable}

To set the SyncE QL state: set synce ql-state eth2 {enable | disable}

Note: SyncE direction is not user-configurable for the initial release.

The ETH1 port is a SyncE Input, and ETH2 is a SyncE Output.

Example 1:

To enable SyncE for the ETH2 port:

TP2700> set synce state eth2 enable

Example 2:

To disable QL-state for ETH2 port:

TP2700> set synce ql-state eth2 disable

Remarks: This command only applies to PTP/SyncE ports.

Level : Config and Admin

168 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

test

Use this command to generate event/alarm test messages. Test messages can be generated for an individual event/alarm number or for all events/alarms.

Command Syntax: test alarm-event {all | [1 to 170]}

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 169

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

upgrade

Use this command to upgrade TimeProvider 2300/2700 firmware with the specified filename. The user must provide the IP address, username, and password (when prompted) of the FTP or SCP server where the firmware file is stored. The upgrade will take approximately 7 minutes to complete.

Command Syntax: upgrade <filepath> {ftp: | scp:} <ftp-ip-address> <username>

Note: The FTP firewall is set to “Block” by default. Use the following command to set the firewall to “Allow” for ftp communications: set firewall mgmt ftp allow

Note: The TimeProvider 2700 only supports active FTP; it does not support passive (PASV) mode.

Remarks: Firmware upgrades will not be implemented until the system is rebooted.

Example 1:

To upgrade the TimeProvider 2300/2700 using the upgrade file path of

“/symm/TimeProvider_EdgeMaster/current_upd”, FTP server IP address

192.168.5.56, username: “bob321”, Password: “bob123!”.

TP2700> upgrade /symm/TimeProvider_EdgeMaster/current_upd ftp:192.168.5.56 bob321 < enter >

Response 1:

Password: bob123! < enter >

Do you want to restart the module after the firmware is upgraded?

Please Confirm (yes|no): <enter>

Upgrade of TIMEPROVIDER is in progress

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Upgrade of TIMEPROVIDER is successfully completed

Example 2:

170 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

To upgrade the TimeProvider 2300/2700 using the upgrade file path of

“/symm/TP2700/current_upd”, SCP server IP address 192.168.5.57, and a user name of “bob321”.

TP2700> upgrade /symm/TimeProvider_EdgeMaster/current_upd scp:192.168.5.57 bob321

Response 2:

See Response 1.

Level : Admin

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 171

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

show user

This command displays the list of users assigned access privileges to the system.

Command Syntax:

Example: show user

TP2700> show user

Response:

-----------------------------------------

|Index|User Name |Access Level|

|-----|--------------------|------------|

|1 |admin |admin |

|.....|....................|............|

|2 |bobo |admin |

-----------------------------------------

Level : User, Config, and Admin

set user

Use this command to provision the local user password and access level, to delete the specified user, and to modify the password of a specified user.

Command Syntax:

To add a new user: set user add name <username> access-level {user | config | admin}

To modify the password of an existing user: set user modify <username> password

To delete a user: set user delete <username>

Example 1:

To add a new user “tester123” with an access level of “config”:

TP2700> set user add name tester123 access-level config

Response 1:

172 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

Prompt for password

Prompt for password confirmation

Example 2:

To modify the password for user “tester123”:

TP2700> set user modify tester123 password

Response 2:

Prompt for new password

Prompt for password confirmation

Example 3:

To delete user “tester123” 

TP2700> set user delete tester123

Level : Admin

Note: Take care to avoid losing admin passwords or deleting all admin users. Adding new users requires at least one admin user.

Contact Symmetricom support for the password recovery procedure if all admin-level user passwords are lost.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 173

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

show vlan

Use this command to display the VLAN mode and VLAN configuration for a specified service port, including VLAN ID, Index value, priority, state, and Host,

Netmask, and Gateway IP address.

Command Syntax:

To display the VLAN mode for all packet service ports: show vlan mode

To display the VLAN configuration for the specified port: show vlan config {eth1 | eth2}

Example 1:

To display the VLAN mode for ETH1 and ETH2:

Results 1:

TP2700> show vlan mode

VLAN Mode Configuration: eth1: enable eth2: disable

Example 2:

To display the VLAN configuration info for PTP client port ETH1:

Results 2:

TP2700> show vlan config eth1

Vlan configuration for eth1 port:

Idx VID P STATE Address Netmask Gateway/NextHop Destnetwork

1 11 0 en 10.11.11.101 255.255.255.0 0.0.0.0 n/a

2 12 0 en 10.12.11.101 255.255.255.0 0.0.0.0 n/a

Example 3:

To display the VLAN configuration info for PTP server port ETH2:

TP2700> show vlan config eth2

174 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

Results 3:

Vlan configuration for eth2 port:

Idx VID P STATE Address Netmask Gateway/NextHop Destnetwork

1 11 0 en 10.11.11.101 255.255.255.0 0.0.0.0 n/a

2 12 0 en 10.12.11.101 255.255.255.0 0.0.0.0 n/a

3 13 0 en 10.13.11.101 255.255.255.0 0.0.0.0 n/a

4 14 0 en 10.14.11.101 255.255.255.0 0.0.0.0 n/a

. . .

15 34 0 en 10.34.11.101 255.255.255.0 0.0.0.0 n/a

16 44 0 en 10.44.11.101 255.255.255.0 0.0.0.0 n/a

17 22 0 en 10.21.21.101 255.255.255.0 20.20.20.1 20.20.20.0/24

18 23 0 en 10.31.31.101 255.255.255.0 30.30.30.1 30.30.30.0/24

19 24 0 en 10.41.41.101 255.255.255.0 40.40.40.1 40.40.40.0/24

20 25 0 en 10.51.51.101 255.255.255.0 50.50.50.1 50.50.50.0/24

21 26 0 en 10.61.61.101 255.255.255.0 60.60.60.1 60.60.60.0/24

22 27 0 en 10.71.71.101 255.255.255.0 70.70.70.1 70.70.70.0/24

23 82 0 en 10.81.81.101 255.255.255.0 80.80.80.1 80.80.80.0/24

24 29 0 en 10.91.91.101 255.255.255.0 90.90.90.1 90.90.90.0/24

25 30 0 en 10.101.101.101 255.255.255.0 100.100.100.1 100.100.100.0/24

26 31 0 en 10.111.111.101 255.255.255.0 10.110.110.1 10.110.110.0/24

27 32 0 en 10.121.121.101 255.255.255.0 10.120.120.1 10.120.120.0/24

28 33 0 en 10.131.131.101 255.255.255.0 10.130.130.1 10.130.130.0/24

29 34 0 en 10.141.141.101 255.255.255.0 10.140.140.1 10.140.140.0/24

30 35 0 en 10.151.151.101 255.255.255.0 10.150.150.1 10.150.150.0/24

31 36 0 en 10.161.161.101 255.255.255.0 10.160.160.1 10.160.160.0/24

32 ..

33 ..

..

64 ..m

Note: The first 4 VLAN in the index are the default VLANs which can use the default gateway. The rest of the VLANs are non-default

VLANs, static routes in which the next hop and the destination network must be defined.

Level : Config and Admin

set vlan

This command is used to enable or disable the VLAN mode for an Ethernet port, and to provision all the VLAN and IP parameters under VLAN structure.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 175

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

In VLAN enable mode, all the IP configurations are provisioned by set vlan config command. If VLAN mode is disabled, the IP configurations are provisioned by set ip command.

The command is also used to add a new VLAN configuration to an Ethernet port and provision its Host, Mask, and Gateway IP addresses. This command also can be used to modify or delete an existing VLAN configuration. Each VLAN must be configured with its own IP address on a separate network/subnet.

Note: If the Ethernet interface is not to be part of a VLAN, use the command

set ip , on page 97 to provision the IP addresses instead.

The PTP server port, ETH2 (R2 or S2) can support up to 64 VLAN channels.

– The first 16 VLANs (Index = 1 to 16) on the PTP server port can be configured with the default gateway.

– The non-fixed VLANs (up to 48) can be configured with one static route.

When a non-fixed VLAN is removed, the route will be automatically deleted.

The PTP client port, ETH1 (r1 or s1) can support 2 VLAN channels.

When using VLANs, the network administrator should configure the Ethernet switches and/or router to handle the VLANs.

Command Syntax:

To provision the VLAN mode for the specified port or expansion shelf: set vlan mode {eth1 | eth2} {enable | disable}

Note: Wait 30 seconds after executing the command "set vlan mode ethx" before issuing the next command.

To provision PTP Client Port ETH1:

To add a fixed VLAN (default) with IPv4 address for the PTP client port, ETH1: set vlan config eth1 add index 1 vlan-id <vlan-id> priority

<priority> ipv4 address <ipv4-address> netmask <ipv4-mask> gateway <ipv4-gateway>

Note: If a gateway router is not required, then set the gateway value to the special value of 0.0.0.0

176 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

To modify the IP address, netmask, or gateway for an existing fixed (default)

VLAN configuration with IPv4 address for the PTP client port, ETH1: set vlan config eth1 modify index 1 vlan-id <vlan-id> ipv4 address <ipv4-address> netmask <ipv4-mask> gateway

<ipv4-gateway>

To delete a fixed VLAN configuration for the specified index for the PTP client port, ETH1: set vlan config eth1 delete index 1

To provision the state of the fixed VLAN for the specified index for the PTP client port, ETH1: set vlan config eth1 state index 1 {enable | disable}

To provision PTP Server Port ETH2:

To add a fixed VLAN (default) with IPv4 address for the specified port: set vlan config eth2 add index <1-16> vlan-id <vlan-id> priority <priority> ipv4 address <ipv4-address> netmask

<ipv4-mask> gateway <ipv4-gateway>

Note: If a gateway router is not required, then set the gateway value to the special value of 0.0.0.0

To add a non-fixed VLAN with IPv4 address: set vlan config eth2 add non-fixed vlan-id <vlan-id> priority <priority> ipv4 address <ipv4-address> netmask

<ipv4-mask> next-hop <ipv4-addr> dest-network

<ipv4-network-prefix/prefix-length>

To modify the IP address, netmask, or gateway for an existing fixed (default)

VLAN configuration with IPv4 address on the specified port: set vlan config eth2 modify index <1-16> vlan-id <vlan-id> ipv4 address <ipv4-address> netmask <ipv4-mask> gateway

<ipv4-gateway>

To modify the IP address, netmask, or gateway for an existing non-fixed VLAN configuration on the specified port: set vlan config eth2 modify non-fixed vlan-id <vlan-id> ipv4 address <ipv4-address> netmask <ipv4-mask> next-hop

<ipv4-addr> dest-network <ipv4-network-prefix/prefix-length>

To delete a fixed VLAN configuration for the specified index on the specified port: set vlan config eth2 delete index <1-16>

To delete a non-fixed VLAN configuration for the specified VLAN ID on the specified port:

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 177

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set set vlan config eth2 delete non-fixed vlan-id <vlan-id>

To provision the state of the fixed VLAN for the specified index on the specified port: set vlan config eth2 state index <1-16> {enable | disable}

To provision the state of the non-fixed VLAN for the specified VLAN ID on the specified port: set vlan config eth2 state non-fixed vlan-id <vlan-id>

{enable | disable}

Use set ip state <port> restart after modifying VLAN configuration using the command “.

set vlan-config modify...

”.

Note: E ach VLAN must be configured on a separate network/subnet.

Range: Index = 1  16 (for default) vlan-id = 2  4094 priority = 0  7

Default: No VLAN configured

Example 1  PTP Server Port:

To Enable the VLAN mode on PTP server port ETH2:

TP2700> set vlan mode eth1 enable

Note: Wait 30 seconds after executing the command "set vlan mode eth x " before issuing the next command.

Note: To Enable the VLAN mode for a port, at least one VLAN

(indexed or non-fixed) must be already be configured and Enabled on the VLAN for that port. See the set vlan config eth x state command .

Example 2  PTP Server Port:

To add a fixed VLAN on PTP server port ETH2 with VLAN ID = 25, Index=3,

Priority=0, where the IP address= 192.168.1.5 Netmask=255.255.255.0, and

Gateway=192.168.1.1:

TP2700> set vlan-config eth2 add index 3 vlan-id 25 priority

0 ipv4 address 192.168.1.5 netmask 255.255.255.0 gateway

192.168.1.1

178 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

Example 2a  PTP Server Port:

To add a non-fixed VLAN on PTP server port ETH2 with VLAN ID = 99, Priority=5, where the IP address= 192.168.3.20, Netmask=255.255.255.0, Next

Hop=192.168.3.1 and Destination Network/Net-Prefix=192.168.3.0/24 

TP2700> set vlan config eth2 add non-fixed vlan-id 99 priority 5 ipv4 address 192.168.3.20 netmask 255.255.255.0 next-hop 192.168.3.1 dest-network 192.168.3.0/24

Example 3  PTP Server Port:

To modify Index 3 on an existing fixed VLAN on PTP server port ETH2 with the new

IP address of 192.168.1.7, Netmask=255.255.255.0, and Gateway=192.168.1.1:

TP2700> set vlan config eth2 modify index 3 ipv4 address

192.168.1.7 netmask 255.255.255.0 gateway 192.168.1.1

Example 3a  PTP Server Port:

To modify the existing non-fixed VLAN with VLAN ID of 99 on PTP server port ETH2 with the new IP address of 192.168.3.35, Netmask=255.255.255.0, Next

Hop=192.168.3.1 and Destination Network/Net-Prefix=192.168.3.0/24:

TP2700> set vlan config eth2 modify non-fixed vlan-id 99 ipv4 address 192.168.3.35 netmask 255.255.255.0 next-hop

192.168.3.1 dest-network 192.168.3.0/24

Example 4



PTP Server Port:

To delete the fixed VLAN configuration for Index 4 on ETH2 port:

TP2700> set vlan config eth2 delete index 4

Example 4a  PTP Server Port:

To delete the non-fixed VLAN configuration for VLAN ID=75 on ETH1 port:

TP2700> set vlan config eth2 delete non-fixed vlan-id 75

Example 5



PTP Server Port:

To Enable the fixed VLAN configuration for Index 3 on ETH1:

TP2700> set vlan config eth2 state index 3 enable

Example 5a  PTP Server Port:

To Enable the non-fixed VLAN configuration for VLAN ID=75 on PTP server port

ETH2:

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 179

Chapter 3

TimeProvider 2300/2700 CLI Command Set

TP2700> set vlan-config eth2 state non-fixed vlan-id 75 enable

Example 6  PTP Client Port:

To add a fixed VLAN on PTP client port ETH1 with VLAN ID = 25, Index=1,

Priority=0, where the IP address= 192.168.1.5 Netmask=255.255.255.0, and

Gateway=192.168.1.1:

TP2700> set vlan-config eth1 add index 1 vlan-id 25 priority

0 ipv4 address 192.168.1.5 netmask 255.255.255.0 gateway

192.168.1.1

Example 7  PTP Client Port:

To modify Index 2 on an existing fixed VLAN on PTP client port ETH1 with the new

IP address of 192.168.1.7, Netmask=255.255.255.0, and Gateway=192.168.1.1:

TP2700> set vlan-config eth1 modify index 2 ipv4 address

192.168.1.7 netmask 255.255.255.0 gateway 192.168.1.1

Example 8  PTP Client Port:

To delete the fixed VLAN configuration for Index 2 on PTP client port ETH1:

TP2700> set vlan-config eth1 delete index 2

Example 9  PTP Client Port:

To enable the fixed VLAN configuration for Index 1 on PTP client port ETH1:

TP2700> set vlan-config eth1 state index 1 enable

Level : Admin

180 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 4 Provisioning

This chapter describes the procedures for provisioning the TimeProvider

2300/2700. Use the procedures in this chapter after you have installed and powered

up the TimeProvider 2300/2700 (see Chapter 2, Installing ).

In This Chapter

Establishing a Connection to the TimeProvider 2300/2700

Managing the User Access List

Provisioning MGMT Ethernet Port

Provisioning the Service Ethernet Ports

Ethernet Active Connector

Ethernet Auto-Negotiation

Provisioning VLAN

Provisioning the Input Reference

Reference Switching Modes

Reference Selection Criteria

Provisioning Input Parameters

Setting PTP Input Client Parameters

Setting GNSS Parameters

Setting E1/T1 Input Reference Parameters

Provisioning SyncE Input

Provisioning the PTP Output

Provisioning the Non-PTP Outputs

Provisioning the T1/E1 Output

Provisioning TOD+1PPS Output

Provisioning the 10MHz & 1PPS Output

Provisioning SyncE Output

Provisioning Output Generation Behavior

Quality Levels for Output Signals

Setting the System Date and Time

Provisioning Alarms

Saving and Restoring Provisioning Data

Provisioning for SNMP

Testing TP 2300/2700 Provisioning

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 181

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Establishing a Connection to the TimeProvider 2300/2700

Establishing a Connection to the TimeProvider 2300/2700

To set up and manage the TimeProvider 2300/2700 with a terminal or a computer with terminal emulation, you must establish either a serial connection or an Ethernet connection. To connect through the serial port, see

Communicating Through the

Serial Port , on page 182. If the TimeProvider 2300/2700 is connected to an Ethernet

LAN, use the procedure described in

Communicating Through the Ethernet Port , on page 182.

Communicating Through the Serial Port

An EIA-232 serial port is available on the front panel for a direct serial connection to a terminal or a computer with terminal emulation. Use the following procedure to connect the TimeProvider 2300/2700 to a terminal or a computer with terminal emulation via a straight through serial cable:

Note:

For information on restricting user access, see Managing the

User Access List , on page 184.

1. Connect one end of a straight through serial cable to the serial port on the computer or terminal and the other end to the EIA-232 connector on the TP

2300/2700.

2. Configure the emulation software for 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity, 57600 baud rate, and no flow control.

3. Start the terminal emulation software and press Enter . The system prompt should appear. If it does not, recheck each step in this procedure.

4. Type your user name and press Enter . The system prompts for a password.

5. Type your password and press Enter . The system prompt appears.

Note: The default user name is “admin”. The default password is: symmadmin**.

Communicating Through the Ethernet Port

To communicate with the TimeProvider 2300/2700 using an Ethernet LAN connection, you must first configure the Ethernet port through the EIA-232 serial port.

182 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Establishing a Connection to the TimeProvider 2300/2700

Configuring the Ethernet Port

Use the following procedures to configure the TimeProvider 2300/2700 Ethernet parameters (IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address).

Note: The TimeProvider 2300/2700 default IP address is

192.168.0.100, the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0, and the gateway address is 0.0.0.0 (no gateway). If these defaults are acceptable, the following procedure using the serial port is not required.

1. Establish a direct serial connection to the TimeProvider 2300/2700 as described in

Communicating Through the Serial Port , on page 182.

2. Provision the IP, Gateway, and Subnet Mask addresses for the TimeProvider

2300/2700. The IT department or site administrator for your location can recommend specific addresses for these parameters. Use the dotted decimal format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx to enter the address parameters with the following commands:

Note: The telnet firewall is set to Block by default. Use the following command to set the firewall to Allow for telnet communications: set firewall mgmt telnet allow

Example 1  Using Static IP:

TP 2700> set ip address-mode mgmt ipv4 static

TP 2700> set ip ip-address mgmt ipv4 address 192.168.0.10 netmask

255.255.255.0 gateway 192.168.0.254

TP 2700> set ip state mgmt ipv4 restart

Example 2  Using DHCP:

TP 2700> set ip address-mode mgmt ipv4 dhcp

TP 2700> set ip state mgmt ipv4 restart

Connecting Through an Ethernet LAN

1. Ensure that the TimeProvider 2300/2700 is connected to a LAN (see

Communications Connections , on page 50 for details).

2. Telnet from your computer to the IP address assigned to the TimeProvider

2300/2700 (see Configuring the Ethernet Port , on page 183).

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 183

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Managing the User Access List

Note: SSH can be used to connect to the TP 2300/2700. The SSH firewall is set to Allow by default.

3. Type your user name and press Enter . If you are not assigned as a user in the system, contact the system administrator or see

Adding a User , on page 186.

4. Type your assigned password and press Enter . The system prompt appears.

Managing the User Access List

When you are logged in at the Admin level you can add, edit, or delete user names in the user access list. The user list can contain up to 20 names and users can be set to one of three different security levels described in

Table 4-1 . Users are

required to enter a user name and password to log in to the system. Users can access or modify only the parameter settings allowed by their assigned security level.

Caution: Be sure to not lose or forget the password. Contact

Symmetricom support for the password recovery procedure if all admin-level user passwords are lost.

Table 4-1. User Level and Access

Security Level

User

Config

Admin

Description

Users can edit their password and show information, or access any command at the User security level.

Users are allowed to change configuration and issue User-level commands.

Users are allowed to modify the security database or download new firmware and issue commands at any level.

Use the procedures in this section to manage user access to the TimeProvider

2300/2700.

184 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Managing the User Access List

Logging In

Use the following procedure to log in to the system at the admin level.

1. Ensure that the TimeProvider 2300/2700 is connected to a LAN, or directly connected to a computer through the EIA-232 serial port. See

Communications

Connections , on page 50.

2. If the TimeProvider 2300/2700 is connected to a LAN, Telnet or SSH from your computer to the assigned IP address.

Note: The telnet firewall is set to Block by default. Use the following command to set the TP 2300/2700 firewall to Allow for telnet communications: set firewall mgmt telnet allow

If the TimeProvider 2300/2700 is connected to a computer directly through the serial port, start a Terminal session and press Enter .

3. Type your user name and press Enter . The system prompts for a password.

4. Type your password and press Enter . The system prompt appears.

Note: The default user name is “admin” and the default password is: symmadmin**.

To avoid unauthorized access, you should change the default password.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 185

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Managing the User Access List

Adding a User

Use the following procedure to add a user to the system access list. For this example, the user name is “tester123” with an access level of “config”,

Note:

User passwords can consist of alphanumeric characters, “~”, “*”, “(“,

“)”, “!”, “?”, “-”, “_”, and “.” with a minimum of 8 characters and a maximum of 32 characters.

Usernames can consist of numbers, upper and lower case letters, dash "-", and underscore "_", with a maximum of 20 characters.

Usernames cannot use a leading dash “-” or underscore "_" as the first character.

For a description of user access levels, see

Managing the User

Access List , on page 184.

1. Login at the Admin level (see Logging In , on page 185).

2. Type show user and press Enter to view the current list of users.

3. Type set user add name set user add name tester123 access-level config and press Enter.

The system will respond with:

For user password, only chars {a-z, A-Z, 0-9, ! ( ) - _ . ? ~ *} are accepted

Password:

4. Type a password and press Enter . The password you enter will be the log-in password for the user. The system responds with:

Confirm Password:

5. Retype the password and press Enter . The system responds with:

CLI user has been added: tester123

6. Type show user and press Enter to verify that the account exists.

7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 of this procedure to add other users.

186 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Managing the User Access List

Deleting A User

Use the following procedure to delete user ABCD1234 from the system access list.

Do not delete the default username and password.

1. Login at the Admin level (see Logging In , on page 185).

2. Type show user and press Enter to view the current list of users.

3. Type set user delete ABCD1234 and press Enter .

Displaying Current Users and User Access Levels

Use the following procedure to show a list of all assigned users and their access levels.

1. Login at the Admin level (see Logging In , on page 185).

2. Type show user and press Enter . The system displays the current list of users.

Changing a User’s Password

Use the following procedure to change a user’s password.

Note:

User passwords can consist of alphanumeric characters, “~”, “*”, “(“,

“)”, “!”, “?”, “-”, “_”, and “.” with a minimum of 8 characters and a maximum of 32 characters.

Usernames can consist of numbers, upper and lower case letters, dash "-", and underscore "_", with a maximum of 20 characters.

Usernames cannot use a leading dash “-” or underscore "_" as the first character.

For a description of user access levels, see

Managing the User

Access List , on page 184.

1. Login at the Admin level (see Logging In , on page 185).

2. Type show user and press Enter to view the current list of users.

3. Type set user modify <user name> password and press Enter .

Follow the prompts. Change the password when prompted.

4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to modify other user passwords.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 187

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Managing the User Access List

Changing a User’s Access Level

To change a user’s access level you must delete and then re-create the user. This also provides an opportunity to change the password, if desired. Use the following procedure to change the access level to “admin” for user “tester123”:

Note:

User passwords can consist of alphanumeric characters, “~”, “*”, “(“,

“)”, “!”, “?”, “-”, “_”, and “.” with a minimum of 8 characters and a maximum of 32 characters.

Usernames can consist of numbers, upper and lower case letters, dash "-", and underscore "_", with a maximum of 20 characters.

Usernames cannot use a leading dash “-” or underscore "_" as the first character.

For a description of user access levels, see

Managing the User

Access List , on page 184.

1. Login at the Admin level (see Logging In , on page 185).

2. Type show user and press Enter to view the current list of users.

3. Type set user delete tester123 and press Enter .

4. Type set user add name set user add name tester123 access-level admin and press Enter.

The system will respond with:

For user password, only chars {a-z, A-Z, 0-9, ! ( ) - _ . ? ~ *} are accepted

Password:

5. Type a password and press Enter . The password you enter will be the log-in password for the user. The system responds with:

Confirm Password:

6. Retype the password and press Enter . The system responds with:

CLI user has been added: tester123

7. Type show user and press Enter to verify that the account exists.

8. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 to modify other user access levels.

188 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning the Ethernet Ports

Provisioning the Ethernet Ports

Provisioning MGMT Ethernet Port

The TimeProvider 2300/2700 supports static as well as dynamically allocated IP addresses on the MGMT (Management) port. The dynamically allocated address requires a connection to a DHCP server. When provisioning the unit for static IP address, you can set the Host address, Mask address, and Gateway address, or

you can set the addresses to the factory default. See Table B-29

in Appendix B,

Specifications and Factory Defaults

for addresses.

Figure 4-1.

Set IP Command Hierarchy

DHCP Mode

You can either enable or disable DHCP mode on the MGMT port. See Figure 4-1

.

Use the following procedure to configure the TimeProvider 2300/2700 to enable

DHCP on the MGMT port.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 189

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning the Ethernet Ports

Example

1. Login at the Admin or Config-user level (see Logging In , on page 185).

2. Type set ip address-mode mgmt ipv4 dhcp and press Enter .

Static IP Mode

Use the following procedure to configure the TimeProvider 2300/2700 IP parameters (Host Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address) in Static IP mode on the MGMT port. Use the dot-decimal notation format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx to enter the

address parameter. See Figure 4-1

.

Example

1. Login at the Admin or Config-user level (see Logging In , on page 185).

2. Type set ip address-mode mgmt ipv4 static and press Enter .

3. Type set ip ip-address mgmt ipv4 address 10.6.1.76 netmask

255.255.255.0 gateway 10.6.1.1

and press Enter .

4. Type set ip state mgmt ipv4 restart and press Enter .

DNS Server

You can provision the DNS servers and domain for the Ethernet MGMT port. See

Figure 4-1

.

Example

1. Login at the Admin or Config-user level (see Logging In , on page 185).

2. Type set ip mgmt dns nameserver1 168.192.0.200 nameserver2

168.192.0.210 domain exampledomain.com

Provisioning the Service Ethernet Ports

The service Ethernet ports, ETH1 and ETH2 can only be configured with static IP addresses. The IP addresses for the MGMT, ETH1 and ETH2 ports must be on different networks/subnets.

Ethernet Active Connector

The Ethernet ports on the TP 2300/2700 can be mapped for use with either the

RJ45 connectors, R1 and R2 , or the SFP connectors, S1 and S2 . The SFP connectors require 1000M optical transceivers.

1. Login at the admin or Config-user level.

2. Type set ethernet active-connector eth1 s1-sfp and press Enter .

190 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning the Ethernet Ports

3. Type set ethernet active-connector eth2 s2-sfp and p ress Enter .

Figure 4-2.

Set Ethernet Command Hierarchy

Ethernet Auto-Negotiation

The ETH1 and ETH2 Ethernet ports can be configured to allow automatic negotiation of their connection speeds. When Ethernet auto-negotiation is enabled, the TP 2300/2700 will advertise connection speeds of 100/1000M for the RJ45 connectors, R1 and R2 , and 1000M for the SFP connectors, S1 and S2. The user can also specify a connection speed for a port, 100M, 1000M, or All, to configure the speed used by auto-negotiation. The default for auto-negotiation state is

“enable”. The default value for auto-negotiation speed is “All”.

Note: The SFP ports, S1 and S2 , only support optical SFPs, which are 1000M.

Use the following procedure to configure both Ethernet ports, ETH1 and ETH2, to allow Ethernet auto-negotiation. In this example, ETH1 port allows all connection speeds, and ETH2 port only allows a connection speed of 1000M.

1. Login at the admin or Config-user level.

2. Type set ethernet auto-neg state eth1 enable and press Enter .

3. Type set ethernet auto-neg speed eth1 all and p ress Enter .

4. Type set set ethernet auto-neg state eth2 enable and p ress Enter .

5. Type set ethernet auto-neg speed eth2 1000m and p ress Enter .

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 191

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning VLAN

Provisioning VLAN

The command for enabling VLAN mode for the Ethernet ports is shown in Figure

4-3 .

Note: VLAN mode will not enable unless there is at lease one VLAN configured and enabled within that Ethernet port.

Figure 4-3.

Set Vlan-Mode Command Hierarchy

VLAN on the ETH2 Server Port

The TP 2300/2700 supports up to 64 VLANs on the ETH2 server port. Each VLAN must be within it own unique network/subnet. There is no default VLAN configuration.

There are 16 VLANs that can accessed by index. These VLANs can be configured with a default gateway and are considered “fixed” VLANs. These VLANs can be deleted with the set vlan config eth2 delete command. The command hierarchy for configuring fixed VLANs is shown in

Figure 4-4 . Fixed VLANs include

a gateway address.

The remaining 48 VLANs are considered to be “non-fixed” VLANs, each of which can be configured with one static route. When a non-fixed VLAN is removed, the route will be automatically deleted. A non-fixed VLAN can also be deleted by the user with the set vlan config eth2 delete non-fixed vlan-id command.

The command hierarchy for configuring non-fixed VLANs is shown in

Figure 4-5 .

Non-fixed VLANs require specification of an IP address for the “next hop” and network prefix/prefix length for the destination network, instead of the gateway address.

Example 1

192 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning VLAN

Use the following procedure to configure a fixed VLAN on the ETH2 port with an index of 1, an ID of 2 and priority of 3, IPv4 address of 192.168.3.20, a netmask of

255.255.255.0, and a gateway of 192.168.3.1:

1. Login at the Admin or Config-user level.

2. Type set vlan config eth2 add index 1 vlan-id 2 priority 3 ipv4 address 192.168.3.20 netmask 255.255.255.0 gateway 192.168.3.1

and press Enter .

3. Type set vlan config eth2 state index 1 enable and press Enter .

4. Type set vlan mode eth2 enable and press Enter .

Note: Wait 30 seconds after executing the command set vlan-mode ethx before issuing the next command.

If a script is used to execute commands, wait for the "reply prompt" to come back before executing the next command.

5. Type show vlan config eth2 and press Enter to verify the configuration.

6. Type show ip status eth2 and press Enter to verify VLAN is up.

Example 2

Use the following procedure to configure a non-fixed VLAN on ETH2 with VLAN ID of 99, priority of 5, IPv4 address of 192.168.7.20, a netmask of 255.255.255.0, a next-hop of 192.168.3.1, and destination network of 192.168.4.0/24:

1. Login at the Admin or Config-user level.

2. Type set vlan config eth2 add non-fixed vlan-id 99 priority 5 ipv4 address 192.168.7.20 netmask 255.255.255.0 next-hop 192.168.3.1 dest-network 192.168.4.0/24 and press Enter .

3. Type set vlan config eth2 state non-fixed vlan-id 99 enable and press Enter .

4. Type set vlan mode eth2 enable and press Enter .

5. Type show vlan config eth2 and press Enter to verify the configuration.

6. Type show ip status eth2 and press Enter to verify VLAN is up.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 193

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning VLAN

Figure 4-4.

Fixed VLAN for Server Port— set vlan Commands

194 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Figure 4-5.

Non-Fixed VLAN for Server Port — set vlan Commands

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning VLAN

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 195

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning VLAN

VLANs on the ETH1 Client Port

The TP 2300/2700 supports one VLAN on the ETH1 client port. Each VLAN must be within it own unique network/subnet. There is no default VLAN configuration.

Figure 4-6

shows the command for configuring VLANs for the ETH1 client ports.

Example

Use the following procedure to configure a fixed VLAN on ETH1 with index of 1,

VLAN ID of 120, priority of 5, IP address of 192.168.3.100, netmask of

255.255.255.0 and gateway of 192.168.3.1:

1. Login at the Admin or Config-user level.

2. Type set vlan config eth1 add index 1 vlan-id 120 priority 5 ipv4 address 192.168.3.100 netmask 255.255.255.0 gateway 192.168.3.1 and press Enter .

3. Type set vlan config eth1 state index 1 vlan-id 120 enable and press

Enter .

4. Type set vlan mode eth1 enable and press Enter .

Note: Wait 30 seconds after executing the command set vlan mode eth x before issuing the next command.

If a script is used to execute commands, wait for the "reply prompt" to come back before executing the next command.

5. Type show vlan config eth1 and press Enter to verify the configuration.

6. Type show ip status eth1 and press Enter to verify VLAN is up. For example, you should see "eth1.120 Link" with the IP address attached.

196 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Figure 4-6.

Fixed VLAN for Client Port— Set Vlan Commands

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning VLAN

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 197

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning the Input Reference

Provisioning the Input Reference

When operating in normal (locked) mode, the TimeProvider 2300/2700 uses an external reference, such as GNSS, to acquire the frequency and/or TOD alignment.

Selection among multiple references inputs is based on the priority or PQL value of each qualified input. Reference switching behavior is determined by the switching mode. The reference mode, criteria, and switching behavior are all configured with the set ref command.

Figure 4-7 shows the

set ref command hierarchy.

Figure 4-7.

Set Ref Command Hierarchy

Reference Switching Modes

Auto Return Mode

The reference auto selection algorithm switches to the best reference immediately whenever it is better than the current reference according to the priority or PQL value among the qualified input ports.

198 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning the Input Reference

Auto Switch Mode

In Auto-switch mode, the currently selected reference will not switch to another valid input port until it is disqualified or the reference is manually disabled.

Reference Selection Criteria

Use either the Priority settings or the PQL settings (input PQL values or user-configured PQL) for each qualified input port to determine which input port to use as the reference.

Priority

The TP 2300/2700 uses the Priority settings for each qualified input port to determine which input port to use as the reference. Priority values can be from 1 to

10, where 1 is the highest priority level. If two input ports are set to the same priority

value and both are qualified, the predefined preference is used (see Table 4-3

).

Predefined preference has the same value as the default priority value, but cannot be changed. Reference selection among inputs with the same priority is non-revertive.

PQL

Different inputs have different ways of specifying their quality levels. All of them are mapped to a uniform internal quality ranking called priority quality level (PQL). After all input quality levels are converted to PQL, the PQL will be used as one of the reference selection criteria. PQL can be determined from information in the reference signal or can be configured by the user.

PQL for Inputs

The PQL can be used for reference selection. Signals that can be assigned PQL include all frequency-only signals (SyncE, E1 and T1) and all time signals (GNSS,

PTP, and TOD/PPS).

SyncE, E1 and T1 synchronization signal quality levels are characterized by SSM.

PTP synchronization signal quality level is characterized by clockClass. Input signals like GNSS do not carry a synchronization signal quality indicator; they are assigned an input PQL value appropriate to their known quality level. For example,

GNSS and cesium clocks are usually given a PQL value of 1 (the highest quality).

See

Table 4-2 .

Configured PQL

The TP 2300/2700 allows the user to apply a provisioned PQL value rather than the received PQL value for each input for reference selection .

By inputting a "configured

PQL value", the user implicitly chooses the quality of an input signal relative to others in the input conversion table.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 199

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning the Input Reference

PQL Usage & Mapping

Different reference inputs may use different scales for quality level. At the input, these different scales of quality level are mapped to a common scale called PQL

(priority quality level). The PQL scale is a number from 1 to 16, with 1 being the highest quality and 16 being the lowest. Once all input quality levels are mapped to

PQL, internal processing will only use PQL as the quality indicator. Once all input quality levels are mapped to PQL, internal processing (such as input selection) will only use PQL as the quality indicator.

Table 4-2 shows PQL values converted from

SSM or clockClass for frequency references.

Table 4-3

shows default PQL values.

Table 4-4 shows PQL values for clock states.

Figure 4-8.

PQL Input and Output Mapping

After an input is selected, the internal clock tracks this selected input and assumes the quality indicated by the PQL of the selected input. At the output, the clock signal is translated into various output formats, and the clock PQL is mapped to the scale that is appropriate for each of the output formats.

Table 4-6

shows how PQL is mapped for frequency outputs.

Table 4-2. PQL for Frequency References - Converted from SSM or clockClass

Input SSM

Option 1

E1 and SyncE

0x0

0x2

0x4

0x8

Input SSM

Option 2

T1

04FF

08FF

0CFF

78FF

Input SSM

Option 2

SyncE

0x1

0x0

0x7

0x4

Input PTP clockClass

G.8265.1

88

90

92

94

96

80

82

84

86

Input PTP clockClass

Tele2008/Default

6

7

13

14

To

Input

PQL

7

8

5

6

9

3

4

1

2

200 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning the Input Reference

Table 4-2. PQL for Frequency References - Converted from SSM or clockClass (Continued)

Input SSM

Option 1

E1 and SyncE

0xB

0xF invalid_SSM

Input SSM

Option 2

T1

7CFF

10FF

22FF

40FF

30FF invalid SSM

Input SSM

Option 2

SyncE

0xD

0xA

0xC

0xE

0xF invalid_SSM

Input PTP clockClass

G.8265.1

98

100

102

104

106

108

110

Input PTP clockClass

Tele2008/Default

52

58

248

To

Input

PQL

14

15

16

10

11

12

13

Table 4-3. Time and Frequency References - Default Priorities and PQL Values

Reference

Type

Time

Time

Frequency

Frequency

Frequency

Frequency

Input Port

GNSS Port

ETH1 Port - PTP

GNSS Port

ETH1 Port - PTP

ETH1 Port - SyncE

T1 / E1

Priority

(Default)

1

2

1

2

4

3

PQL

(Default)

1

3

1

3

3

3

Table 4-4. PQL Values for Clock States

CLOCK STATE

Warmup

Freerun

Fast

Normal

Rb

16

4

4

Freq PQL for

Selected Ref.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

OCXO

16

6

6

Freq PQL for

Selected Ref.

TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 201

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning the Input Reference

Table 4-4. PQL Values for Clock States

CLOCK STATE

Bridging

Holdover

Extended Holdover

Recovery

Rb

Freq PQL for

Selected Ref.

4

4

4

OCXO

Freq PQL for

Selected Ref.

6

6

6

Example

To provision the GNSS reference for a TimeProvider 2300/2700, reference selection criterion of “Priority”, with a priority value of 1 for Time, in GNSS position mode of

“auto”, perform the following steps:

1. Login at the Admin or Config-user level (see Logging In , on page 185).

2. Type set ref criteria priority and press Enter .

3. Type set ref switch-mode auto-return and press Enter .

4. Type set ref time priority gnss 1 and press Enter .

5. Type set ref frequency priority gnss 1 and press Enter .

6. Type set gnss track-mode gps and press Enter .

7. Type set gnss posmode auto and press Enter .

8. Type set gnss state enable and press Enter .

202 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning Input Parameters

Provisioning Input Parameters

Setting PTP Input Client Parameters

The TP 2300/2700 supports the Telecom-2008 unicast profile for the PTP client.

Use the “set ptp client” command to provision the PTP profile and master VLAN parameters for the client, as shown in

Figure 4-9

. Use the set ptp client config

command to provision the master table parameters for the client, as shown in Figure

4-10 . Use the

set ptp client config command to provision the PTP input client parameters for the ETH1 port, as shown in

Figure 4-10

and

Figure 4-10

. See Table

3-5 for descriptions of PTP client parameters for the Telecom-2008 profile.

Note: All master IP addresses configured in the master table must be reachable, either by being in the same subnet as the port (ETH1) IP address, or through a configured gateway. If either of the master addresses is not reachable through the network configuration, then neither of the masters will be utilized for PTP even if one master is correctly addressed.

Figure 4-9.

Set PTP Client Command Hierarchy (partial)

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 203

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning Input Parameters

Figure 4-10. Set PTP Client Config Command Hierarchy (partial)

204 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Figure 4-11. Set PTP Client Config Command Hierarchy (cont’d)

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning Input Parameters

Note: A license is required to enable PTP input client functionality on the TP 2700.

Example 1 - Telecom-2008 Profile

Use the following procedure to configure the ETH1 port as a PTP client input with the Telecom-2008 profile, no VLAN:

1. Type set ptp client active-profile eth1 telecom-2008 and press

Enter .

2. Type set ptp client config eth1 telecom-2008 ptp-state enable and press Enter .

3. Type set ptp client config eth1 telecom-2008 ttl 10 and press Enter .

4. Type set ptp client config eth1 telecom-2008 dscp 8 and press Enter .

5. Type set ptp client config eth1 telecom-2008 unicast-negotiation enable and press Enter .

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 205

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning Input Parameters

6. Type set ptp client config eth1 telecom-2008 lease-duration 300 and press Enter .

7. Type set ptp client config eth1 telecom-2008 announce-interval 1 and press Enter .

8. Type set ptp client config eth1 telecom-2008 sync-interval -6 and press Enter .

9. Type set ptp client config eth1 telecom-2008 delay-req-interval -6 and press Enter .

10.Type set ptp client config eth1 telecom-2008 domain 5 and press

Enter .

11.Type set ptp client config eth1 telecom-2008 master-table add index 1 address 192.168.5.100 and press Enter .

12.Type set ptp client config eth1 transport ethernet and press Enter .

13.Type set ptp client config eth1 service-tier traffic_mask and press

Enter .

Setting GNSS Parameters

When the GNSS reference is enabled, you can set the satellite position parameters either automatically or manually. The GNSS reference input is enabled by default.

In manual mode, you must specify the latitude, longitude, and height. Manual mode should not be used unless antenna location has been accurately surveyed. See the

set gnss

command description for details about setting GNSS position parameters manually.

You can specify the elevation mask which filters the satellites used by the system.

You can also specify the cable delay.

Note: It is important the cable delay be configured with the proper value. This can be determined from the cable length.

206 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Figure 4-12. Set GNSS Command Hierarchy

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning Input Parameters

To provision the TimeProvider 2300/2700 for GNSS, use the set ref time gnss command to set the priority and config-pql values for GNSS. Use the set gnss command to provision the GNSS port state and GNSS parameters.

GNSS Mode

The Priority setting for GNSS is for the GNSS port itself. However, the GNSS port can receive GPS and GLONASS satellite RF inputs. The GNSS tracking mode parameter is used to specify the tracking priority for the GNSS port.

GPS:

GLONASS:

Only checks for qualified GPS on this port

Only checks for qualified GLONASS on this port

GLONASS-GPS:Checks for qualified GLONASS and GPS concurrently.

A license is required for the GLONASS-GPS mode.

Example

To provision the TimeProvider 2300/2700 for a GNSS reference in auto mode, with a track-mode of GPS with a cable delay of 315 ns, perform the following steps:

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 207

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning Input Parameters

1. Login at the Admin or Config-user level (see Logging In , on page 185).

2. Type set gnss posmode auto and press Enter .

3. Type set gnss track-mode gps and press Enter .

4. Type set gnss cable-delay 315 and press Enter .

5. Type set gnss state enable and press Enter .

6. Type show gnss status and press Enter to verify that GNSS is enabled.

208 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning Input Parameters

Setting E1/T1 Input Reference Parameters

The T1/E1 port can be configured as an E1 or T1 input frequency reference. The set ref command is used to provision the T1/E1 port as a reference, as shown in

Figure 4-7

. The set port-control command is used to provision the T1/E1 port as an input and to select the signal type as T1 or E1, as shown in

Figure 4-13

.The set input command is used to configure the frametype and associated

parameters for the T1/E1 port. See Figure 4-14

for the set input command hierarchy.

The priority value or user-configured PQL value for the T1/E1 port is provisioned with the set ref

command. See Reference Selection Criteria , on page 199 for

additional information.

Figure 4-13. Set Port-Control Command Hierarchy

Note: A license is required to enable T1/E1 functionality.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 209

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning Input Parameters

Figure 4-14. Set Input Command Hierarchy

Frame Type

The T1 and E1 inputs each have two common framing standards available, as well as the unframed frequency signal.

SSM Bit

The SSM bit indicates which bit of the framing signal carries the SSM.

CRC State

CRC is a cyclic redundancy checking protocol which is applicable for E1 signals.

CRC must be enabled for the T1/E1 port in order to use the input SSM information for PQL conversion with the CAS or CCS framing types for that port.

Provisioning T1 Input

Use the following procedures to provision the T1/E1 port as a T1 input:

Example:

To provision TI/E1 port as a T1 input port with frametype freq1544khz and to enable the port:

1. Login at the Admin or Config-user level.

2. Type set port-control t1e1 io input and press Enter .

3. Type set port-control t1e1 signal-type t1 and press Enter .

210 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning Input Parameters

4. Type set input t1 frametype t1e1 freq1544khz and press Enter .

5. Type set port-control t1e1 state enable and press Enter .

Provisioning E1 Input

Use the following procedure to provision the T1/E1 port as a E1 input:

Example:

To provision TI/E1 port for an E1 output with a frametype of CCS, CRC enabled,

SSM bit of 7, and to enable the port:

1. Login at the Admin or Config-user level.

2. Type set port-control t1e1 io input and press Enter .

3. Type set port-control t1e1 signal-type e1 and press Enter .

4. Type set input e1 frametype t1e1 ccs and press Enter .

5. Type set input e1 crc t1e1 enable and press Enter .

6. Type set input e1 ssmbit t1e1 7 and press Enter .

7. Type set port-control t1e1 state enable and press Enter .

Note: Disabling the input port will clear all alarms and events related to this port.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 211

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning Input Parameters

Provisioning SyncE Input

Synchronous Ethernet (SyncE) provides a method of distributing timing using the physical layer of Ethernet devices. All intermediate nodes must have hardware and software support for syncE. SyncE is used to distribute frequency through the network. Synchronization Status Messaging (SSM) is passed between nodes in

ESMC messages. This allows nodes to determine the quality level of the upstream node, to prevent timing loops, and also to reconfigure the timing path. The TP

2300/2700 receives the SSM information from a SyncE input and converts it to a

PQL value that can be used for reference selection. See Reference Selection

Criteria , on page 199 for details.

Other than the ESMC state (see

Figure 4-15

), the only parameters that can be configured for a SyncE input reference on the ETH1 port are the port state, port priority value, and the user-configurable PQL value. These parameters are all configured with the set ref command, as shown in

Figure 4-7

.

Figure 4-15. Set SyncE Command Hierarchy

Example:

To enable the ETH1 port for SyncE, use the RJ45 connector, R1 , for the connection, and enable to ESMC on the ETH1 port:

1. Login at the Admin or Config-user level.

2. Type set ethernet active-connector eth1 r1-rj45 and press Enter .

3. Type set synce state eth1 enable and press Enter.

4. Type set synce ql-state eth1 enable and press Enter.

212 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning the PTP Output

Provisioning the PTP Output

The TP 2300/2700 ETH2 PTP output port can be configured for different profiles, along with parameters for each profile.

PTP Profiles

Table 4-5 shows the profiles with which the TP 2300/2700 can be configured. The

ETH2 PTP output port can run only one of these profiles at one time.

Table 4-5. PTP Profiles for the TP 2300/2700

PTP Profile

Default

Mode

Multicast

Telecom-2008

ITU G.8265-1

Unicast

Unicast

Description

Default profile in IEEE1588-2008 Annex J,

multicast over UDP/IP. See Table 3-3

.

Generic unicast profile for telecom before ITU-T

G.8265-1. See Table 3-4 .

Proprietary implementation, but commonly used.

Telecom profile for frequency sync. See Table 3-4

.

See ITU-T G.8265.1 for details.

PTP Server Parameters

By default, the ETH2 port of the TP 2300/2700 is provisioned as a PTP master enabled for PTP Telecom-2008 unicast negotiation. The set ptp master command is used to provision PTP parameters for the Default (multicast),

Telecom-2008 (unicast), and ITU-G.8265.1 (unicast) profiles.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 213

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning the PTP Output

Figure 4-16. Set PTP Master Command Hierarchy  Shared Parameters

Default Profile

The TP 2300/2700 grandmaster with the Default (multicast) profile operates per the multicast communication model, which specifies that each PTP message sent from the grandmaster is capable of being received and processed by all PTP ports on the same PTP communication path. See

Figure 4-16

for the hierarchy of the set ptp commands that are shared by all profiles. See

Table B-39 for defaults and ranges.

See

Figure 4-17

for the hierarchy of multicast profile set ptp commands. See

Table 3-3

for descriptions of the parameters for the Default profile. and Table B-41

for defaults settings and ranges.

214 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning the PTP Output

In multicast mode, there are no client leases or client limits. All delay requests will be responded to. There is no limit applied to the number of delay responses supported, other than the maximum capacity of the Ethernet link and the TP

2300/2700.

In multicast mode, the TP 2300/2700 creates a client list by examining the received

PTP delay request messages. For a client to be reliably added to the client list and not removed, the TP 2300/2700 needs to receive several hundred delay request messages during the client timeout period. If delay requests are sent at a slow rate, then the client-timeout value must be increased. Since one-way PTP operation does not use delay request and delay response messages, the client list will not be populated in this mode.

Note: The TP 2300/2700 uses the clock ID as a unique identifier for

PTP clients and can only allow for one instance of the clock id to be serviced. If a PTP client with a single clock ID requests service using two different IP addresses or VLANs, the TP 2300/2700 will use the

IP address/VLAN of the latest request.

Figure 4-17. Set PTP Master Command Hierarchy - Default Profile

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 215

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning the PTP Output

ITU-G.8265-1 and Telecom-2008 Profiles

The TP 2300/2700 grandmaster with the Telecom-2008 or ITU-G8265-1 (unicast) profile operates per the unicast communication model, which specifies that each

PTP message sent from the grandmaster is capable of being received and processed by a single PTP port on the PTP communication path. See

Figure 4-18

for the hierarchy of set ptp commands unique to the unicast profiles. See

Table

3-4 for descriptions of the parameters for the Telecom-2008 and ITU-G8265-1

(unicast) profiles. and Table B-40 for default values and ranges.

Figure 4-18. Set PTP Master Command Hierarchy - Unicast Profiles

216 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Figure 4-19. Two-Step Clock

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning the PTP Output

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 217

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning the PTP Output

Figure 4-20. One-Step Clock

Example 1 - Telecom-2008 Profile

Use the following procedure to configure the ETH2 port as a PTP master with the

Telecom-2008 profile:

1. Type set ptp master active-profile eth2 telecom-2008 and press

Enter .

2. Type set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 ptp-state enable and press Enter .

3. Type set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 ttl 100 and press Enter .

4. Type set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 dscp 5 and press Enter .

5. Type set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 two-step disable and press Enter .

6. Type set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 timescale auto and press Enter .

218 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning the PTP Output

7. Type set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 priority-1 128 and press Enter .

8. Type set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 priority-2 128 and press Enter .

9. Type set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 domain 8 and press

Enter .

10.Type set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 unicast-negotiation

Enable and press Enter .

11.Type set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 lease-limit 300 and press Enter .

12.Type set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 announce-limit -4 and press Enter .

13.Type set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 sync-limit -7 and press Enter .

14.Type set ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 delay-limit -7 and press Enter .

Example 2 - Default (Multicast) Profile

Use the following procedure to configure the ETH2 port as a PTP master with the

Default (multicast) profile:

1. Type set ptp master active-profile eth2 default and press Enter .

2. Type set ptp master config eth2 default ptp-state enable and press

Enter .

3. Type set ptp master config eth2 default ttl 20 and press Enter .

4. Type set ptp master config eth2 default dscp 25 and press Enter .

5. Type set ptp master config eth2 default dither enable and press

Enter .

6. Type set ptp master config eth2 default two-step enable and press

Enter .

7. Type set ptp master config eth2 default priority-1 200 and press

Enter .

8. Type set ptp master config eth2 default priority-2 200 and press

Enter .

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 219

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning the Non-PTP Outputs

9. Type set ptp master config eth2 default domain 10 and press Enter .

10.Type set ptp master config eth2 default timescale auto and press

Enter .

11.Type set ptp master config eth2 default vlanid 0 and press Enter .

12.Type set ptp master config eth2 default announce-interval 2 and press Enter .

13.Type set ptp master config eth2 default sync-interval -6 and press

Enter .

14.Type set ptp master config eth2 default announce-receipt-timeout 4 and press Enter .

15.Type set ptp master config eth2 default client-timeout 500 and press Enter .

Provisioning the Non-PTP Outputs

Quality Levels for Output Signals

Output signal quality level is determined by the quality level of the internal clock.

When the internal clock is tracking a reference, the quality level (PQL value) of the internal clock is the PQL of the selected reference. When the internal clock is not tracking a reference, the quality level of the internal clock is determined by its clock

state and its oscillator quality. Table 4-3 and Table 4-4 show the internal clock quality

level for different oscillator types and clock states.

For more information see

PQL Usage & Mapping , on page 200.

At the outputs, the frequency PQL is converted to the appropriate quality levels for

different output signal types. See Table 4-6

below.

Table 4-6. PQL for Frequency Outputs - Converted to SSM or clockClass

From

Output

PQL

1

2

3

Output SSM

Option 1

E1 and SyncE

0x2

0x2

0x2

Output SSM

Option 2

T1

04FF

08FF

04FF

Output SSM

Option 2

SyncE

0x1

0x0

0x1

Output PTP clockClass

G.8265.1

80

82

84

220 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning the Non-PTP Outputs

Table 4-6. PQL for Frequency Outputs - Converted to SSM or clockClass (Continued)

From

Output

PQL

10

11

8

9

6

7

4

5

12

13

14

15

16

Output SSM

Option 1

E1 and SyncE

0x8

0x8

0x8

0x8

0x4

0x4

0x4

0x8

0xB

0xB

0xF

0xF

0xF

Output SSM

Option 2

T1

0CFF

0CFF

78FF

7CFF

7CFF

7CFF

7CFF

7CFF

10FF

10FF

30FF

30FF

30FF

Output SSM

Option 2

SyncE

0xD

0xD

0xD

0xD

0x7

0x7

0x4

0xD

0xA

0xA

0xF

0xF

0xF

Output PTP clockClass

G.8265.1

94

96

98

100

86

88

90

92

102

104

106

108

110

Provisioning the T1/E1 Output

The set output command is used to provision the output characteristics for the

T1/E1 port. See

Figure 4-21

. The set port-control command is used to provision the T1/E1 port as an output and to provision the signal type as T1 or E1, as shown in

Figure 4-13 .

Note: A license is required to enable T1/E1 functionality.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 221

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning the Non-PTP Outputs

Figure 4-21. Set Output Command Hierarchy

The SSM function is supported for the frame types CCS, CAS, and ESF. However, the SSM-bit parameter only applies to the E1 frame types, CCS and CAS. If the output frame type supports SSM and SSM is enabled for the output port, then the output signal will contain the system SSM value.

Provisioning T1 Output

Use the following procedure to provision the T1/E1 port as a T1 output:

Example:

To provision TI/E1 port as a T1 output port with a frametype of D4 and to enable the port:

1. Login at the Admin or Config-user level.

2. Type set port-control t1e1 io output and press Enter .

3. Type set port-control t1e1 signal-type t1 and press Enter .

4. Type set output t1 frametype t1e1 d4 and press Enter .

5. Type set port-control t1e1 state enable and press Enter .

Provisioning E1 Output

Use the following procedures to provision the T1/E1 port as a E1 output:

222 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning the Non-PTP Outputs

Example:

To provision TI/E1 port for an E1 output with a frametype of CAS, CRC enabled,

SSM-bit of 5, zero-suppression on, and to enable the port:

1. Login at the Admin or Config-user level.

2. Type set port-control t1e1 io output and press Enter .

3. Type set port-control t1e1 signal-type e1 and press Enter .

4. Type set output e1 frametype t1e1 cas and press Enter .

5. Type set output e1 crc t1e1 enable and press Enter .

6. Type set output e1 ssmbit t1e1 5 and press Enter .

7. Type set output e1 zero-suppression t1e1 on and press Enter .

8. Type set port-control t1e1 state enable and press Enter .

Provisioning TOD+1PPS Output

The TOD output port uses an RS-422 balanced signal level and RJ-45 connector. It contains the TOD message and the 1PPS signal. The TOD message can be one of two supported TOD formats: Cisco and China Mobile. At the connector, the 1PPS signal shares the same timing characteristics as the standalone 1PPS signal from the 10M/1PPS coaxial connector. These timing characteristics are pulse width, rise time of the timing edge, and offset from UTC second, but they are separately configured.

TOD+1PPS Output Example

To configure the TOD port as a TOD+1PPS output with the Cisco TOD format, and to enable the port, use the following procedure:

1. Login at the Admin or Config-user level.

2. Type set port-control tod format cisco and press Enter .

3. Type set port-control tod state enable and press Enter .

Note: The Cisco TOD message format reports leap seconds using

TAI-UTC. The China Mobile TOD message format reports GPS leap second using GPS-UTC.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 223

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning the Non-PTP Outputs

Provisioning the 10MHz & 1PPS Output

Use the following procedures to provision the 10M/1PPS port as a 1PPS output or

10 MHz output.

1PPS Output Example

To configure the 1PPS/10M port as a 1PPS output, with an offset of +50,000 ns, and to enable the port, use the following procedure:

1. Login at the Admin or Config-user level.

2. Type set port-control pps10m signal-type pps and press Enter .

3. Type set output pps offset pps10m 50000 and press Enter .

4. Type set port-control pps10m state enable and press Enter .

10 MHz Port Example

To configure the 1PPS/10M port as a 10MHz output and to enable the port, use the following procedure:

1. Login at the Admin or Config-user level.

2. Type set port-control pps10m signal-type 10m and press Enter .

3. Type set port-control pps10m state enable and press Enter .

Provisioning SyncE Output

SyncE provides a method of distributing timing using the physical layer of Ethernet devices. All intermediate nodes must have hardware and software support for

SyncE. SyncE is used to distribute frequency through the network. SSM is passed between nodes in ESMC messages. This allows nodes to determine the quality level of the upstream node, to prevent timing loops, and also to reconfigure the timing path. The TP 2300/2700 provides the master function of providing synchronization via SyncE.

Ethernet can be run in either asynchronous or synchronous modes. Electrical SFP do not support the transmission of timing and therefore are asynchronous. Optical

SFP support synchronous operation and therefore can be used with SyncE.

Normally, SyncE nodes use the ESMC messages. However, if the downstream devices do not use the ESMC messages, then the messages can be disabled.

The system PQL value is normally sent in the QL -value (SSM) field in the ESMC message. If desired, this can be disabled and a value of DNU will be inserted in the

ESMC message.

224 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning the Non-PTP Outputs

Figure 4-22

shows the command hierarchy for provisioning SyncE.

The TP 2300/2700 only support the unidirectional output QL mode. With unidirectional, the SyncE output port supports a reduced SyncE, i.e. it transmits

ESMC messages and ignores ESMC messages from the downstream SyncE

Network Element.

Figure 4-22. Set SyncE Command Hierarchy

QL State for SyncE Output Example

1. Login at the Admin or Config-user level.

2. Type set synce ql-state eth2 enable and press Enter

Enable ESMC Message for SyncE Output Example

1. Login at the Admin or Config-user level.

2. Type set synce state eth2 enable and press Enter.

Provisioning Output Generation Behavior

The behavior of the output ports during warm-up, free-run, and holdover states can be provisioned using the set output-gen warm-up , set output-gen free-run , and set output-gen holdover commands, as shown in

Figure 4-23

.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 225

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Setting the System Date and Time

Figure 4-23. Output Generation Behavior Commands

Example:

To provision the port 1 output behavior as squelch for the warm-up state, squelch for the free-run state, ON for the holdover state, and AIS for the fast-track state:

1. Login at the Admin or Config-user level.

2. Type set output-gen warm-up t1e1 squelch and press Enter .

3. Type set output-gen free-run t1e1 squelch and press Enter .

4. Type set output-gen holdover t1e1 on and press Enter .

5. Type set output-gen fast-track t1e1 ais and press Enter .

Setting the System Date and Time

The TimeProvider 2300/2700 Time of Day can be set either by an external source, or manually with the “set clock” command. You can set the time and date only for the frequency references.

Example

1. Login at the Admin or Config-user level (see Logging In , on page 185).

2. Type show ref status and press Enter to check the reference mode.

226 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning Alarms

3. Type set ref frequency state t1e1 enable and press Enter .

4. Type set clock date-time <value> and press Enter .

Enter the value in format yyyy-mm-dd,hh:mm:ss.

Provisioning Alarms

This section describes the commands used to provision and manage alarms in the

TimeProvider 2300/2700. The user can provision the alarms to be enabled or disabled and set thresholds to turn the alarms on and off. For a list of all alarms, see

Appendix A, System Messages

.

Software commands allow you to perform the following:

Provision the severity level

Provision the alarm (enable or disable)

Show current alarm settings

Show current alarms

Display alarm status

Alarms are also indicated by an LED on the front panel.

Note: Disabling an input port will clear all alarms and events related to the port.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 227

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning Alarms

Figure 4-24. Set Alarm-Config Commands

Disabling Specific Alarms

The Set Alarm-Config command allows you to enable or disable specified alarms.

Example

To disable the GNSS antenna open-circuit alarm (alarm #33), enter the following:

1. Login at the Admin or Config-user level (see Logging In , on page 185).

2. Type set alarm-config state alarm 33 disable and press Enter .

Showing Current Alarm Settings

The Show Alarm-Config command displays the set and clear alarm thresholds for every alarm type.

Example

228 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning Alarms

To display the configuration for all alarm types, enter the following:

1. Type show alarm-config and press Enter .

Showing Current Alarms

The Show Alarm command displays all current alarms.

Example

To display a list of all current alarms enter the following:

1. Type show alarm and press Enter .

Displaying Alarm and Unit Status

The Show Status command displays the system status information as follows:

Assigned System Name

System Date And Time

System Uptime

Time Traceable

Clock Frequency Status

Clock Timing Status

Frequency State Duration in Minutes

Time State Duration in Minutes

Currently Selected Timing reference Input

Currently Selected Frequency reference Input

Packet Service Eth1 mode: PTP client

Packet Service Eth2 mode: PTP Master

Eth1 active connector interface: RJ45

Eth2 active connector interface: SFP

Frequency Offset

Phase Offset Value (Valid in fast-lock and normal states)

Active Alarms #

System Frequency PQL

Example

To display the system status, type show status and press Enter .

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 229

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Saving and Restoring Provisioning Data

Saving and Restoring Provisioning Data

Symmetricom recommends that you keep an electronic version and/or a written version of the provisioning changes you make to the TimeProvider 2300/2700. Use

the set configuration

command to back up or restore provisioning data. See Figure

4-25 .

Figure 4-25. Set Configuration Command Hierarchy

Backing up Provisioning Data

The configuration is automatically backed up one minute after a configuration change.

Example 1

To backup up the current configuration immediately, type set configuration backup local and press Enter .

230 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning for SNMP

Restoring Provisioning Data

Example 1

To change the current configuration to factory default while preserving user and IP information, type set configuration default and press Enter .

Note: The system will automatically reboot after receiving either the " set configuration default " or " set configuration factory " commands

Example 2

To change the current configuration to the factory default, type set configuration factory and press Enter .

Notes: Setting the configuration to default will not overwrite the user login information or the IP address of MGMT port. Setting the configuration to factory will overwrite the user login information and return the IP address of MGMT port to the factory set address.

Provisioning for SNMP

The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an application layer protocol that allows you to manage network devices. SNMP is based on a client-server query-response mode that requires an Ethernet connection. A manager application

(software installed on a computer) is the client generating the queries, and an agent

(software on the TimeProvider 2300/2700) is the server generating responses. The

TimeProvider 2300/2700 SNMP supports traps and the MIB-II system MIB.

TimeProvider 2300/2700 supports SNMPv2c and SNMPv3. SNMPv3 provides additional security features not available in SNMPv2c. In addition to the functions of

SNMPv2c, SNMPv3 allows user and trapuser levels that are based on authentication and privacy settings. The authentication algorithm is either

HMAC-SHA-1-96 or MD5, with a 20-character key. The privacy settings are based on either the CBC-DES or AES encryption standard, with a 16-character key. All keys are uppercase.

Port 161 is the port of standard SNMP interactive communications and port 162 is the trap port.

SNMP functionality is provisioned on the TP 2300/2700 using the CLI command

“ set snmp

” (see Figure 4-26

).

Each alarm trap OID from the TP 2300/2700 represents a unique alarm.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 231

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning for SNMP

Each container contains the following sub-info in its own OID:

Alarm/Event ID

Date&Time

Severity

Alarm/Event Description

Index

Alarm Action

Sequence Number

The alarm OIDs are under 1.3.6.1.4.1.9070.1.2.5.7.3.1.2.

The Alarm/Event ID element should be used to determine which alarm or event was generated. Alarm and Event IDs are listed in

Appendix A, System Messages

.

Figure 4-26. Set SNMP Commands

Adding or Deleting a Manager IP Address

Use the “set snmp add manager” command to add a manager IP address. Use the

“set snmp delete manager” command to delete a manager IP address. The TP

2300/2700 will support a maximum of 3 manager IP addresses.

Example:

232 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning for SNMP

To add the SNMP manager IP address 192.100.100.100, using an engineID

0x12345678901234567890 :

1. Type set snmp add manager 192.100.100.100 engineid

0x12345678901234567890 then press Enter .

Provisioning to Generate v2 Traps

Use the set snmp trapversion command to provision the trap version to v2.

By default, the TP 2300/2700 will generate v2 traps.

Example:

Type set snmp trapversion 2 then press Enter .

Provisioning to Generate v3 Traps

Use the set snmp trapversion command to provision the trap version to v3.

Example

Type set snmp trapversion 3 then press Enter .

Adding and Removing v2 Communities

Use the set snmp add v2-community command to add a SNMP v2 community.

Use the set snmp delete v2-community command to remove an existing SNMP v2 community. The TP 2300/2700 will support a maximum of ten v2 communities.

Note: To use v2 communities, the v2 state must be set to Enable using the command set snmp state-v2 enable .

Example

To add a v2 community named “tech27”, with a security level of “read-only” and remove an existing v2 community named “bob321”:

1. Type set snmp add v2-community tech27 securlvl read-only then press

Enter .

2. Type set snmp delete v2-community bob321 then press Enter.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 233

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Provisioning for SNMP

Adding and Removing SNMP v3 Users

SNMPv3 provides additional security features not available in SNMPv2c. In addition to the functions of SNMPv2c, SNMPv3 allows user and trapuser levels that are based on authentication and privacy settings. The authentication algorithm is either

HMAC-SHA-1-96 or MD5, with a key of up to 32 characters in length. The privacy settings are based on either the CBC-DES or AES encryption standard, with a key of up to 32 characters in length. All keys are uppercase.

Use the set snmp add user command to add a v3 user. Use the set snmp delete user command to remove an existing v3 user. The TP 2300/2700 will support a maximum of ten v3 users.

Example - Add User

To add a user named “test12”, with a security level of “priv”, with a 20-character

MD5 authentication key “123456789ABCDEFGHIJK” and a 16-character DES privacy key “ABCDEFG123456789”:

1. Type set snmp add user test12 securlvl priv then press Enter .

2. Enter MD5 at the authentication protocol prompt.

3. Enter 123456789ABCDEFGHIJK at the authentication key prompt.

4. Enter DES at the privacy protocol prompt.

5. Enter ABCDEFG123456789 at the privacy key prompt.

Note: Do not use spaces within keys.

Only characters {a-z,A-Z,0-9,! ( ) - _ . ? ~ * @ ^ + = : / %} are accepted for SNMP authentication or privacy keys.

Example - Remove User

To remove an existing user named “dave123”, type set snmp delete user dave123 then press Enter.

234 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Testing TP 2300/2700 Provisioning

Adding and Removing SNMP v3 Trap Users

Use the set snmp add trapuser command to add a v3 trap user. Use the set snmp delete trapuser command to remove an existing v3 trap user. The TP

2300/2700 will support a maximum of 3 v3 trap users.

Note: In order to access trap information, a trap user must also be added as a user. The same name, authentication protocol, authentication key, privacy protocol, and privacy key must be used for both the user and trap user.

Example - Add Trap User

To add a trap user named “test12” with a security level of “priv”, with the

20-character MD5 authentication key “123456789ABCDEFGHIJK” and

16-character DES privacy key “ABCDEFG123456789”:

1. Type set snmp add trapuser test12 securlvl priv then press Enter .

2. Enter MD5 at the authentication protocol prompt.

3. Enter 123456789ABCDEFGHIJK at the authentication key prompt.

4. Enter DES at the privacy protocol prompt.

5. Enter ABCDEFG123456789 at the privacy key prompt.

Example - Remove Trap User

To remove an existing trapuser named “dave123”, type set snmp delete trapuser dave123 then press Enter.

Testing TP 2300/2700 Provisioning

Perform the tests in this section to verify that the TP 2300/2700 is provisioned and operating correctly.

LED Indications

The LEDS on the front panel of the TP 2300/2700 illuminate in the following way when the TP 2300/2700 is installed and provisioned:

The Power LED should be green.

The PWR A and/or PWR B LEDs should be green.

(DC power versions of TP 2300/2700 only)

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 235

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Testing TP 2300/2700 Provisioning

The GNSS LED will be green if the reference is GNSS and the GNSS engine/interface is operating normally. (TP 2700 only)

– The GNSS LED will be amber if the reference is GNSS and GNSS engine or antenna is not tracking satellite.

– The GNSS LED will be OFF if the reference is not GNSS.

The Clock LED should be GREEN.

The Alarm LED should be OFF.

The Ethernet MGMT port, LEDs on connector.

– LED on right side of connector should be green if link has been established. (Left side is amber if there is a 100M link.)

– LED on left side of connector should flash amber if there is activity.

ETH1 port LED will be green if a link has been established, flashing green if there is activity. (Left side is amber if there is a 100M link.)

ETH2 port LED will be green if a link has been established, flashing green if there is activity. (Left side is amber if there is a 100M link.)

See

Table 5-3 for additional details about LED conditions.

Verifying the Port IP Addresses

The IP addresses for the MGMT, ETH1 and ETH2 ports must each be on different network/subnet.

MGMT Port

1. Log in to the TP 2300/2700 with a valid username and password.

2. Type show ip config mgmt and press Enter .

a. Verify that the IP address-mode has the desired setting of DHCP or Static.

b. If the IP address-mode is set to “static”, verify that the IP address and mask are the desired values.

c. Verify the State for the port is “enable”.

tp2700> show ip config mgmt

MGMT PORT PARAMETERS

IP mode : dhcp

IP state : enable

236 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Testing TP 2300/2700 Provisioning

Static mode Parameters

IP address : 192.168.0.100

IP mask : 255.255.255.0

IP gateway : 0.0.0.0

DNS Domain : 192.168.0.100

DNS nameserver1 : 0.0.0.0

DNS nameserver2 : 0.0.0.0

4. Type show ip status mgmt and press Enter .

a. Verify that the IP address and mask match the configured values.

b. Verify that the third line of the results shows that the link is “UP”.

mgmt0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:B0:AE:03:46:04 inet addr:192.168.5.44 Bcast:0.0.0.0 Mask:255.255.255.0

UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1

RX packets:1740774 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0

TX packets:5591 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0 collisions:0 txqueuelen:1000

RX bytes:83053919 (79.2 MiB) TX bytes:592651 (578.7 KiB)

ETH1 Input Port

1. Type show ethernet config and press Enter .

a. Verify that the auto-negotiation and speed settings match the desired values.

b. Verify that the active-connector setting matches the connector being used.

----------------------------------------------

|Port| Auto-neg | Speed | Active-connector|

|----|------------|--------|-----------------|

|eth1| enable | all | r1-rj45 |

|----|------------|--------|-----------------|

|eth2| enable | all | r2-rj45 |

----------------------------------------------

3. Type show ethernet status and press Enter .

a. Verify that the speed for the port matches the settings.

eth1 current speed: 100M eth2 current speed: 1000M

2. Type show ip config eth1 and press Enter .

a. Verify that the IP address and mask are the desired values.

b. Verify the State for the port is “enable”.

tp2700> show ip config eth1

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 237

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Testing TP 2300/2700 Provisioning

ETH1 PORT PARAMETERS

IP state : enable

Static mode Parameters

IP address : 192.168.1.12

IP mask : 255.255.255.0

IP gateway : 0.0.0.0

3. Type show ip status eth1 and press Enter .

a. Verify that the IP address and mask match the configured values.

b. Verify that the third line of the results shows that the link is “UP”.

eth1 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:B0:AE:03:46:05 inet addr:192.168.9.44 Bcast:192.168.9.255 Mask:255.255.255.0

UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1

RX packets:33895260 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0

TX packets:17018547 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0 collisions:0 txqueuelen:1000

RX bytes:3079100330 (2.8 GiB) TX bytes:1457475560 (1.3 GiB)

Interrupt:128

ETH2 Output Port

1. Type show ethernet config and press Enter .

a. Verify that the auto-negotiation and speed settings match the desired values.

b. Verify that the active-connector setting matches the connector being used.

----------------------------------------------

|Port| Auto-neg | Speed | Active-connector|

|----|------------|--------|-----------------|

|eth1| enable | all | r1-rj45 |

|----|------------|--------|-----------------|

|eth2| enable | all | r2-rj45 |

----------------------------------------------

3. Type show ethernet status and press Enter .

a. Verify that the speed for the port matches the settings.

eth1 current speed: none eth2 current speed: 100M

2. Type show ip config eth2 and press Enter .

a. Verify that the IP address and mask are the desired values.

b. Verify the State for the port is “enable”.

tp2700> show ip config eth2

238 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Testing TP 2300/2700 Provisioning

ETH2 PORT PARAMETERS

IP state : enable

Static mode Parameters

IP address : 192.168.2.12

IP mask : 255.255.255.0

IP gateway : 0.0.0.0

3. Type show ip status eth2 and press Enter .

a. Verify that the IP address and mask match the configured values.

b. Verify that the third line of the results shows that the link is “UP”.

eth2 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:B0:AE:03:46:06 inet addr:192.168.2.12 Bcast:192.168.2.255 Mask:255.255.255.0

UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1

RX packets:0 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0

TX packets:261951 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0 collisions:0 txqueuelen:1000

RX bytes:0 (0.0 b) TX bytes:16764776 (15.9 MiB)

Interrupt:128

Verifying the Reference

1. Type show ref config and press Enter .

– Verify that Reference Critera and Switch Mode settings match desired values.

– Verify that Priority and Config-PQL and Use-Config-PQL settings match desired values for Time Reference and Frequency Reference.

Reference Criteria : priority

Reference Switch Mode : AutoReturn

Time Reference Config

--------------------------------------------------

|Reference |Priority |config-PQL |use-config-pql |

|----------|---------|-----------|---------------|

|GNSS |1 |1 |enable |

|..........|.........|...........|...............|

|PTP |2 |3 |disable |

--------------------------------------------------

Frequency Reference Config

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 239

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Testing TP 2300/2700 Provisioning

--------------------------------------------------

|Reference |Priority |config-PQL |use-config-pql |

|----------|---------|-----------|---------------|

|GNSS |1 |1 |enable |

|..........|.........|...........|...............|

|PTP |2 |3 |disable |

|..........|.........|...........|...............|

|SYNCE |4 |3 |enable |

|..........|.........|...........|...............|

|T1E1 |3 |3 |disable |

--------------------------------------------------

2. Type show ref status and press Enter .

– Verify that GNSS is qualified for Time Reference and Frequency

Reference. If GNSS is configured to be the main reference, verify that

GNSS is “selected”.

Time Reference Status

------------------------------------

|Reference |final-pql|status |

|----------|---------|-------------|

|GNSS |1 |selected |

|..........|.........|.............|

|PTP |16 |disqualified |

------------------------------------

Frequency Reference Status

------------------------------------

|Reference |final-pql|status |

|----------|---------|-------------|

|GNSS |1 |selected |

|..........|.........|.............|

|PTP |16 |disqualified |

|..........|.........|.............|

|SYNCE |3 |disqualified |

|..........|.........|.............|

|T1E1 |16 |disable |

------------------------------------

Verifying GNSS (TP 2700 only)

1. Type show gnss config and press Enter .

– Verify that the State is “enable”.

– Verify that the settings for PosMode, Track-mode, Mask, and Antenna

Delay match the desired values.

240 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Testing TP 2300/2700 Provisioning tp2700> show gnss config

GNSS Configuration

State : enable

PosMode : auto

Track-Mode : gps

Mask : 10

Antenna Delay : 0

GNSS manual position

Latitude : N37:22:43.425

Longitude : W121:55:34.815

Height : 13.7

2. Type show gnss status and press Enter .

– Verify that Current Status for GNSS is “OK”.

– Verify that at least several satellites with SNR values greater than 40 are in the table.

tp2700> show gnss status

GNSS Status:

Current Status : ok

Current Position Status : positionHold

Current Antenna Position:

Latitude : N37:22:43.11

Longitude : W121:55:34.65

Height : 11.10

Current GNSS Satellite View:

-------------------------------------------------------------

|Index | No |SNR | Health | Azimuth |Elevation| Sat Type |

|------|-----|----|----------|---------|---------|----------|

| 1 | 3 |37 | healthy | 313 | 23 | glonass |

|......|.....|....|..........|.........|.........|..........|

| 2 | 6 |38 | healthy | 309 | 35 | glonass |

|......|.....|....|..........|.........|.........|..........|

| 3 | 15 |43 | healthy | 57 | 31 | glonass |

|......|.....|....|..........|.........|.........|..........|

| 4 | 16 |39 | healthy | 259 | 24 | glonass |

|......|.....|....|..........|.........|.........|..........|

| 5 | 18 |39 | healthy | 300 | 82 | glonass |

|......|.....|....|..........|.........|.........| ........|

| 6 | 21 |42 | healthy | 36 | 67 | glonass |

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 241

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Testing TP 2300/2700 Provisioning

|......|.....|....|..........|.........|.........| ........|

| 7 | 22 |42 | healthy | 240 | 47 | glonass |

|......|.....|....|..........|.........|.........| .........|

| 8 | 24 |42 | healthy | 85 | 29 | gps |

|......|.....|....|..........|.........|.........| .........|

| 9 | 26 |38 | healthy | 42 | 18 | gps |

|......|.....|....|..........|.........|.........|..........|

| 10 | 29 |42 | healthy | 150 | 26 | gps |

|......|.....|....|..........|.........|.........|..........|

| 11 | 21 |42 | healthy | 36 | 67 | gps |

|......|.....|....|..........|.........|.........|..........|

| 12 | 22 |42 | healthy | 240 | 47 | gps |

|......|.....|....|..........|.........|.........|..........|

| 13 | 24 |42 | healthy | 85 | 29 | gps |

|......|.....|....|..........|.........|.........|..........|

| 14 | 26 |38 | healthy | 42 | 18 | gps |

|......|.....|....|..........|.........|.........|..........|

| 15 | 29 |42 | healthy | 150 | 26 | glonass |

------------------------------------------------------------|

3. Use the procedure Verifying the Reference , on page 239 to check the reference

configuration and status.

Verifying PTP Master/Server Functionality

1. Verify the IP address for

ETH2 Output Port per the above procedure.

2. Type show ptp master active-profile eth2 and press Enter .

– Verify that the active profile setting matches the desired profile type.

ETH2 PTP MASTER ACTIVE PROFILE : telecom-2008

3. Display the configuration details for the active profile type, whether “default”,

“itu-g8265-1” or “telecom-2008”. Each profile will have configuration settings, even if is not the active profile. For this example, type show ptp master config eth2 telecom-2008 and press Enter .

– Verify that the PTP State is “enable”.

– Verify that the PTP parameter settings for the profile match the desired settings.

ETH2 PTP MASTER CONFIGURATION WITH PROFILE TELECOM-2008:

PTP State : enable

PTP TTL : 64

PTP DSCP : 0

PTP Dither : disable

PTP Max Number Clients : 256

PTP Two Steps : disable

PTP Unicast Negotiation : enable

PTP Unicast Lease Duration : 300

242 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Testing TP 2300/2700 Provisioning

PTP Sync Limit : -7

PTP Announce Limit : -4

PTP Delay Limit : -7

PTP Clock Id : 00:b0:ae:ff:fe:03:46:05

PTP Priority 1 : 128

PTP Priority 2 : 128

PTP Domain : 0

PTP Timescale : auto

4. Type show ptp master status eth2 and press Enter .

– Verify that the port is enabled.

– Verify that the profile matches the desired setting.

– If clients are configured to use this master, verify that number of attached clients matches the number of clients configured.

ETH2 PTP MASTER STATUS :

Port enabled : yes

Clock Id : 00:b0:ae:ff:fe:03:46:05

Port Number : 2

Profile : telecom-2008

Port state : master

Clock class : 6

Clock accuracy : within 100 ns

Timescale : ptp

Maximum allowed clients : 64

Number of attached clients : 8

Client load : 12%

Verifying PTP Input Client Functionality

1. Type show ptp client config eth1 telecom-2008 and press Enter .

– Verify that the PTP State is “enable”.

– Verify that the PTP settings match the desired values.

– Verify that the IP address for the master is set to the correct value.

ETH1 PTP CLIENT CONFIGURATION WITH PROFILE TELECOM-2008:

PTP State : enable

PTP TTL : 64

PTP DSCP : 0

PTP Unicast Negotiation : enable

PTP Unicast Lease Duration : 300

PTP Sync Interval : -6

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 243

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Testing TP 2300/2700 Provisioning

PTP Announce Interval : 1

PTP Delay Interval : -6

PTP Clock Id : 00:b0:ae:ff:fe:03:46:05

PTP Domain : 0

PTP Announce Receipt Timeout : 3

PTP master-table:

------------------------------

|Index |address |

|-------|--------------------|

|1 |192.168.9.41 |

|.......|....................|

|2 |0.0.0.0 |

------------------------------

2. Type show ptp client status eth1 and press Enter .

– Verify that flow weights are non-zero values.

ETH1 PTP CLIENT STATUS:

Client Status : OK

Minimal Round Trip Delay(us) : 0.72

METRIC : FORWARD REVERSE

Flow Weight (%) : 47.78 52.22

Transient free out of 900s : 900 900

Transient free out of 3600s : 3600 3600

Percentile Clustering (%) : 100.0 100.0

Operational Min TDEV (ns) : 3.2 3.2

Operational MAFE (ppb) : 0.00 0.00

Min Cluster Width (ns) : 15000.0 7500.0

Mode width (ns) : 30000.0 15000.0

Packet Rate (pkts/s) : 64 64

Currently Used Master:

IP Address : 192.168.9.41

Clock ID : 00:b0:ae:ff:fe:03:46:69

Port Number : 2

Clock Class : 6

Clock Accuracy : within 100 ns

244 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Testing TP 2300/2700 Provisioning

Time Scale : PTP

Time Source : GPS

Time Traceable : true

Frequency Traceable : true

Steps Removed : 1

3. Use the procedure Verifying the Reference , on page 239 to check the reference

configuration and status.

Verifying SyncE Functionality

Input

1. Type show synce config all and press Enter .

SyncE Config:

----------------------------

|Port |State |QL State|

|------|----------|--------|

|eth1 |enable |enable |

|......|..........|........|

|eth2 |enable |enable |

----------------------------

2. Type show synce status all and press Enter .

– Verify that the Ethernet Mode is “synchronous”.

– Verify that the RxSSM value for ETH1 port is consistent with the quality needed for your network.

-------------------------------------------------------

|Port |Direction |Ethernet Mode |RxSSM |TxSSM |

|--------|----------|---------------|--------|--------|

|eth1 |input |synchronous |0x02 |0x0f |

|........|..........|...............|........|........|

|eth2 |output |synchronous |0xff |0x02 |

-------------------------------------------------------

3. Use the procedure Verifying the Reference , on page 239 to check the reference

configuration and status.

Output

1. Type show synce config all and press Enter .

SyncE Config:

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 245

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Testing TP 2300/2700 Provisioning

----------------------------

|Port |State |QL State|

|------|----------|--------|

|eth1 |enable |enable |

|......|..........|........|

|eth2 |enable |enable |

----------------------------

2. Type show synce status all and press Enter .

– Verify that the Ethernet Mode for ETH2 port is “synchronous”.

– Verify that the TxSSM values is consistent with quality needed for your network.

-------------------------------------------------------

|Port |Direction |Ethernet Mode |RxSSM |TxSSM |

|--------|----------|---------------|--------|--------|

|eth1 |input |synchronous |0x02 |0x0f |

|........|..........|...............|........|........|

|eth2 |output |synchronous |0xff |0x02 |

-------------------------------------------------------

Verifying T1/E1 Functionality

T1/E1 Input

1. Type show input config t1e1 and press Enter .

– Verify that the Input Configuration settings match the desired values.

– Verify that the IO Direction is “input”.

– Verify that the Port State is “enable”.

– Verify that the Signal/Format is set to the desired value.

Input config

----------------------------------------------

|signal |Frame Type |CRC |ssmbit |

|----------|---------------|--------|--------|

|e1 input |ccs |enable |8 |

|..........|...............|........|........|

|t1 input |esf |na |na |

----------------------------------------------

Port config

--------------------------------------------

|Port |State |IO dir |Signal |

|--------|--------|--------|---------------|

|t1e1 |enable |output |t1 |

--------------------------------------------

246 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

2. Type show input status t1e1 and press Enter .

– Verify that IO status matches the configured setting.

– Verify that the input status is “OK”.

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Testing TP 2300/2700 Provisioning

------------------------------------------------------------------------|

| Port | io status | input status | ssm | los | ais | oof | bpv | crc |

|------|-----------|--------------|-------|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|

| t1e1 | e1 input | ok | ok | ok | ok | ok | ok | ok |

|.......................................................................| or

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

|Port |input status|ssm |los |ais |oof |bpv |crc |

|---------|------------|--------|--------|--------|--------|--------|--------|

|t1 input |dis |na |na |na |na |na |na |

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

3. Use the procedure Verifying the Reference , on page 239 to check the reference

configuration and status.

Output

1. Type show output config t1e1 and press Enter .

– Verify that the Output Configuration settings match the desired values.

– Verify that the IO Direction is “Output”.

– Verify that the Port State is “enable”.

– Verify that the Signal/Format is set to the desired value.

tp2700> show output config t1e1

Output Config

--------------------------------------------------------------

|Signal |FrameType |CRC |SSMBit |zero suppression|

|------------|------------|--------|--------|----------------|

|e1 output |ccs |enable |all |off |

|............|............|........|........|................|

|t1 output |esf |na |na |na |

--------------------------------------------------------------

Port Config

--------------------------------------------------------

|Port |state |io dir |Signal /Format |

|------------|------------|------------|---------------|

|t1e1 |enable |input |e1 |

--------------------------------------------------------

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 247

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Testing TP 2300/2700 Provisioning

2. Type show output status t1e1 and press Enter .

– Verify that the IO Status shows the desired signal format and “output”.

– Verify that the Port Status is “on”.

------------------------------------

| Port | io status | port status |

|------|-----------|---------------|

| t1e1 | e1 output | on |

|..................................|

Verifying TOD Functionality

1. Type show port-control and press Enter .

– Verify that the State for the TOD port is “enable”.

– Verify that the Signal/Format is the desired type.

--------------------------------------------

|# |Port |State |IO dir |Signal/Format|

|---|-------|--------|-------|-------------|

|1 |t1e1 |enable |output |t1 |

|...|.......|........|.......|.............|

|2 |pps10m |enable |output |10MHz |

|...|.......|........|.......|.............|

|3 |tod |enable |output |cisco |

--------------------------------------------

2. Type show output status tod and press Enter .

– Verify that the State for the TOD port is “enable”.

– Verify that the Signal/Format is the desired type.

TOD CISCO output message

*,A,56415,13/05/02,03:52:17,000.0,0,37N22.716,121W55.581,+00

14 or

TOD China Mobile output message

248 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Testing TP 2300/2700 Provisioning

GPS time of week : 347953

GPS week : 1738

Leap second : 16

PPS status : 0

PPS Tacc : 7

Clock source : 2

Clock status : 6

Clock alarms : 0x2

Note: The Cisco TOD message format reports leap seconds using

TAI-UTC. The China Mobile TOD message format reports GPS leap second using GPS-UTC.

Verifying 10 MHz/ 1PPS Functionality

1. Type show output config pps10m and press Enter .

– Verify that the Signal/Format is the desired type.

– Verify that the State is “enable”.

1PPS output phase offset compensation: 0 ns

Port config

--------------------------------------

| Port | state | Signal/format |

|---------|---------|----------------|

| pps10m | enable | pps |

|.........|.........|................|

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 249

Chapter 4 Provisioning

Testing TP 2300/2700 Provisioning

250 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

This chapter describes maintenance and troubleshooting procedures for the

TimeProvider 2300/2700.

In This Chapter

Preventive Maintenance

Safety Considerations

ESD Considerations

Troubleshooting

Diagnosing the TP 2300/2700 By Symptom

Diagnosing the TP 2300/2700- Reading LED Conditions

Repairing the TimeProvider 2300/2700

Upgrading the Firmware

TimeProvider 2300/2700 Part Numbers

Returning the TimeProvider 2300/2700

User’s Guide Updates

Contacting Technical Support

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 251

Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Preventive Maintenance

Preventive Maintenance

The TimeProvider 2300/2700 requires minimal preventive maintenance. Ensure the unit is not exposed to hazards such as direct sunlight, open windows, water, or

extreme heat. See Environmental Requirements , on page 41, for electromagnetic

compatibility conditions that may cause damage.

Caution: To avoid electromagnetic discharge damage to the circuitry, never attempt to vacuum the TimeProvider 2300/2700.

Table 5-1 lists preventive maintenance measures to be performed periodically. Do

not disassemble components just for the purpose of inspection.

Table 5-1. Preventive Maintenance

Item

Chassis

Cables

Inspection

Inspect for dirt or foreign material

Inspect for pinched, worn or damaged cable

Connectors Inspect for loose or damaged connector

Corrective Action

Clean the exterior of chassis with a soft dry cloth

Replace pinched, worn or damaged cable at the first opportunity

Tighten loose connectors. If damaged, replace the connector and/or cable at the first opportunity

Interval

Periodically

Periodically

Periodically

Safety Considerations

Follow your company’s safety guidelines and policies when working on or around live equipment.

ESD Considerations

Maintenance personnel should wear ESD wrist straps when installing or working on all TimeProvider 2300/2700 equipment. Plug the user-supplied wrist strap into the

TimeProvider 2300/2700.

252 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Symptoms, LEDs, and System Messages can all be very helpful in troubleshooting the TP 2300/2700. Use the show alarm and show event commands to view system messages.

Note: The TP2300/2700 incorporates a system reboot function

(watchdog) if any of the system's software become unresponsive. If the system's software is unresponsive for 15 minutes, then the watchdog timer will report an event in the event log (add the actual event here), and the system will reboot.

Diagnosing the TP 2300/2700 By Symptom

Table 5-2 presents troubleshooting information for the TP 2300/2700 based on

symptoms. Table 5-3

presents diagnostic information for the TP 2300/2700 using front panel LEDs. See

Table A-1

in Appendix A, System Messages

for Event IDs, system messages and associated corrective actions.

Table 5-2. Troubleshooting Symptoms

Symptom

No LED lit

Probable Cause

No power to unit

Troubleshooting Procedure /

Corrective Action

Check power supply

Check to ensure that UPS (if applicable) is operating correctly

Remove both fuses and replace Both A and B fuses on the branch over-current protection unit are blown

Loss of ground

Loose power cabling to unit

Chassis is faulty

Re-attach ground wires

Check that power cables to unit are securely fastened

Contact Symmetricom Global Services

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 253

Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Table 5-2. Troubleshooting Symptoms

(

Symptom Probable Cause

No PTP flow between TP

2300/2700 Grandmaster and client

Cable connections

If LED for port is OFF)

Troubleshooting Procedure /

Corrective Action

Check the cable connections and SFP or

Ethernet connections.

Ethernet Auto Negotiation settings

Verify that SFP connector models are recommended and supported.

Check that either Ethernet Auto

Negotiation is enabled or that speed has been set to a compatible level with the connecting network element ( show ethernet config command).

No PTP flow between TP

2300/2700 Grandmaster and client

VLAN / non-VLAN configuration is incorrect

( If LED for port is ON and ping to client is unsuccessful)

Make sure that only full-duplex network devices are used. The TP 2300/2700 does not support half-duplex devices, such as hubs, for PTP connections.

Verify that VLAN configuration is correct with show vlan-config eth2

Check VLAN and IP configuration of

PTP client

IP address configuration is incorrect

IP address of ETH1 and

ETH2 ports are in the same network/subnet

Note : The TP 2300/2700 uses the clock

ID as a unique identifier for PTP clients and can only allow for one instance of the clock id to be serviced. If a PTP client with a single clock ID requests service using two different IP addresses or VLANs, the

TP 2300/2700 will use the IP address/VLAN of the latest request.

Verify that IP configuration is correct with show ip config eth2

Verify that IP status is correct with show ip status eth2

If status does not look correct, restart interface with set ip state eth2 ipv4 restart

Make sure the IP addresses for MGMT,

ETH1 and ETH2 ports are on different networks/subnets.

254 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Table 5-2. Troubleshooting Symptoms

Symptom Probable Cause

Troubleshooting Procedure /

Corrective Action

Check master table setting of client. No PTP flow between TP

2300/2700 Grandmaster and client

Client configuration for master table is incorrect

PTP state set to Disable

( If LED for port is ON and ping to client is successful)

PTP Max Clients for TP

2300/2700 exceeded

PTP domain setting for

GM does not match client’s domain

PTP max allowable rate settings for sync and delay less than values of client

Profile and profile settings do not match client

Change PTP state to Enable with set ptp

master config eth2 command for the

ETH2 port.

If number of clients exceeds max for TP

2300/2700, extra clients are ignored.

Purchase license for additional clients.

Verify domain setting for GM matches the domain setting for the client. Check GM domain setting with show ptp master config eth2 command for the port.

Check sync-limit and delay-limit settings of GM with show ptp master config eth2 command for the profile used on

ETH2 port. If max allowable rates of GM are less than those of client, use the

set ptp

master config eth2 command for the profile on the ETH2 port to increase sync-limit and delay-limit rates to meet or exceed rate values for clients. Or decrease rate settings for client to a value less than or equal to settings of GM.

Verify settings for master match the client.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 255

Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Table 5-2. Troubleshooting Symptoms

Symptom Probable Cause

No PTP flow between TP

2300/2700 client and master

VLAN / non-VLAN configuration is incorrect

( If LED for port is ON and ping to master is unsuccessful)

IP address configuration is incorrect

Troubleshooting Procedure /

Corrective Action

Verify that VLAN configuration is correct with show vlan config eth1

Check VLAN and IP configuration of PTP master

Verify that IP configuration is correct with show vlan config eth1

Verify that IP status is correct with show ip status eth1

If status does not look correct, restart interface with set ip state eth1 ipv4 restart .

Make sure the IP addresses for MGMT,

ETH1 and ETH2 ports are different networks/subnets.

Check master table setting of ETH1 port client with

show ptp

client config eth1 telecom-2008 command.

No PTP flow between TP

2300/2700 client and master

IP address of ETH1 and

ETH2 ports are in the same network/subnet

ETH1 port client configuration for master table is incorrect

( If LED for port is ON and ping to master is successful)

PTP state for ETH1 client port set to Disable

PTP domain setting for

ETH1 port client does not match master’s domain

PTP max allowable rate settings for sync and delay more than values of master

Profile and profile settings for the ETH1 client do not match master

Change PTP state to Enable with set ptp

client config eth1 command for the

ETH1 client port.

Verify domain setting for ETH1 port client matches the domain setting for the master. Check ETH1 port client domain setting with “show ptp client config eth1” command for the port.

Check sync-limit and delay-limit settings of ETH1 client with show ptp client config eth1 command. If max allowable rates of client are more than those of

master, use the set ptp client config

eth1 command to decrease rates to be less than or meet rate values for master.

Or increase rate settings for master to a value more than or equal to settings of

ETH1 client port.

Verify profile settings for master match the client.

256 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Table 5-2. Troubleshooting Symptoms

Symptom

Upgrading firmware retrieving file failed

System in Holdover

GNSS not tracking

(GNSS LED is Amber)

Probable Cause

Firewall set to “Block” for

FTP or SCP

FTP/SCP server file path configured incorrectly

User name / password

Passive (PASV) FTP mode being used.

Using Up and Left arrows to move the cursor in terminal program

Upgrading firmware failed Flash memory failed

No visible satellites

Wrong antenna type, cable length, or power level into GNSS port

Troubleshooting Procedure /

Corrective Action

Use show firewall command to check

firewall settings.

Use set firewall

command to change firewall settings.

Ensure that the file name and path in the command line string exactly matches the file name, including extension name, and path to the upgrade file.

Verify that the user name and password for the FTP/SCP server is correct. Retry upgrading firmware.

Enable active mode on FTP server. The

TimeProvider 2700 only supports active

FTP.

Linux, Windows, and other third-party FTP servers can be used in the upgrade process of the TP 2300/2700.

Some terminal programs produce unreadable characters when using the Up and Left arrow buttons to retrieve and modify previous commands. Type commands in directly with alpha-numeric keys.

Retry upgrade. If upgrade fails again, contact Symmetricom.

Check if GNSS is set to auto or manual

using set gnss command. If set to

manual, verify that latitude and longitude settings are correct. Try setting GNSS to

auto mode with set gnss command.

Check GPS/GLONASS antenna for approved power ratings, cabling for approved lengths, and actual power level into GNSS port. The GPS/GLONASS engine requires a gain at the antenna connector input of the chassis to be between 15 dB and 30 dB.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 257

Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Table 5-2. Troubleshooting Symptoms

Symptom Probable Cause

Troubleshooting Procedure /

Corrective Action

Check connection for T1/E1 input System in Holdover

Not tracking T1/E1 Input

(GNSS LED is OFF)

Loss of Signal (LOS) of

E1 Input

Alarm Indication Signal

(AIS)

Out of Frame (OOF)

Signal amplitude level

Check T1/E1 input source

Check T1/E1 input source

Check T1/E1 input source

Check T1/E1 input source

Check cables

System stays in warm-up Warm-up still in progress Typical warm-up time is:

Rubidium 9 minutes

Note: Warm-up times may vary based on environmental conditions and other factors.

Diagnosing the TP 2300/2700

Reading LED Conditions

Table 5-3 shows the function of the LED indicators on the front panel of the unit.

Table 5-3. LED Conditions

Indicator

Power

Indicator

Label Description

POWER Green - Power available

Off - Power not available

Corrective Action n/a

Check power supply

See Table 5-2 ,“No LED lit ” for

probable causes and more corrective actions.

258 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Table 5-3. LED Conditions (Continued)

Indicator

-48V A-Bus

A-Bus Battery

Indicator

Label Description

PWR A Off - A-Bus power Off

-48V B-Bus

B-Bus Battery

Indicator

Green - A-Bus power On

PWR B Off - B-Bus power Off

Clock Status

Corrective Action

Check power level from power supply to power A.

Check connections to primary power A.

Check ground connections.

Check A fuse on the branch over-current protection unit, and replace if it is blown.

n/a

Check power level from power supply to power module B.

Check connections to primary power module B.

Check ground connections.

Green - B-Bus power On

CLOCK Green - operating normally

Flashing Green - Time or

Frequency clock in Fast

Lock or Recovery state

Amber - Time or Frequency clock in Freerun or Holdover state

Check B fuse on the branch over-current protection unit, and replace if it is blown.

n/a n/a

Use show alarm

command to view alarm IDs and descriptions.

Flashing Amber - Warmup state

See Table 5-2 or

Table A-1

in

Appendix A, System

Messages

for corrective actions. n/a

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 259

Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Table 5-3. LED Conditions (Continued)

Indicator

Alarm/fault indicator

GNSS Status

GNSS engine status indicator

Label Description

ALARM Off - Operating normally

Amber - Minor Alarm(s)

GNSS

Red - Major/Critical Alarm(s)

Corrective Action n/a

Use show alarm command to view alarm IDs and descriptions.

See Table A-1 in

Appendix A,

System Messages for

corrective actions.

Use show alarm command to view alarm IDs and descriptions.

See Table A-1 in

Appendix A,

System Messages for

corrective actions. After taking corrective actions, use “reboot” command.

n/a Green - GNSS engine/interface is operating normally

Amber - GNSS engine is not tracking satellite

Use show alarm command to view alarm IDs and descriptions.

Red - GNSS Hardware alarm or antenna fault

Off - GNSS is disabled

See Table 5-2 or

Table A-1

in

Appendix A, System

Messages

for corrective actions.

Use show gnss status command to see detected satellites and their signal levels.

Use show alarm command to view alarm IDs and descriptions.

See Table A-1 in

Appendix A,

System Messages for

corrective actions.

This LED should only be OFF if the TP 2700 is not using GNSS.

If GNSS is being used and the light is off, contact support.

260 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Table 5-3. LED Conditions (Continued)

Indicator

Ethernet

Management

Port

LEDs on the

Ethernet connector

Ethernet Port 1

ETH1 port link/activity indicator

Label

MGMT

ETH1

S1

Description

Left Amber Flash - Activity

Left Off - No Activity

Right Green - Link has been established

Right Off - Link has not been established

Green - Link has been established

Off - Link has not been established

Corrective Action n/a n/a n/a

Check cable and connections n/a

Check the cable connections and

SFP connections.

Verify that interface is enabled. with

set ip

config command.

Verify that SFP connector models are recommended and supported.

Check that either Ethernet Auto

Negotiation is enabled or that speed has been set to a compatible level with the connecting network element with

show ethernet command.

Make sure that only full-duplex network devices are used. The

TP 2300/2700 does not support half-duplex devices, such as hubs, for PTP connections.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 261

Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Table 5-3. LED Conditions (Continued)

Indicator

Ethernet Port 1

ETH1 port link/activity indicator

Label

ETH1

R1

Description

Left Amber On or Flashing -

100M link has been established or is active

Corrective Action n/a

Right Green On or Flashing -

1000M link has been established or is active

Left Amber Off - 100M link has not been established

Check the cable connections.

Right Green Off - 1000M link has not been established

Verify that interface is enabled.

with set ip

config command.

Check that either Ethernet Auto

Negotiation is enabled or that speed has been set to a compatible level with the connecting network element with

show ethernet

command.

Make sure that only full-duplex network devices are used. The

TP 2300/2700 does not support half-duplex devices, such as hubs, for PTP connections.

262 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Table 5-3. LED Conditions (Continued)

Indicator

Ethernet Port 2

ETH2 port link/activity indicator

Label

ETH2

S2

Description

Green - Link has been established

Off - Link has not been established

Corrective Action n/a

Check the cable connections and

SFP connections.

Verify that interface is enabled with

set ip

config

command.

Verify that SFP connector models are recommended and supported.

Check that either Ethernet Auto

Negotiation is enabled or that speed has been set to a compatible level with the connecting network element with

show ethernet

command.

Make sure that only full-duplex network devices are used. The

TP 2300/2700 does not support half-duplex devices, such as hubs, for PTP connections.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 263

Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Repairing the TimeProvider 2300/2700

Table 5-3. LED Conditions (Continued)

Indicator

Ethernet Port 2

ETH2 port link/activity indicator

Label

ETH2

R2

Description

Left Amber On or Flashing -

100M link has been established or is active

Right Green On or Flashing -

1000M link has been established or is active

Corrective Action n/a

Left Amber Off - 100M link has not been established

Check the cable connections.

Right Green Off - 1000M link has not been established

Verify that interface is enabled.

with show ip

config

command

Check that either Ethernet Auto

Negotiation is enabled or that speed has been set to a compatible level with the connecting network element with

show ethernet command.

Make sure that only full-duplex network devices are used. The

TP 2300/2700 does not support half-duplex devices, such as hubs, for PTP connections.

Repairing the TimeProvider 2300/2700

The TimeProvider 2300/2700 cannot be repaired in the field.

There are no field-serviceable fuses in the TimeProvider 2700. If a fuse blows in a

TimeProvider 2700, the unit must be returned to the factory for repair.

264 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Upgrading the Firmware

Upgrading the Firmware

You can upgrade the firmware using CLI commands and software available from

Symmetricom. Only users with Admin level access can execute the upgrade command. The command places the TP 2300/2700 in the firmware download mode and prevents all other sessions from making changes to the configuration. During

the upgrade process, no new sessions are allowed. Refer to Chapter 3, CLI

Commands

and the command upgrade , on page 170 for details on the upgrade

process.

Upon receipt of any new/repaired equipment, perform the relevant software upgrade procedure below prior to putting the shelf into service.

Caution: To avoid a possible service call, do not issue a command to the TimeProvider 2300/2700 during an upgrade and do not remove power from the TimeProvider 2300/2700 during an upgrade. Doing so could corrupt the flash memory, disabling the TimeProvider

2300/2700.

Note: Linux, Windows, and other third-party FTP servers can be used in the upgrade process of the TP 2300/2700.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 265

Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Upgrading the Firmware

TP 2300/2700 Upgrade

This method is the easiest and quickest upgrade method, but there will be Loss of

Service (LOS) at reboot. The upgrade will take approximately 7 minutes to complete. The TP 2300/2700 must be rebooted after it has been upgraded for the new version of firmware to take effect.

1. Verify that SSH or telnet connection to the TP 2300/2700 is available

2. Upgrade using the command " upgrade <filepath> [ftp: | scp:]

<ftp-ip-address> <username> "

Note: The FTP firewall is set to “Block” by default. Use the following command to set the MGMT firewall to “Allow” for telnet communications: set firewall mgmt ftp allow

Note: The TimeProvider 2700 only supports active FTP; it does not support passive (PASV) mode.

3. Enter the password for the server when prompted.

4. Enter “Yes” when queried if you want to reboot the system after the firmware is upgraded.

5. Verify that the TimeProvider 2700 is running correctly by issuing commands

" show status ", " show alarm ", and " show inventory ". If the system is showing an alarm for a setting that is disabled, re-enable and disable that setting and the alarm will be cleared.

Note: Configuration changes made after the upgrade but before the reboot will not be available after the reboot. The configuration after reboot will be the same as that immediately after the upgrade.

Example:

To upgrade the TimeProvider 2300/2700 using the upgrade file path of

“/symm/TimeProvider_EdgeMaster/current_upd”, FTP server IP address

192.168.5.56, username: “bob321”, Password: “bob1231”.

TP2700> upgrade /symm/TimeProvider_EdgeMaster/current_upd ftp:192.168.5.56 bob321 < enter >

Password: bob123! < enter >

266 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

TimeProvider 2300/2700 Part Numbers

TimeProvider 2300/2700 Part Numbers

The following sections provide part numbers for the system, accessories, and

GNSS antenna kits.

System and Accessory Part Numbers

This section provides part numbers and descriptions for the system and accessories available for the TimeProvider 2300/2700. Also available as separately ordered items are 23-inch (58.42 cm) rack mounting adapters and 21-inch (ETSI) rack

mounting adapters. See Table 5-4 for TP 2300 component part numbers. See

Table

5-5

for TP 2700 component part numbers. See Table 5-6 for accessories.

Table 5-4. TP 2300 Component Part Numbers

Item Part Number

Base Units

I ncludes 8 PTP Output Clients, PTP (Input), Sync-E (Input/Output), 10 MHz/1PPS

(Output), TOD (Output), and 19" rack mount kit. T1/E1 support available via SW license.

TP 2300 Boundary Clock, DC, OCXO, 8 Clients

TP 2300 Boundary Clock, DC, Rubidium, 8 Clients

TP 2300 Boundary Clock, AC, OCXO, 8 Clients

TP 2300 Boundary Clock, AC, Rubidium, 8 Clients

090-50240-101

090-50240-102

090-50240-201

090-50240-202

Installation and Rack Mounting Adaptor Kits

21-inch (ETSI) Bracket Rack Mounting Adaptor Kit

23-inch (58.42 cm) Bracket Rack Mounting Adaptor Kit

093-00011-000

093-00012-000

Software Licenses

TP 2300 License - Enable TDM (E1/T1)

TP 2300 License - Default L3 Multicast Profile

TP 2300 License - 8 to 16 PTP Output Clients

TP 2300 License - 8 to 32 PTP Output Clients

TP 2300 License - 8 to 64 PTP Output Clients

TP 2300 License - 16 to 32 PTP Output Clients

920-50260-102

920-50260-103

920-50260-016

920-50260-032

920-50260-064

920-50260-132

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 267

Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

TimeProvider 2300/2700 Part Numbers

Table 5-4. TP 2300 Component Part Numbers (Continued)

Item

TP 2300 License - 16 to 64 PTP Output Clients

TP 2300 License - 32 to 64 PTP Output Clients

Part Number

920-50260-164

920-50260-264

Note: The TP2700 Grand Master does not include PTP Input

Reference License (ordered separately).

Table 5-5. TP 2700 Component Part Numbers

Item Part Number

Base Configuration

I ncludes 8 PTP Output Clients, Sync-E (Input/Output), integrated high performance

GNSS receiver (GPS or GLONASS), 10 MHz/1PPS (Output), TOD (Output), 19" rack mount kit. T1/E1 support available via SW license.

TP 2700 PTP Grandmaster, DC, GNSS, OCXO, 8 Clients

TP 2700 PTP Grandmaster, DC, GNSS, Rubidium, 8 Clients

TP 2700 PTP Grandmaster, AC, GNSS, OCXO, 8 Clients

TP 2700 PTP Grandmaster, AC, GNSS, Rubidium, 8 Clients

090-50201-111

090-50201-112

090-50201-211

090-50201-212

Software Licenses

TP 2700 License - PTP Input Reference

TP 2700 License - Concurrent GNSS (GPS & GLONASS)

TP 2700 License - Enable TDM (E1/T1)

TP 2700 License - Default L3 Multicast Profile

TP 2700 License - 8 to 16 PTP Output Clients

TP 2700 License - 8 to 32 PTP Output Clients

TP 2700 License - 8 to 64 PTP Output Clients

TP 2700 License - 16 to 32 PTP Output Clients

TP 2700 License - 16 to 64 PTP Output Clients

TP 2700 License - 32 to 64 PTP Output Clients

920-50220-010

920-50220-100

920-50220-102

920-50220-103

920-50220-016

920-50220-032

920-50220-064

920-50220-132

920-50220-164

920-50220-264

268 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

TimeProvider 2300/2700 Part Numbers

Table 5-6. Accessories

Item

Optical 1000 Base-LX Single-Mode Ethernet 1310nm SFP

Transceiver

Optical 1000 Base-SX Multi-Mode Ethernet 850nm SFP

Transceiver

TP 21-inch Rack Mount Adaptor Kit

TP 23-inch Rack Mount Adaptor Kit

AC Power Cable, US Connector

AC Power Cable, UK Connector

AC Power Cable, EU Connector

TP GNSS Adapter Cable 1.2M SMA(M) TYPE-N(F)

Part Number

121-20621-10-2

121-20621-11-2

093-00011-000

093-00012-000

160-00004-02

160-00004-03

161-30307-00-2

060-00039-000

GNSS Antenna

Table 5-7 lists the GNSS antenna kits. GNSS Antenna Kits include: a High

Performance GNSS (GPS/GLONASS) L1 Antenna, a Coaxial Lightning Surge

Suppressor, two outdoor rated Type N Coax Cables, and an SMA-to-Type N adapter cable (PN: 060-00039-000).

Table 5-7. GNSS Antenna Kits

Antenna Kit

TP 2700 GNSS (GPS/GLONASS) Antenna Kit, 20 meter

TP 2700 GNSS (GPS/GLONASS) Antenna Kit, 40 meter

TP 2700 GNSS (GPS/GLONASS) Antenna Kit, 70 meter

TP 2700 GNSS (GPS/GLONASS) Antenna Kit, 150 meter

TP 2700 GNSS (GPS/GLONASS) Antenna Kit, 230 meter

Part Number

990-13180-020

990-13180-040

990-13180-070

990-13180-150

990-13180-230

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 269

Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Returning the TimeProvider 2300/2700

Returning the TimeProvider 2300/2700

You should return the equipment to Symmetricom only after you have exhausted the troubleshooting procedures described earlier in this chapter, or if Symmetricom

Global Services has advised you to return the unit.

Note: Please retain the original packaging for re-shipping the product. If the original packaging is not available, contact

Symmetricom Global Services (SGS) for assistance.

Repacking the Unit

Return all units in the original packaging. If the original packaging is not available, contact Symmetricom Global Services. Use standard packing procedures for products being returned for repair to protect the equipment during shipment.

Connectors should be protected with connector covers or the equipment should be wrapped in plastic before packaging. Ensure that the display and connectivity panels are protected when packaged.

Equipment Return Procedure

To return equipment to Symmetricom for repair:

1. Call Symmetricom Global Services (SGS) at 888-367-7966 (toll-free in USA only), 408-428-7907, or +49 700 3288 6435 in Europe, Middle East, or Africa to obtain a return material authorization number (RMA) before returning the product for service.

You can request an RMA on the internet at www.symmetricom.com/Support/req_repair.htm

.

Retain the assigned RMA number for future reference.

2. Provide a description of the problem, product item number, serial number, and warranty expiration date.

3. Provide the return shipping information (customer field contact, address, telephone number, and so forth.)

4. Ship the product to Symmetricom, transportation prepaid and insured, with the

Return Material Authorization (RMA) number and item numbers or part numbers clearly marked on the outside of the container to the address given with the RMA.

Repaired equipment is returned to you with shipping costs prepaid by

Symmetricom.

270 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

User’s Guide Updates

User’s Guide Updates

When this manual is updated the updated version will be available for downloading from Symmetricom’s internet web site. Manuals are provided in PDF format for ease of use. After downloading, you can view the manual on a computer or print it using

Adobe Acrobat Reader.

Manual updates are available at: www.symmetricom.com

Note: If you are downloading a product manual for the first time, you will need to register with Symmetricom for a username and password.

If you are currently registered, login and download the manual update.

Contacting Technical Support

To order any accessory, contact the Symmetricom Sales Department. See http://www.symmetricom.com/company/contact-information/sales-offices for sales support contact information. If you encounter any difficulties installing or using the product, contact Symmetricom Global Services:

North and South America and all countries not listed below :

Symmetricom, Inc.

2300 Orchard Parkway

San Jose, CA 95131-1017

Toll-free in North America: 1-888-367-7966

Telephone: 408-428-7907

Fax: 408-428-7998 email: [email protected]

Internet: www.symmetricom.com

Europe, Middle East, and Africa (EMEA)

Symmetricom Global Services EMEA

Altlaufstrasse 42

85635 Hoehenkirchen-Siegertsbrunn

Germany

Telephone: +49 700 3288 6435

Fax: +49 8102 8961 533

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 271

Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Contacting Technical Support

E-mail: [email protected]

[email protected]

South Asia:

Suite A201, 2nd Floor, West Wing,

Wisma Consplant 2, No. 7,

Jalan SS16/1, 47500 Subang Jaya

Selangor, Malaysia

Toll-free in North America: 1-888-367-7966

Telephone: 408-428-7907

E-mail: [email protected]

India

GLOBAL BUSINESS PARK (Tower B)

Unit No. 707, 7th Floor

Mehrauli Gurgaon Road, Sector 26, Gurgaon – 122 002, Haryana

Telephone: +91 124 4861717

E-mail: [email protected]

272 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Appendix A System Messages

This section provides information about the system messages that are displayed in response to a provisioning event or to an alarm that occurs when an associated threshold or timer is outside of the provisioned setting.

In This Appendix

Message Provisioning

System Notification Messages

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 273

Appendix A System Messages

Message Provisioning

Message Provisioning

The TimeProvider 2300/2700 and its expansion shelves support logging of events using syslog defined facility and severity codes and system defined facility codes as follows:

Facility codes

4 Security/authorization messages

20 TimeProvider 2300/2700 Messages (events and alarms)

21 TimeProvider 2300/2700 Command History

22 TimeProvider 2300/2700 Messages (events and alarms)

Severity codes

2 (critical) Critical: critical conditions

3 (major) Error: error conditions

4 (minor) Warning: warning conditions

5 (event) Notice: normal but significant condition

Notes: Severity codes 2, 3, and 4, are also indicated by the Alarm

LED(s) on the front panel.

The syslog message format is as follows:

Mmm dd hh:mm:ss host_name Process-name AlarmID,Index,Severity, MsgText

Where:

Mmm = Month; dd = date; hh:mm:ss = system time host_name = hostname process-name = alarmd

AlarmID = 000 thru Max_AlarmID

Index = 0 thru 155

Severity = Event | Minor | Major | Critical (defined by severity code)

MsgText = (see tables)

274 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Appendix A System Messages

System Notification Messages

Syslog messages are stored according to facility code and/or severity:

Syslog messages with facility code 4 are stored in the Security Log.

Syslog messages with facility code 20 and a severity of 2 | 3 | 4 are stored in the

Alarm Log.

Syslog messages with facility code 20 and a severity of 5 are stored in the Event

Log.

Syslog messages with facility code 21 are stored in the Command Log.

Syslog messages with facility code 22 are not stored in the TP 2300/2700. They can be forwarded to the remote syslog server.

System Notification Messages

Table A-1 provides a list of system notification messages. These messages are

logged and sent to a remote syslog server if configured. Alarms will also generate an SNMP trap. See

Table A-2

for secondary index values, where applicable.

Notes: Transitory Events represent transitions that are short-lived, such as when GNSS is selected as the Time reference (ID 024) or when the SSM for the SYNCE/T1E1 input changes (ID 032).

Table A-1. System Notification Messages

Description

Entered time/frequency warm-up state

Event

ID

001

Msg

Level

Minor

Transitory

No

MsgText Corrective Action

Entered time/frequency warm-up state

No action required

Entered time/frequency free-run state

002 Minor

Transitioned out of warm-up state

No Entered time/frequency free-run state

No action required

No action required

Transitioned out of free-run state No action required

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 275

Appendix A System Messages

System Notification Messages

Table A-1. System Notification Messages (Continued)

Description

Entered time/frequency fast-track state

Entered time/frequency normal-track state

Entered time/frequency bridging state

Entered time/frequency holdover state

Event

ID

003

Msg

Level

Event

Transitory

MsgText

No Entered time/frequency fast-track state

Corrective Action

No action required

004

005

Event

Event

Transitioned out of fast-track state

No Entered time/frequency normal-track state

No action required

No action required

Transitioned out of normal-track state

No Entered time/frequency bridging state

No action required

No action required

006 Minor

Transitioned out of bridging state

No Entered time/frequency holdover state

No action required

Check input references

Check configuration for correct reference selection

Check reference status

Check ref configuration for

Priority and PQL values. See

Show

REF

command.

Entered time/frequency holdover recovery state

008 Minor

Transitioned out of holdover state

No Entered time/frequency holdover recovery state

No action required

No action required

Transitioned out of holdover recovery state

No action required

276 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Appendix A System Messages

System Notification Messages

Table A-1. System Notification Messages (Continued)

Description

GNSS/SYNCE/PTP

/T1E1 Input Poor

Quality

Event

ID

021

Msg

Level

Minor

Transitory

MsgText

No GNSS/SYNCE/PTP/T1E1

Input Poor Quality

Corrective Action

If this persists for

> 1hr check input reference.

For GNSS check signal quality.

For PTP check PTP input Status

For T1/E1 check T1 or E1 status

GNSS/PTP input time qualified

022 Event

Input poor quality cleared No action required

No GNSS/PTP input time qualified

No action required

Exit Input Time qualified cleared

No action required

No GNSS/SYNCE/PTP/T1E1 input frequency qualified

No action required GNSS/SYNCE/PTP

/T1E1 input frequency qualified

023 Event

Input frequency qualified No action required

GNSS/PTP input selected as time reference

024 Event Yes GNSS/PTP input selected as time reference

No action required

GNSS/SYNCE/PTP

/T1E1 input selected as frequency reference

025 Event n/a n/a

Yes GNSS/SYNCE/PTP/T1E1 input selected as frequency reference

No action required n/a n/a

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 277

Appendix A System Messages

System Notification Messages

Table A-1. System Notification Messages (Continued)

Description

T1E1 Input LOSS

OF SIGNAL (LOS)

Event

ID

026

Msg

Level

Minor

Transitory

MsgText

No T1E1 Input LOSS OF

SIGNAL (LOS)

Corrective Action

Check if cable is securely connected.

Check signal source is present and configured properly.

T1E1 Input ALARM

INDICATION

SIGNAL (AIS)

027 Minor

E1T1 Input LOSS OF

SIGNAL cleared

No T1E1 Input ALARM

INDICATION SIGNAL

(AIS)

No action required

Check alarm condition and frame format of input source signal in T1/E1 port.

T1E1 Input OUT OF

FRAME (OOF)

028 Minor

T1E1 Input ALARM

INDICATION SIGNAL cleared

No T1E1 Input OUT OF

FRAME (OOF)

No action required

Check frame format of input source signal in

T1/E1 port. It should match with the input configuration for the port.

T1E1 Input CRC

ERROR (CRC)

029 Minor

E1T1 Input OUT OF

FRAME cleared No action required

No T1E1 Input CRC ERROR

(CRC)

Enable CRC in input source signal, or disable

CRC in TimeProvider

2300/2700 T1/E1 input port.

T1E1 Input

BIPOLAR

VIOLATION (BPV)

030 Minor

E1T1 Input CRC ERROR cleared No action required

No T1E1 Input BIPOLAR

VIOLATION (BPV)

Check input source signal or the connection cable.

278 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide

E1T1 Input BIPOLAR

VIOLATION cleared No action required

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Appendix A System Messages

System Notification Messages

Table A-1. System Notification Messages (Continued)

Description

T1E1 Input

FREQUENCY

ERROR

Event

ID

031

Msg

Level

Minor

Transitory

MsgText Corrective Action

No T1E1 Input FREQUENCY

ERROR

Not supported at this time.

SYNCE/T1E1 input

SSM changed

032 Event

E1T1 Input FREQUENCY

ERROR cleared

No action required

Yes SYNCE/E1T1 input SSM changed

No action required

INCOMPATIBLE

TRANSPORT

TYPE

051 Minor n/a

No INCOMPATIBLE

TRANSPORT TYPE n/a

PTP input lost 052 Minor

INCOMPATIBLE

TRANSPORT TYPE cleared

No PTP INPUT LOST

No action required

Check Ethernet connection.

Check PTP input configuration

Check that PTP

Master is functioning

053 Event

PTP INPUT LOST cleared

Yes PTP master switched

No action required

Check Status of configured masters.

PTP master switched

PTP input time/frequency not traceable

054 Event n/a

No PTP input time/frequency not traceable n/a

PTP INPUT NOT

TRACEABLE cleared

No action required

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 279

Appendix A System Messages

System Notification Messages

Table A-1. System Notification Messages (Continued)

Description

PTP server exceeded # percent of client limit on

ETH2

Event

ID

071

Msg

Level

Minor

Transitory

MsgText

No PTP server exceeded # percent of client limit on

ETH2

Corrective Action

Buy additional client licenses

PTP client xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx: xx dropped from

ETH2 client list

072 Event

PTP server near packet limit cleared

No action required

Yes PTP client xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx dropped from ETH2 client list

Check configuration on Client device

Check both physical and IP connectivity on ETH2.

Check that client devices have unique clock ID's

PTP client xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx: xx added to ETH2 client list

073 Event

PTP client list on

ETH2 refreshed n/a

Yes PTP client xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx added to ETH2 client list n/a

No action required

074 Event n/a

Yes PTP client list on ETH2 refreshed n/a

No action required

PTP state changed to disabled on ETH2

075 Event n/a

Yes PTP state changed to disabled on ETH2

No action required

Check if you deleted the

PTP license or disabled

PTP.

PTP state changed to listening on ETH2

076 Event n/a

Yes PTP state changed to listening on ETH2 n/a

No action required n/a n/a

280 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Appendix A System Messages

System Notification Messages

Table A-1. System Notification Messages (Continued)

Description

PTP state changed to master on ETH2

Event

ID

077

Msg

Level

Event

Transitory

MsgText

Yes PTP state changed to master on ETH2

Corrective Action

No action required

PTP state changed to passive on ETH2

078 Event n/a

Yes PTP state changed to passive on ETH2 n/a

Another master has been selected because of better quality.

GNSS receiver communications failed

GNSS receiver not tracking satellite

091 Minor

092 Minor n/a n/a

No GNSS receiver communications failed

Reboot

If problem persists call SGS for support.

GNSS receiver communications failure cleared

No GNSS receiver not tracking satellite

No action required

Check Antenna installation

Check if Antenna cable is connected properly.

Installation should conform to the guidelines as described in

Appendix C.

GNSS receiver not tracking satellite cleared No action required

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 281

Appendix A System Messages

System Notification Messages

Table A-1. System Notification Messages (Continued)

Description

GNSS signal low

Event

ID

093

Msg

Level

Minor

Transitory

MsgText

No GNSS signal low

Corrective Action

Check Antenna installation

Check if Antenna cable is connected properly.

Installation should conform to the guidelines as described in

Appendix C.

GNSS antenna voltage out of range

(#)

094 Major

GNSS signal normal

No GNSS antenna voltage out of range (#)

No action required

Check for short circuit in the antenna cable.

GNSS antenna current out of range

(#)

095 Major

GNSS antenna short-circuit

GNSS antenna voltage out of range cleared

No GNSS antenna current out of range (#)

No action required

Not supported at this time.

096 Minor

GNSS antenna current out of range cleared

No action required

No GNSS antenna short-circuit

Check for short circuit in the antenna cable.

GNSS antenna open-circuit

097 Minor No

GNSS antenna short-circuit cleared

GNSS antenna open-circuit

No action required

Check for Antenna not connected or AC coupled splitter. If using a splitter you must at least draw

10mA of current from the

TP2700. This can be achieved by adding a 50 ohm termination.

GNSS antenna open-circuit cleared

No action required

282 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Appendix A System Messages

System Notification Messages

Table A-1. System Notification Messages (Continued)

Description

Ethernet port link down

Event

ID

111

Msg

Level

Minor

Transitory

MsgText

No Ethernet port ETH# link down

Corrective Action

Check cable.

Check the box the interface is connected to.

Check

Auto-negotiation.

Excessive traffic on port ETH{1|2}

Unsupported SFP on ETH{1|2}

112

113

Minor

Minor

Power out of range 131 Critical

Ethernet port link down cleared

No Excessive traffic on port

ETH#

No action required

Check traffic level on network

Check for intrusion attempts.

Check broadcast traffic.

(See Footnote 1)

Excessive traffic cleared on Ethernet port

No action required

No Unsupported SFP on

ETH#

Copper SFP's are not supported and will generate this alarm.

Replace SFP with

Symmetricomapproved optical

SFP listed in User

Guide

Unsupported SFP cleared on Ethernet port No action required

No +1.2V out of range

(1.0)/-5.0V out of range

(#V)/

If alarm persists power cycle/reboot

Call SGS support if it persists after reboot/power cycle.

Power out of range cleared

No action required

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 283

Appendix A System Messages

System Notification Messages

Table A-1. System Notification Messages (Continued)

Description

Event

ID

Msg

Level

Operational Failure: 132 Critical

Transitory

MsgText

No Operational failure: 1PPS interrupt. GNSS upgrade failure after the 1PPS interrupt.

Corrective Action

If alarm persists power cycle/reboot

Call SGS support if it persists after reboot/power cycle.

Battery(-48V)-A failure

133 Major

Operational failure cleared

No Battery(-48V)-A failure

No action required

Check power connections and external

DC supply that is supplying DC power to your unit

Battery(-48V)-B failure

134 Major

Battery(-48V)-A failure cleared

No Battery(-48V)-B failure

No action required

Check power connections and external

DC supply that is supplying DC power to your unit

FPGA failure

Flash partition failure

135 Critical

Battery(-48V)-B failure cleared n/a FPGA failure

No action required

If alarm persists power cycle/reboot

Call SGS support if it persists after reboot/power cycle.

136 Critical

FPGA failure cleared

No Flash partition failure

No action required

Not supported at this time

Flash partition failure cleared

No action required

284 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Appendix A System Messages

System Notification Messages

Table A-1. System Notification Messages (Continued)

Description

PLL synthesizer unlock

Event

ID

Msg

Level

137 Critical

Transitory

MsgText

No PLL synthesizer unlock

Corrective Action

If alarm persists power cycle/reboot

Call SGS support if it persists after reboot/power cycle.

Rubidium unlock 138 Critical

PLL unlock cleared

No Rubidium unlock

No action required

If alarm persists power cycle/reboot

Call SGS support if it persists after reboot/power cycle.

Temperature out of range

139 Minor

Rubidium unlock cleared No action required

No Temperature out of range Check your operating environment.

Production configuration data error

151 Critical

Temperature out of range cleared

No action required

No Production configuration data error

If alarm persists power cycle/reboot

Call SGS support if it persists after reboot/power cycle.

Time Line has been

Changed

152 Event

Production configuration data error cleared

No action required

Yes Time Line has been

Changed

No action required

Phase Has Been

Aligned

153 Event n/a n/a

Yes Phase Has Been Aligned No action required n/a n/a

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 285

Appendix A System Messages

System Notification Messages

Table A-1. System Notification Messages (Continued)

Description

System log time has been updated

Event

ID

154

Msg

Level

Event

Transitory

MsgText Corrective Action

Yes System log time has been updated

Not supported at this time

System reboot 155 Event Yes n/a

System reboot n/a

No action required n/a n/a

1.

The excessive traffic alarm is set if the count of Ethernet packets received in one second exceeds a threshold. All traffic received by the TP2700 Ethernet ports is counted, such as ARP, ICMP, IGMP, PTP unicast signaling, multicast, and PTP management messages.

Threshold:

1200 packets/sec for each port

Table A-2. Secondary Index Descriptions for System Notification Messages

Event

ID

001

002

003

004

005

006

007

008

Description

Entered time/frequency warm-up state

Entered time/frequency free-run state

Entered time/frequency fast-track state

Entered time/frequency normal-track state

Entered time/frequency bridging state

Entered time/frequency holdover state

Entered time/frequency extended holdover state

Entered time/frequency holdover recovery state

Secondary

Index

0 - 1

0 - 1

0 - 1

0 - 1

0 - 1

0 - 1

0 - 1

0 - 1

Secondary Index

Description

0=time

1=freq

0=time

1=freq

0=time

1=freq

0=time

1=freq

0=time

1=freq

0=time

1=freq

0=time

1=freq

0=time

1=freq

286 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Appendix A System Messages

System Notification Messages

Table A-2. Secondary Index Descriptions for System Notification Messages

Event

ID

021

Description

GNSS/SYNCE/PTP/T1E1 Input

Poor Quality

Secondary

Index

0 - 3

022

023

GNSS/PTP input time qualified

GNSS/SYNCE/PTP/T1E1 input frequency qualified

024

025

GNSS/PTP input selected as time reference

GNSS/SYNCE/PTP/T1E1 input selected as frequency reference

032

051

052

053

054

026

027

028

029

030

031

T1E1 Input LOSS OF SIGNAL

(LOS)

T1E1 Input ALARM INDICATION

SIGNAL (AIS)

T1E1 Input OUT OF FRAME

(OOF)

T1E1 Input CRC ERROR (CRC)

T1E1 Input BIPOLAR VIOLATION

(BPV)

T1E1 Input FREQUENCY

ERROR

SYNCE/T1E1 input SSM changed

INCOMPATIBLE TRANSPORT

TYPE

PTP input lost

PTP master switched

PTP input time/frequency not traceable

0, 2

0 - 3

0, 2

0 - 3 n/a n/a n/a

0 - 1

3

3

3

3

3

3

1, 3

Secondary Index

Description

0=GNSS

1=SYNCE

2=PTP

3=T1E1

0=GNSS

2=PTP

0=GNSS

1=SYNCE

2=PTP

3=T1E1

0=GNSS

2=PTP

0=GNSS

1=SYNCE

2=PTP

3=T1E1

3=T1E1

3=T1E1

3=T1E1

3=T1E1

3=T1E1

3=T1E1

1=SYNCE

3=T1E1 n/a n/a n/a

0=TIME

1=FREQ

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 287

Appendix A System Messages

System Notification Messages

Table A-2. Secondary Index Descriptions for System Notification Messages

074

075

076

077

078

091

Event

ID

071

072

073

092

093

094

095

096

097

111

Description

PTP server exceeded # percent of client limit on ETH2

PTP client xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx dropped from ETH2 client list

PTP client xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx added from ETH2 client list

PTP client list on ETH2 refreshed

PTP state changed to disabled

PTP state changed to listening

PTP state changed to master

PTP state changed to passive

GNSS receiver communications failed

GNSS receiver not tracking satellite

GNSS signal low

GNSS antenna voltage out of range

(#)

GNSS antenna current out of range

(#)

GNSS antenna short-circuit

GNSS antenna open-circuit

Management port link down link down

Secondary

Index

2

2

2

0

0

0

0

0

0

0-2

2

2

0

2

2

2

112

113

131

132

Excessive traffic on port ETH{1|2}

Unsupported SFP on ETH{1|2}

Power out of range

Operational failure: 1PPS interrupt

1-2

1-2

0-3, 6-7

0

Secondary Index

Description

2=ETH2

2=ETH2

2=ETH2

2=ETH2

2=ETH2

2=ETH2

2=ETH2

2=ETH2

0=GNSS

0=gnss

0=gnss

0=gnss

0=gnss

0=gnss

0=gnss

0=mgmt

1=eth1

2=eth2

1=eth1, 2=eth2

1=eth1, 2=eth2

0=+1.2v,

1= - 5.0

2=+2.5v,

3=+3.3v,

6=+1.5V

7= + 5.0V(ocxo)

0-=1pps

288 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Appendix A System Messages

System Notification Messages

Table A-2. Secondary Index Descriptions for System Notification Messages

Event

ID

133

134

135

136

Description

Battery(-48V)-A failure

Battery(-48V)-B failure

FPGA failure

Flash partition failure: fail-fix-control

Secondary

Index n/a n/a n/a

0 - 3

152

153

154

155

137

138

139

151

PLL synthesizer unlock

Rubidium unlock

Temperature out of range

Production configuration data error

Time Line has been Changed

Phase Has Been Aligned

System log time has been updated

System reboot

0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

Secondary Index

Description n/a n/a n/a

0: fail-fix-control

1: fail-fix-config.1

2: fail-fix-config.2

3: fail-fix-pst

0=synthesizer n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 289

Appendix A System Messages

System Notification Messages

290 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

This appendix provides mechanical and electrical specifications and factory defaults for the TimeProvider 2300/2700.

In This Appendix

Specifications

Factory Defaults

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 291

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

Specifications

Specifications

This section provides the specifications for the TimeProvider 2300/2700 input and output signals.

Mechanical

Table B-1. TimeProvider 2300/2700 Mechanical Specifications

Parameter

Mounting

Rack Mounting

Width

Height

Depth

Description

19 in. or 23 in. Rack

For front mounting location unit protrudes 0.77 in /

1.956 cm

See

Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3

for drawings with detailed chassis dimensions.

17.24 in. / 438 mm

1.73 in. / 44 mm; 1 RU

9.3 in. / 237 mm

10.07 in. / 256 mm - including connectors on faceplate

Weight

AC model

DC model

7.6 lb. / 16.72 kg

8.1 lb. / 17.82 kg

Environmental

Table B-2. TimeProvider 2300/2700 Environmental Specifications

Parameter Description

Operating Temperature -40  to 65  C, -40  to 149  F  OCXO [startup > -20  C (-4  F)]

-5  to 55  C, 23  to 131  F  Rubidium oscillator

Storage Temperature -40  to 70  C, -40  to 158  F

Operating Humidity

Acoustic Noise

5% to 95% RH, maximum, w/condensation

0 dBA (negligible due to passive cooling)

292 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

Specifications

Power

TimeProvider 2300/2700 Power Specifications

Parameter

Input Voltage Range

Description

–38.4 VDC to –72.0 VDC or

DC Recommended

Battery Feed Fuse

DC Power - OCXO

90–264 VAC, 50/60 Hz

1.5 A, maximum

Maximum, Warmup

Typical

DC Power - Rubidium

20   W,   417   mA   @  ‐ 48V

17   W,   354   mA   @  ‐ 48V

Maximum, Warmup

Typical

AC Power - OCXO

28   W,   583   mA   @  ‐ 48   V

20   W,   417   mA   @  ‐ 48   V

Maximum, Warmup

Typical

AC Power - Rubidium

43   W,   280   mA   @   120V

37   W,   240   mA   @   120V

Maximum, Warmup

Typical

60   W,   400   mA   @   120V

43   W,   280   mA   @   120V

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 293

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

Specifications

Compliance & Certifications

Table B-3. TimeProvider 2300/2700 Compliance Specifications

Parameter

Safety Certifications

Resistibility ESD

Electrical Fast Transient (EFT)

Radiated Emissions

Conducted Emissions

- AC Voltage & AC/DC Current

Conducted Emissions

- Telecom Ports

Immunity Radiated

Immunity Conducted

EMC Compliance

Description

IEC 60950-1:2005 (Second Edition) + Am

1:2009

EN 60950-1:2006/A11:2009/A1:2010/

A12:2011 CB Scheme

UL60950-1/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1, Second

Edition

EMC Immunity

ETSI: EN 61000-4-2

NEBS: GR-1089-CORE Sec. 2.1

KN 61000-4-2

ETSI: EN 61000-4-4

NEBS: GR-1089-CORE Sec. 2.2

KN 61000-4-4

ETSI: EN 61000-4-3, EN 55022 (CISPR 22): 2010

NEBS: GR-1089-CORE Sec. 3.2.1.1

ETSI: EN 61000-3-2, 61000-3-3, 61000-3-4,

61000-4-5, 61000-4-6, 61000-4-11

EN 55022 (CISPR 22): 2010

NEBS: GR-1089-CORE Sec. 3.2.2.1 & 3.2.2.2

KN 61000-4-5, KH 61000-4-11

VZ.TPR.9205 (TEER) Issue 5, October 2011: 9.0

ETSI: EN 55022 (CISPR 22): 2010

NEBS: GR-1089-CORE Sec. 3.2.3

GR-1089-CORE Sec. 3.3.1

KN 61000-4-3

ETSI: EN 61000-4-6

GR-1089-CORE Sec. 3.3.2 & 3.3.3.1

FCC Part 15 (Class A)

AS/NZS CISPR22 (Class A)

EN55022 (Class A)

KN55022 (Class A)

ICES 003 (Class A)

VCCI, Class A

EU 2004/108/EC Electromagnetic

Compatibility Directive

EN 300 386 Telecommunications Network

Equipment (EMC)

294 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

Specifications

Table B-3. TimeProvider 2300/2700 Compliance Specifications (Continued)

Parameter Description

Environmental Compliance

Low-Temperature Exposure &

Thermal Shock

High Relative Humidity Exposure

Environmental & Physical

EN300-019-2-3, Class T3.2

ETSI EN 300 019-2-2 (1999) - Transportation,

Class T2.3

ETSI EN 019-2-1 (2000) - Storage, Class T1.2

RoHS (6 of 6)

NEBS: GR-63-CORE Sec. 4.1.1.1

NEBS: GR-63-CORE Sec. 4.1.1.2

NEBS: GR-63-CORE Sec. 4.1.1.3

High-Temperature Exposure &

Thermal Shock

Operating Temperature and

Humidity Criteria

NEBS: GR-63-CORE Sec. 4.1.2

Altitude

Temperature Margin Evaluation

Heat Dissipation and Energy

Efficiency (ATIS TEER)

NEBS: GR-63-CORE Sec. 4.1.3

NEBS: GR-63-CORE Sec. 4.1.4

NEBS: GR-63-CORE Sec. 4.1.6

Surface Temperature

Equipment Assembly Fire Tests

NEBS: GR-63-CORE Sec. 4.1.7

NEBS: GR-63-CORE Sec. 4.2.2

Needle Flame NEBS: GR-63-CORE Sec. 4.2.3

Packaged Equipment Shock Criteria NEBS: GR-63-CORE Sec. 4.3.1

NEBS: GR-63-CORE Sec. 4.3.2

Unpackaged Equipment Shock

Criteria

Earthquake Environment and

Criteria

NEBS: GR-63-CORE Sec. 4.4.1

Office Vibration Environment and

Criteria

Transportation Vibration Criteria

NEBS: GR-63-CORE Sec. 4.4.4

NEBS: GR-63-CORE Sec. 4.4.5

NEBS: GR-63-CORE Sec. 4.5.1

Gaseous Contaminants (Indoor

Levels)

Hygroscopic Dust

Illumination

NEBS: GR-63-CORE Sec. 4.5.1

NEBS: GR-63-CORE Sec. 4.7

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 295

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

Specifications

Serial Port

Table B-4. TimeProvider 2300/2700 Serial Port Specifications

Item

Connector Type

Connector Label

Interface

Baud Rate

Data Bits

Parity Bit

Stop Bits

Flow Control

9-pin, female D connector

Craft

RS-232, data terminal equipment (DTE)

57.6 Kbps

8

None

1

None

Description

MGMT Port

Table B-5. TimeProvider 2300/2700 LAN Port Specifications

MGMT

Connector Description

RJ-45 (10/100/1000 Base-T) - Supports telnet sessions and SSH sessions over TCP/IP.

Input Signals

GNSS Receiver

Table B-6. TimeProvider 2700 GNSS Input Signal Specifications

Parameter

Signal Type

Gain

Frequency

Specification

GNSS L1

Between 15 dB and 30 dB, including gain of antenna and loss of cable

GPS: 1575.42 MHz

GLONASS: 1602 MHz

296 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

Specifications

Table B-6. TimeProvider 2700 GNSS Input Signal Specifications (Continued)

Parameter

Impedance

Coupling

Antenna voltage current

Connector Type

Specification

50 ohms

DC (center pin provides DC power to the GNSS antenna or in-line amplifier)

4.5  5.6 V

180 mA (max)

SMA connector, female

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 297

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

Specifications

DS1 Input

Table B-7. TimeProvider 2300/2700 DS1 Input Signal Specifications

Parameter

Signal Type

Impedance

Connector Type

Specification

ANTSI T1.403. G.703 Section 5 Framed T1 or Format: D4, ESF, 1544 kHz

100 ohms

RJ48c, balanced pair (shares with E1)

E1 Input

Table B-8. TimeProvider 2300/2700 E1 Input Signal Specifications

Parameter

Signal Type

Format

Impedance

Connector Type

Specification

G.703 Section 9 Framed E1 or G.703 Section 13 2048 kHz

CAS or CCS, CRC4 enable/disable

120 ohms

RJ48c, balanced pair (shares with DS1)

PTP Input

Table B-9. TimeProvider 2300/2700 PTP Input Signal Specifications

Ports

Parameter

ETH1

Specification

Connector Type

S1

R1

Ethernet Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP)

Optical 1000 Base-X

RJ45, 100/1000 Base-T

PTP Profile Telecom-2008

298 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

Specifications

SyncE Input

Table B-10. TimeProvider 2300/2700 SyncE Input Signal Specifications

Ports

Parameter

ETH1

Specification

Connector Type

S1

R1

Ethernet Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP)

Optical 1000 Base-X

RJ45, 100/1000 Base-T

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 299

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

Specifications

Output Signals

PTP Output

Table B-11. TimeProvider 2300/2700 PTP Input Signal Specifications

Ports

Parameter

ETH2

Specification

Connector Type

S2

R2

Ethernet Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP)

Optical 1000 Base-X

RJ45, 100/1000 Base-T

PTP Profile Telecom-2008

SyncE Output

Table B-12. TimeProvider 2300/2700 SyncE Input Signal Specifications

Ports

Parameter

ETH2

Specification

Connector Type

S2

R2

Ethernet Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP)

Optical 1000 Base-X

RJ45, 100/1000 Base-T

300 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

Specifications

DS1 Output

Table B-13. TimeProvider 2300/2700 DS1 Input Signal Specifications

Parameter

Signal Type

Connector Type

Impedance

Coupling

Extra framing

Specification

ANTSI T1.403. G.703 Section 5 Framed T1 or Format: D4, ESF, 1544 kHz

RJ48c (shares with E1)

100 ohms

Transformer coupled

Isolated pulse for testing

E1 Output

Table B-14. TimeProvider 2300/2700 E1 Output Signal Specifications

Parameter

Type

Connector Type

Impedance

Coupling

Specification

G.703 Section 9 Framed E1 or G.703 Section 13 for 2048 kHz

Format CAS or CCS, CRC4 enable/disable

RJ45 (shares with DS1)

120 ohms

Transformer coupled

1PPS+TOD Output

Table B-15. TimeProvider 2300/2700 1PPS+TOD Output Signal Specifications

Parameter Specification

Port Name TOD

Connector Type

Signal Level

RJ45

RS-422

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 301

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

Specifications

Table B-15. TimeProvider 2300/2700 1PPS+TOD Output Signal Specifications (Continued)

Parameter

Timing Relationship between 1PPS and TOD

Rise Time -1PPS Pulse

Pulse Width

TOD Frame

TOD Transmission Parameters

TOD Message Encoding

Specification

Transmission of a TOD message starts 10 ms

(default) after the rising edge of 1PPS signal, and the transmission is completed within 500

ms, as shown in Figure B-1

. This TOD message indicates the time of the current 1

PPS rising edge, and is sent at a rate of once per second.

50 ns

50 ms

TOD messages use whole 8-bit bytes for transmission, with check sum protection.

Message type and message ID are used to clarify messages. Follows Big Endian convention when a field is longer than one byte, where bit 0 represents the least significant bit

(LSB), and bit 0 of each byte is transmitted first.

See Figure B-2

.

See Table B-16

for TOD frame field descriptions.

Baud Rate: 9600

Parity Check: None

Start Bit: 1 (low level)

Stop Bit: 1 (high level)

Idle Frame:

Data Bits:

High level

8

Binary

Figure B-1. Timing Relationship Between 1PPS and TOD for 1 PPS+TOD Outputs

302 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Figure B-2. TOD China Mobile Frame Structure

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

Specifications

Table B-16. TOD China Mobile Frame Details

Field Name

Sync Char 1

Field Length

1 byte

Sync Char 2

Class

ID

Length

Payload

1 byte

1 byte

1 byte

2 bytes

16 bytes

Description

Part of Frame Header

0x43 = ASCII character “C”

Part of Frame Header

0x4D = ASCII character “M”

Basic classification of TOD China Mobile message

Serial number of TOD China Mobile message

Length of payload only

(Does not include Frame Header, Message Header,

Length Field itself, or FCS)

Contains the message content

See Table B-17 , Table B-18 , and

Table B-19

for Time Message details.

Frame Check

Sequence

(FCS)

1 byte Generating polynomial FCS is:

G(x) = x 8 + x 5 + x 4 +1

Initial value of FCS is set to 0xFF, and there is no need to negate the input data. Checksum calculation uses right-shift calculation, and there is no need to negate the output frame check data. When the frame check sequence is transmitted, the LSB (bit 0) is transmitted first.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 303

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

Specifications

Table B-17. TOD China Mobile Message Details

Message Type

Time Information

Time Status

Class

0x01

0x01

ID

0x20

0x03

Length (bytes)

16

16

Table B-18. TOD China Mobile Time Information Message Payload Contents

Byte Offset

8

10

0

4

11

Data

Type

U4

I4

U2

I1

U1

Name

Time of week (TOW)

Reserved

Week number

LeapS

1PPS status

Unit

s

-

-

-

Notes

GPS Second time of week

Reserved

GPS week (GPS time)

Leap Seconds (GPS-UTC)

0x00 = normal

0x01 = Time sync equipment

(atomic clock) in holdover mode

0x02 = do not use

0x03 = Time sync equipment

(high stability crystal clock) in holdover mode

0x04 = Transport carrier equipment in holdover mode

Other values: reserved

12 U1 TAcc -

13

14

15

U1

U1

U1

304 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

-

-

-

PPS jitter category (0 - 255):

0 = 0 ns

1 = 15 ns

2 = 30 ns

255 = no defined

Note: this value is fixed to 255 for transmission and base station equipment

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

Specifications

Table B-19. TOD China Mobile Time Status Message Payload Contents

Byte Offset

0

Data

Type

U1

Name

Clock source type

Unit

-

1

3

7

8

5

6

12

U2

U2

U1

U1

U1

U4

U4

Status of the clock source

Monitor alarm

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Notes

0x00 = GLONASS

0x01 = GPS

0x02 = 1588

0x03 = others

GPS fix type, range 0 - 3

0x00 = no fix

0x01 = dead reckoning only

0x02 = 2D fix

0x03 = 3D fix

0x04 = GPS + dead reckoning combined

0x05 = reserved

0x06 = tracking (PTP only)

0x07 - 0xff = reserved

Clock source status alarms:

Bit 0: Reserved

Bit 1: Antenna open

Bit 2: Antenna shorted

Bit 3: Not tracking satellites

Bit 4: Reserved

Bit 5: Survey in progress

Bit 6: No stored position

Bit 7: Leap second pending

Bit 8: In test mode

Bit 9: Position is questionable

Bit 10: Reserved

Bit 11: Almanac not complete

Bit 12: Reserved

Note: For GNSS only.

For other references, only bits

1, 2, and 7 are used.

-

-

-

-

-

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 305

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

Specifications

Figure B-3. TOD Cisco Message Frame Structure and Details

Note: The Cisco TOD message format reports leap second using

TAI-UTC. The China Mobile TOD message reports GPS leap seconds using GPS-UTC.

306 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

Specifications

10 MHz Output

Table B-20. TimeProvider 2300/2700 10 MHz Output Signal Specifications

Parameter

Signal type

Connector type

Impedance

Amplitude

Jitter and Wander

Specification

LV TTL square wave

Duty cycle 50% +/- 5%

BNC male, shared with 1PPS output

50 

15 dBm to17 dBm

When tracking GNSS: per G.811 (PRS/PRC)

When tracking E1/T1/SyncE: per G.812

When tracking PTP GM w/o freq: per G.8261

1PPS Output Signal Specifications

Table B-21. TimeProvider 2300/2700 1PPS Output Signal Specifications

Parameter

Signal type

Connector type

Impedance

Amplitude

Rise Time

Jitter and Wander

Specification

LV TTL square wave

Duty cycle 50% +/- 5%

BNC male, shared with 10 MHz output

50 

15 dBm to17 dBm

< 10 ns

When tracking GNSS: per G.811 (PRS/PRC)

When tracking E1/T1/SyncE: per G.812

When tracking PTP GM w/o freq: per G.8261

Clocks

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 307

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

GNSS Antenna Kits Specifications

Table B-22. 1PPS Time Accuracy

Parameter

1PPS time accuracy

Specification

100 ns with respect to UTC when locked to GNSS

Table B-23. Holdover Performance

Oscillator

OCXO

Rubidium

Phase

+/- 1.5 

1 hour sec

24 hours

Phase

+/- 5  sec

4 hours

3 days

Phase

+/- 10  sec

12 hours

5 days

Frequency

+/- 14 ppb

1 month

5 years

Note: Holdover values are approximate and assume operation at constant temperature, no initial frequency or phase offset, and that the unit has been powered on for 2 weeks and locked to GNSS for three consecutive days.

GNSS Antenna Kits Specifications

GNSS Antennas with Internal LNA Specifications

Table B-24 provides specifications for GNSS antennas with internal LNA

Table B-24. GNSS Antennas with Internal Low-Noise Amplifier Specifications

Characteristic Specification

Mechanical

Mounting

Diameter

Height

308 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide

19-mm diameter center mounting threaded stud with TNC connector

66.5 mm

76.2 mm including radome and mounting threaded stud with TNC connector

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

GNSS Antenna Kits Specifications

Table B-24. GNSS Antennas with Internal Low-Noise Amplifier Specifications

Weight

Characteristic

Operating Temperature

Vibration

Humidity

ESD Protection

Power

Polarization

LNA Gain, 26 dB antenna

LNA Gain, 40 dB antenna

Bandwidth

Noise Figure

Output Impedance

Specification

150 grams

Environmental

-40 to +85  C

3G, 10 to 200 Hz sweep

IP67 compliant

15 kV air discharge

Electrical

+2.3 to +10 VDC, up to 15 ma at +2.3 VDC

Right-hand circular

26 dB +/- 2 dB

40 dB +/- 2 dB

1575 to 1606 MHz

2.5 dB typical

50 ohms

.

Table B-25. GNSS Antenna Kits

Antenna Kit Part Number

Delay

(ns)

TP 2700 GNSS (GPS/GLONASS) Antenna Kit, 20 meter

TP 2700 GNSS (GPS/GLONASS) Antenna Kit, 40 meter

TP 2700 GNSS (GPS/GLONASS) Antenna Kit, 70 meter

990-13180-020 76

990-13180-040 154

990-13180-070

TP 2700 GNSS (GPS/GLONASS) Antenna Kit, 150 meter 990-13180-150

TP 2700 GNSS (GPS/GLONASS) Antenna Kit, 230 meter 990-13180-230

271

575

902

Net

Gain

(dB)

22.5

19.0

26.9

22.5

22.5

Note : The cable delay and gain values correspond to the cable kit being used in its entirety without modification. The values assume that a splitter is not used. Splitters are not recommended.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 309

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

GNSS Antenna Kits Specifications

GNSS Lightning Arrestor Specifications

Table B-26. Lightning Arrestor Specifications

Characteristic Specification

Type Gas

Impedance 50 

Insertion Loss

VSWR

< 0.25dB

< 1.6:1

Dissipation Capacity

Connector Type

Temperature

Relative Humidity

1000 Amperes, impulse 8/20 µsec

N-Type

–50  C to + 70  C

100% Non-immersed

GNSS L1 Inline Amplifier Specifications

The GNSS L1 Inline Amplifier (112-00076-000) option boosts the signal from the antenna. Use this amplifier on longer cable runs to maintain sufficient gain; it receives power from the GNSS radio receiver through the antenna coaxial cable

connections. Table B-27 provides mechanical and electrical specifications for the

amplifier.

Table B-27. GNSS L1 Inline Amplifier Specifications

Characteristic Specification

Mechanical

Connectors, (In/Out)

Gain

TNC

25 dB +4/-0 dB

Dimensions, includes connectors Length: 2.32 in (59 mm)

Electrical

Power

Current

Noise Figure

+3 VDC to +10 VDC

25 mA typical

<1.5 dB

310 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

GNSS Antenna Kits Specifications

GNSS Antenna Coaxial Cable Specifications

Other cable types are available. Table B-28

provides antenna cable specifications.

Before using additional cables, verify that the total antenna system gain is acceptable.

Table B-28. Antenna Cable Specifications

Cable Type

Loss

(@1.575 GHz dB per foot)

0.093 dB

DC Resistance

(  per foot)

0.0030 RG213/U

(Belden 8267)

RG213/U

(Belden 8267)

UHF/VHF

(Belden 9913)

UHF/VHF

(Belden 9913)

UHF/VHF

(Belden 89913)

UHF/VHF

(Belden 89913)

LMR-400

0.093 dB

0.058 dB

0.058 dB

0.089 dB

0.089 dB

0.051 dB

0.0030

0.0027

0.0027

0.0027

0.0027

LMR-400 0.051 dB

Shield – 0.00165

Center – 0.00139

Shield – 0.00165

Center – 0.00139

Type Center

Conductor

Stranded 13 AWG

Stranded 2.62 mm

Solid 10 AWG

5.26 mm 2

Solid 10 AWG

5.26 mm 2

0.109 inch Solid

0.27686 cm 2 Solid

2

Flammability

U/L CSA

U/L CSA

Plenum U/L

CSA

Plenum U/L

CSA

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 311

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

Factory Defaults

Factory Defaults

TP 2300/2700 Defaults

Table B-29. General and Communication Parameters

Description

Telnet Firewall

ICMP Firewall

SSH Firewall

SNMP Firewall

FTP Firewall

HTTP Firewall

User #1 Name

User #1 Password

User #1 Access level

EIA-232 Port

MGMT IP Mode

MGMT IP State

MGMT IP Address

MGMT Gateway Address

MGMT Network Mask

Hostname

Image

Asset Number

SNMP Manager (Up to 3)

Default Value

Block

Allow

Allow

Block

Block

Block admin symmadmin** admin

57.6k-8-N-1

Static

Enable

192.168.0.100

0.0.0.0

255.255.255.0

Timeprovider

None

None

None

Value Range

Allow | Block

Allow | Block

Allow | Block

Allow | Block

Allow | Block

Allow | Block

20 ASCII Characters

32 ASCII Characters, a Minimum of 8 user | config |admin fixed

DHCP | Static

Enable | Disable

Valid IPv4 Address

Valid IPv4 Address, where value of

0.0.0.0 is used for no gateway

Valid IPv4 Mask

20 ASCII Characters

1, 2

20 ASCII Characters

Address: Valid IPv4 Address

Engine ID: Max of 32 ASCII Characters

312 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

Factory Defaults

Table B-29. General and Communication Parameters (Continued)

Description

SNMP User (Up to 10)

Default Value

None

Value Range

Username: Max of 20 ASCII Characters

Security Level: noauth, auth, priv

Auth Type: MD5, SHA

Auth Key: Max of 32 ASCII Characters,

Min of 8 ASCII Characters

Privacy Protocol: DES, AES

Privacy Key : Max of 32 ASCII

Characters, Minimum of 8

SNMP Trap User (Up to 3) None Username: Max of 20 ASCII Characters

Security Level: noauth, auth, private

Auth Type: MD5, SHA

Auth Key: Max of 32 ASCII Characters

Min of 8 ASCII Characters

Privacy Protocol: DES, AES

Privacy Key : Max of 32 ASCII

Characters, Minimum of 8

SNMP v2 Community (Up to

10)

SNMP Trap Version

SNMP v2 State

UTC to TAI offset

Remote Syslog Host

Remote Syslog State

Local Alarm Log Buffer Size

Local Event Log Buffer Size

Local Command Log Buffer

Size

Local Security Log Buffer

Size

Auto-Sync

Bridging Time

None

2

Enable

35

0.0.0.0

Disable

100

100

100

100

Enable

300

Name: Max of 20 ASCII Characters

Access: read-only | read-write

2, 3

Enable | Disable

20 to 255

Valid IPv4 Address

Enable | Disable

0 to 100 Kbytes

0 to 100 Kbytes

0 to 100 Kbytes

0 to 100 Kbytes

Enable | Disable

100 to 100000

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 313

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

Factory Defaults

Table B-30. GNSS Input Port Parameters

Description

GNSS Priority - Time

GNSS Priority - Frequency

GNSS Use Configured PQL -

State

GNSS Configured PQL - Time

GNSS Configured PQL - Freq.

GNSS Antenna Cable Delay

GNSS Position Mode

GNSS Position

Default Value

1

1

Enable

1

1

0

Auto

Lat -

N37:22:43.425

Long -

W121:55:34.815

Elevation - 13.7m

GNSS Elevation Mask

GNSS Track Mode

10

GPS

Value Range

1 to 10

1 to 10

Enable | Disable

1 to 16

1 to 16

0 to 999 ns

Auto | Manual

LAT = Ndd:mm:ss.ss or

Sdd:mm:ss.sss

0 to 90 degrees

LONG = Eddd:mm:ss.ss or

Wddd:mm:ss.sss

0 to 180 degrees

HEIGHT= ±hhhh.h height in meters,

-10000.0 to 10,000.0 meters

5 to 60 degrees

Step size is 1 deg

GPS | GLONASS

| GLONASS-GPS

Table B-31. PTP Client ETH1 Port IP Parameters

Description

IP Address

IP Mask

Gateway

State

Default Value

192.168.1.12

255.255.255.0

0.0.0.0

Enable

Value Range

Valid IPv4 Address

Valid IPv4 Mask

Valid IPv4 Address, special value of 0.0.0.0 is used for no gateway

Enable | Disable

314 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

Factory Defaults

Table B-31. PTP Client ETH1 Port IP Parameters (Continued)

Description

Auto Negotiation

Speed

Default Value

Enable

All

Value Range

Enable | Disable

100M | 1000M | All

Table B-32. PTP Client ETH1 Input Port Parameters

Description

PTP Active Profile

PTP Priority - Time

PTP Priority - Frequency

PTP Use Configured PQL State

PTP Configured PQL - Time

PTP Configured PQL - Freq.

PTP State

TTL

DSCP

Two-step

Unicast-negotiation

Lease-duration

Announce-interval

Sync-interval

Delay-req-interval

Announce-receipt-timeout

Domain

Transport

Service-tier

Default Value

Telecom-2008

2

2

Disable

3

3

Enable

64

-6

3

1

-6

0

Disable

Enable

300

0

Ethernet sync-mask

Asymmetry State

Asymmetry

Master Table

Disable n/a

192.168.1.11

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Value Range

Telecom-2008

1 to 10

1 to 10

Enable | Disable

1 to 16

1 to 16

Enable | Disable

1 - 255

0 - 63

Enable | Disable

Enable | Disable

60 - 1000 seconds

-3 to 4

-7 to -5

-7 to -5

2 to 10

0 -255

Ethernet sync-mask | traffic-mask | modified-traffic-mask

Enable | Disable

Clear valid IPv4 address

TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 315

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

Factory Defaults

Table B-33. SyncE Input ETH1 Port IP Parameters

State

QL-State

Description Default Value

Enable

Enable

Value Range

Enable | Disable

Enable | Disable

Table B-34. T1/E1 Input Port Parameters

Description

T1/E1 Input Port State

T1/E1 Input Port Priority

T1/E1 Input Port Configured

PQL

T1/E1 Input Port

User-Configured PQL State

T1/E1 Input Port Signal Type

E1 Input Port Frame Type

E1 Input Port CRC

E1 Input Port 1 SSM Bit

T1 Input Port Frame Type

Default Value

Enable

3

3

Disable

T1

CCS

Enable

8

ESF

Value Range

Enable | Disable

1 - 10

1 - 16

Enable | Disable

T1 | E1

CCS | CAS | freq2048khz

Enable | Disable

4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8

D4 | ESF | freq1544khz

Table B-35. PTP Grand Master ETH2 Port IP Parameters

Description

IP Address

IP Mask

Gateway

State

Default Value

192.168.2.12

255.255.255.0

0.0.0.0

Enable

Value Range

Valid IPv4 Address

Valid IPv4 Mask

Valid IPv4 Address, special value of 0.0.0.0 is used for no gateway

Enable | Disable

316 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

Factory Defaults

Table B-35. PTP Grand Master ETH2 Port IP Parameters (Continued)

Description

Auto Negotiation

Speed

Default Value

Enable

All

Value Range

Enable | Disable

100M | 1000M | All

Table B-36. PTP Grand Master ETH2 Port VLAN Parameters - Fixed Index (1  16)

Description

Address

Mask

Gateway

ID

Priority

Mode

State

Default Value

No VLAN configured

No VLAN configured

No VLAN configured

0

(not visible in VLAN table)

0

Disable

Disable

Value Range

Valid IPv4 Address

Valid IPv4 Mask

Valid IPv4 Address

2 to 4094

0 to 7

Enable | Disable

Enable | Disable

Table B-37. PTP Grand Master ETH2 Port VLAN Parameters - Non-Fixed

Description

Ethernet Port Address

Ethernet Port Mask

Ethernet Port Gateway

ID

Priority

Mode

State

Default Value

No VLAN configured

No VLAN configured

No VLAN configured

0

(not visible in VLAN table)

0

Disable

Disable

Value Range

Valid IPv4 Address

Valid IPv4 Mask

Valid IPv4 Address

2 to 4094

0 to 7

Enable | Disable

Enable | Disable

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 317

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

Factory Defaults

Table B-38. PTP Grand Master ETH2 Port Active Profile

Description

PTP Active Profile

Default Value

Telecom-2008

Value Range

Telecom-2008 |

ITU-G.8265-1 | Default

Table B-39. PTP Grand Master Telecom-2008 Profile Unicast Parameters

Description

PTP Timescale

PTP Priority 1

PTP Priority 2

PTP Domain

PTP TTL Value

PTP DSCP Value

PTP State

PTP Max Number of Clients

Default Value

Auto

128

128

0

64

0

Enable max

PTP Dither

PTP Two Step

PTP Unicast Negotiation

PTP Unicast Lease Limit

PTP Sync Limit

Rate (2^y)

PTP Announce Limit

Rate (2^y)

PTP Delay Limit

Rate (2^y)

Disable

Disable

Enable

1000

–7

–3

–7

Value Range

Auto | PTP | Arb

0 to 255

0 to 255

0 to 255

1 to 255

0 to 63

Enable | Disable

1 to max

(max # of clients determined by the PTP client license

Enable | Disable

Enable | Disable

Enable | Disable

60 to 1000 seconds

–7 to 7

–4 to 4

–7 to 7

318 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

Factory Defaults

Table B-40. PTP Grand Master ITU-T G.8265.1 Profile Unicast Parameters

Description

PTP Timescale

PTP Priority 1

PTP Priority 2

PTP Domain

PTP TTL Value

PTP DSCP Value

PTP State

PTP Max Number of Clients

Default Value

Auto

128

128

0

0

Enable max

PTP Dither

PTP Two Step

PTP Unicast Negotiation

PTP Unicast Lease Limit

PTP Sync Limit

Rate (2^y)

PTP Announce Limit

Rate (2^y)

PTP Delay Limit

Rate (2^y)

Disable

Disable

Enable

1000

–7

–3

–7

Value Range

Auto | PTP | Arb

0 to 255

0 to 255

0 to 255

4 to 23

0 to 63

Enable | Disable

1 to max

(max # of clients determined by the PTP client license

Enable | Disable

Enable | Disable

Enable | Disable

60 to 1000 seconds

–7 to 7

–3 to 4

–7 to 7

Table B-41. PTP Grand Master Multicast Parameters (Default Profile)

Description

PTP Timescale

PTP Priority 1

PTP Priority 2

PTP Domain

PTP TTL Value

Default Value

Auto

128

128

0

64

Value Range

Auto | PTP | Arb

0 to 255

0 to 255

0 to 255

1 to 255

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 319

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

Factory Defaults

Table B-41. PTP Grand Master Multicast Parameters (Default Profile) (Continued)

Description

PTP DSCP Value

PTP State

PTP Max Number of Clients

PTP Dither

PTP Two Step

PTP Client Timeout

PTP Multicast Announce Receipt

Timeout

PTP Multicast VLAN ID

Default Value

0

Enable max

Disable

Disable

300

3

0

Value Range

0 to 63

Enable | Disable

1 to max

(max # of clients determined by the PTP client license

Enable | Disable

Enable | Disable

10 to 3600 seconds

2 to 10

0

0 to 4094,

0 is used to signify no VLAN

–7 to 7 PTP Multicast Sync Interval

(2^y)

PTP Multicast Announce Interval

(2^y)

1 –4 to 4

Table B-42. T1/E1 Output Port Parameters

Description

T1/E1 Input/Output Port

T1/E1 Output Port State

T1/E1 Input Port Priority

T1/E1 Input Port Configured

PQL

T1/E1 Input Port

User-Configured PQL State

T1/E1 Output Port Signal Type

E1 Output Port Frame Type

E1 Output Port CRC State

E1 Output Port SSM State

E1 Output Port 1 SSM Bit

320 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide

Default Value

Output

Enable

3

3

Disable

T1

CCS

Enable

Enable

All

Value Range

Input | Output

Enable | Disable

1 - 10

1 - 16

Enable | Disable

T1 | E1

CCS | CAS | freq2048khz

Enable | Disable

Enable | Disable

4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | All

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

Factory Defaults

Table B-42. T1/E1 Output Port Parameters (Continued)

Description

E1 Output Port Zero

Suppression

T1 Output Port Frame Type

T1 Output Port SSM State

Output Generation - Warm-up

Output Generation - Free-run

Output Generation - Holdover

Output Generation - Fast-track

Default Value

Disable

ESF

Enable

Squelch

Squelch

On

On

Value Range

Enable | Disable

D4 | ESF | freq1544khz

Enable | Disable

Squelch | On | AIS

Squelch | On | AIS

Squelch | On | AIS

Squelch | On | AIS

Table B-43. T1/E1 Input / Output Parameters

Description

T1/E1 IO Port

Default Value

Input

Value Range

Input | Output

Table B-44. 10MHz/1PPS Output Port Parameters

Description

Output Port State

Signal Type

PPS Offset

Default Value

Enable

10M

0

Value range

Enable | Disable

10M | PPS

-1000000 to 1000000

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 321

Appendix B Specifications and Factory Defaults

Factory Defaults

Table B-45. SSM Settings

Description

SSM Option

Default Value

Option 1

Value Range

Option 1 | Option 2

Alarm Default Values

Table B-46. GNSS Port Alarm Parameters

Description

Alarm Delay Time

Alarm State (for each alarm)

Alarm Severity Level

Default Value

0

Enable

See System

Notification

Messages , on page 275

Value Range

0 to 500000

Enable | Disable

2 to 5

322 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Appendix C Installing GNSS Antennas

The GNSS L1 Reference Antenna is one component of a complete line of GNSS accessories for your GNSS antenna system provided by Symmetricom. These accessories are designed to deliver precise GNSS signals over a wide temperature range and in harsh environmental conditions.

In This Chapter

Antenna Kits Overview

Antenna Kits Accessories

GNSS Antenna Installation

Available GNSS Antenna Kits

Antenna Coaxial Cable

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 323

Appendix C Installing GNSS Antennas

Antenna Kits Overview

Antenna Kits Overview

When deciding on which of the available antenna kits meets your needs, the key factor is the distance between the GNSS antenna and the TP 2700. There are several coaxial cable lengths available to assist in receiving proper gains from the

GNSS antenna. Symmetricom offers five antenna kits for the TP 2700.

Considerations for Antenna Installation

When installing the GNSS receiver, it is important to select the proper gain antenna and coaxial cable to account for the insertion loss between the antenna and the

GNSS receiver. Selecting the proper gain avoids under-driving or over-driving the receiver antenna input. To acquire satellites, the gain required for a L1 signal at

1575 to 1606 MHz (with some level of signal attenuation allowed) for a GNSS receiver input is defined in the receiver’s manufacturer’s specification.

L1 antenna gains are usually specified as the maximum effective gain. Such an antenna can have 4.5 to 10 dB less signal strength at different satellite azimuths and elevations, depending on their reception pattern. The GNSS engine requires a net gain at the antenna connector input of the chassis to be between 15 to 30 dB.

All antenna kits include the GNSS L1 antenna, mounting pipe, floor flange, lightning arrestor, pre-assembled coaxial cable (for antenna to lightning arrestor), roll of 3M

2150 weatherproof tape, and a SMA cable adapter. The antennas and in-line amplifiers have TNC connectors and the lightning arrestor has N connectors.

All antenna kits supplied use a LMR-400, or equivalent, low-loss coaxial cable. The

L1 signal loss of LMR-400 is 0.167 dB/meter. The L1 signal loss of a 90 V lightning arrestor is typically 0.25 dB. See

Antenna Coaxial Cable , on page 325.

GNSS Antennas with Low Noise Amplifiers

The GNSS antenna kits provide reception of GPS and GLONASS satellite RF signals in the range 1575 to 1606 MHz, each with the correct gain required to provide timing stability for the coaxial cable length included in the kit. Additions or changes to these kits may change the gain and prevent adequate satellite reception.

For kit information, see Available GNSS Antenna Kits , on page 333.

Accuracy of the antenna position determined using receiver survey depends on providing RF gain to the GNSS receiver within a required range of 15 to 30 dB and locating the antenna with an unobstructed field of view in a low multipath environment. If these conditions are not met, the receiver survey will either require longer than 20 minutes to complete or will not complete, preventing the GNSS input from being used by the system as a reference. Also, timing stability will not be optimized if these conditions are not met.

324 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Appendix C Installing GNSS Antennas

Antenna Kits Accessories

Antenna Kits Accessories

Lightning Arrestor

Symmetricom offers the lightning arrestor for installations that require antenna coaxial lead-in protection. The lightning arrestor passes DC power and frequencies in the 1.5 GHz range with L1 GNSS antennas. In most installations, the lightning arrestor mounts near the point at which the antenna lead enters the facility. See the

GNSS Lightning Arrestor Specifications , on page 310

for specifications.

GNSS L1 In-line Amplifier

The GNSS L1 in-line amplifier (112-00076-000) option boosts the signal from the antenna with total cable lengths of 150 and 230 meters. The amplifier receives power from the GNSS receiver through the antenna coaxial cable connections. See

the GNSS L1 In-line Amplifier , on page 325 for specifications.

Antenna Coaxial Cable

Symmetricom provides LMR-400 coaxial cables with N-type connectors on both ends.

Table C-2 lists the part numbers for the cables and its crimp kit and Table C-3

lists cable specifications.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 325

Appendix C Installing GNSS Antennas

GNSS Antenna Installation

GNSS Antenna Installation

This section provides information about planning and installing a GNSS antenna.

Planning the Antenna Location

Prior to installing the antenna, you should plan the site, antenna location, grounding scheme, cable route, and all other details.

Locating the Antenna

Use

Figure C-1 as a guide to locate the antenna.

Figure C-1. Locating the GNSS Antenna

Warning : The TimeProvider 2700 GNSS interface uses the electrical current it supplies to power a GNSS antenna to determine whether or not the antenna is properly connected and functional. If the

TimeProvider 27000 does not detect any current, it will assume a failed GNSS antenna and will consequently generate an alarm and switch to another timing (non-GNSS) source.

Some GNSS splitters can block the DC current, and if used with

TimeProvider 2700, will cause the alarm condition described above.

Usage of such GNSS splitters with the TimeProvider 2700 will require the installation of a 50 OHM load so that the TimeProvider 2700

GNSS interface is able to detect current and operate normally.

326 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Appendix C Installing GNSS Antennas

GNSS Antenna Installation

Caution: To avoid damage to the GNSS antenna, do not place the antenna where high-power radio signals are beamed directly at the unit. Such signals can damage the preamplifier of the GNSS antenna.

Warning: To avoid serious injury to personnel or damage to equipment, exercise caution when working near high voltage lines.

In particular:

Use extreme caution when installing the GNSS antenna near, under, or around high voltage lines.

Follow local building electrical codes for grounding using the frame ground lugs on the shelf.

The in-line amplifier receives 5 VDC power from the GNSS receiver, and is supplied on the center conductor of the LMR-400 or equivalent coaxial cable.

Symmetricom does not recommend cutting the antenna cables provided in the GNSS Antenna Kit.

Recommendation: Symmetricom recommends that you consider the following location and environment influences before installing the

GNSS antenna:

If possible, provide the antenna with an unobstructed 360-degree view of the sky from the horizon.

In general, do not allow obstructions that obscure the horizon (as viewed from the antenna) by more than 10 degrees, as shown in

Figure C-1

.

Locate the antenna well away from, and preferably in a plane above electrical equipment such as elevators, air conditioners, or other machinery.

To reduce the risk of lightning damage, do not place the antenna at the highest point of the building.

Locate the GNSS antenna at least 3.7 m (12 ft.) from metallic objects, if possible.

Locate the antenna high enough to avoid drifted snow.

Locate the lightning arrestor in a protected area to avoid contact with standing water.

Locate the antenna within 9.1 m (30 ft.) of the point at which the antenna cable enters the building.

Allow at least 3.0 m (10 ft.) of separation distance between GNSS antennas.

Surfaces above the plane of the unit that are between the antenna and the horizon can produce reflected (multi-path) signals, which can degrade the performance of the GNSS receiver.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 327

Appendix C Installing GNSS Antennas

GNSS Antenna Installation

Developing a Grounding Scheme

In addition to determining where to locate and mount the antenna and cabling, you should develop a grounding scheme. The purpose of the grounding scheme is to provide some protection against voltage surges and static discharge. If lightning arrestors are used, they also need to be connected to the perimeter ground system or to the bulkhead entrance panel that is connected to the perimeter ground system.

Caution: To ensure proper grounding, observe these precautions when installing the antenna:

Allow no sharp bends in the ground conductors. The ground conductor must have a 9.1 m (30-ft.) radius for any bends made.

Ensure that no painted surface insulates the lightning arrestor or grounding clamps.

Ensure that ground conductors are bonded to the metal enclosure box (if used) and do not enter through an access hole.

Do not use soldered connections for grounding purposes.

Secure all grounding connections with mechanical clamp type connectors.

In general, follow local building codes when selecting a grounding scheme, wire size, and installation.

Use #6 AWG (16 mm 2 ) copper ground wire or larger, depending on the distance to the earth ground electrode. Refer to your local electrical codes for specific details. In most cases, #1/0 AWG (50 mm

2 resistance of the coaxial shield.

) ground wire will maintain 1/10 the

Note: Larger ground conductors provide better transient elimination; that is, the larger the ground conductor, the less likely the chance of transients.

Connect lightning arrestors, if part of the grounding scheme, to earth ground through a conductor.

Note: Do not connect the outside lightning arrestor ground to the inside equipment rack ground. Doing so can defeat the protection afforded by the lightning arrestor.

Never connect antenna systems to the same earth ground connector as heating and cooling systems, elevator or pump motors, or other motors or machinery which can induce noise in the antenna system.

Antenna Installation Tools and Materials

These standard tools and materials are not supplied in the antenna kit, but may be required for installing the GNSS antenna.

328 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Appendix C Installing GNSS Antennas

GNSS Antenna Installation

Extra cable ties or acceptable cable clamps

#6 AWG (16 mm

2

) copper ground wire (minimum)

Eight-foot (2.9 m) ground electrode

Custom mounting plates, U-bolts, PVC pipes, masonry bolt, etc. as needed for mounting to a tower, roof, or wall of a building

A cable puller may be required for installing the antenna coaxial cable

Digital multivoltmeter (DVM)

Caution: To avoid damage to the connectors, do not use the connectors to pull the cable. If at all possible, avoid bundling the coaxial cable with other cables (and possible noise sources). Use appropriate cable-pulling devices when pulling the coaxial cable through conduit or a weather head.

Cutting Antenna Cables

Symmetricom recommends that you coil excess cable to avoid gain mismatch between the GNSS antenna and the GNSS receiver. Coiling the excess cable also allows you to use the factory-installed crimped connector.

Symmetricom does not recommend cutting the antenna cables provided in the

GNSS Antenna Kits. If you must cut the cables, please ensure that the following requirements are met.

Cable Requirements – The total cable length from the GNSS receiver to the antenna must not be shorter than the minimum cable lengths indicated in the GNSS

Antenna Kits

(see Table C-1 ).

Connector Requirements – The cables provided with the GNSS antenna kit have factory installed crimped connectors. If you cut these cables, you must supply and add a connector. Symmetricom recommends that you use only crimp-style N-type connectors in the crimper kit for this application (see

Table C-2

).

Installing the Antenna

This section provides procedures for installing the GNSS antenna (see

Figure C-2

).

1. Insert the antenna into the right-angle mounting bracket and tighten it using the antenna nuts.

2. Mount the right-angle bracket to the mast using for example, U-bolts.

3. To secure the coaxial cable to the mast, use 8-inch cable ties or appropriate cable clamps.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 329

Appendix C Installing GNSS Antennas

GNSS Antenna Installation

4. Adhere to local building codes to determine the type and number of fasteners, screws, bolts, etc. that may be required.

Note: Follow local building electrical codes when installing the GNSS antenna.

1

Figure C-2. GNSS Antenna Installation

2 r

5

3

4

5

In-line amplifier required for

Kits

-150, -230

6 8

7

7

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

6

GNSS antenna, TNC(f) (27 dB with kits -020, -040, -150; 41 dB with kits -070, -230)

Mounting Bracket Antenna (193-00044-000)

TNC(m) to TNC(m) straight adapter (121-00148-000)

In-line amplifier 25 dB, TNC(f) to TNC(f) (13813160-025-0)

TNC(m) to N(f) straight adapter (371-004)

10 m cable N(m) - N(m) (58521A-010)

Lightning arrestor, N(f) (112-43400-00-3)

Long cable N(m) - N(m) 58521A-xxx

1.2 m Cable adapter N(f) to SMA(m) 060-00039-000

9

330 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Appendix C Installing GNSS Antennas

GNSS Antenna Installation

Connecting the Cable to the Antenna

This section describes how to connect the coaxial cable to the mounted antenna.

Refer to Figure C-2

for the numbered references in the following procedure.

1. If an in-line amplifier is not required:

– Connect the TNC-N adapter (#5) to the antenna (#1).

– Connect the 10 m cable (#6) to the TNC-N adapter (#5).

2. If an in-line amplifier is required:

– Connect TNC-TNC adapter (#3) to the antenna (#1).

– Connect the in-line amplifier (#4) to the TNC-TNC adapter (#3).

– Connect the TNC-N adapter (#5) to the In-line amplifier (#4.)

– Connect the 10 m cable (#6) to the TNC-N adapter (#5) .

Caution: To avoid damage to the connectors, do not use the connectors to pull the cable. If at all possible, avoid bundling the coaxial cable with other cables (and possible noise sources). Use appropriate cable-pulling devices when pulling the coaxial cable through conduit or a weather head.

3. Connect the other end of the 10 m cable (#6) to the lightning arrestor (#7).

4. Connect the lightning arrestor (#7) to the long cable (#8).

5. Connect the other end of the long cable (#8) with the cable adapter (#9).

Caution: To avoid damage to internal solder connections, do not over-tighten the connector.

Installing the Lightning Arrestor

Lightning arrestors should be installed in accordance with your antenna system grounding scheme. To install a lightning arrestor, follow these steps:

1. Mount the lightning arrestor within 30 ft. (9 m) of the GNSS antenna.

2. Connect the ground wire between the lightning arrestor and the proper grounding zone (building ground, master ground bar, or other) for the mounting location.

Recommendation: Symmetricom does not recommend soldered connections for grounding purposes. All grounding connections should be secured with mechanical clamp connectors.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 331

Appendix C Installing GNSS Antennas

GNSS Antenna Installation

3. Wrap the connectors with weatherproof tape for added protection.

4. Verify that the antenna coaxial cable center conductor is not shorted to the shield of the cable.

Connecting the GNSS Antenna

You should install the antenna cable from the lightning arrestor to the TimeProvider

2700 using the shortest route possible. Follow all applicable building and electrical codes to ensure a water-tight and fire-resistant installation.

Caution: To avoid damage to the connectors, do not use the connectors to pull the cable. If at all possible, avoid bundling the cable with other cables (and possible noise sources). Use appropriate cable-pulling devices when pulling the cable through conduit or a weather head.

To connect the GNSS antenna, perform the following steps:

1. Using a DVM, Verify that the center conductor is not shorted to the shield.

If the reading shows a short or open, you may have a shorted or open cable or lightning arrestor. Therefore, apply the same measurements directly to the GNSS antenna. This requires disconnecting the antenna cable at the antenna.

Note: The open-circuit range of an individual ohmmeter can cause readings to vary among meters.

2. Secure the free end of the antenna cable to the SMA (f) antenna connector on the front panel of the TP 2700.

Recommendation: Symmetricom recommends coiling excess cable to avoid gain mismatch between the GNSS antenna and the TP 2700.

Coiling the excess cable also allows you to use the factory-installed crimped connector.

Antenna Installation Completeness Checklist

To verify that antenna installation is complete:

Verify that all power and ground wires are installed correctly and securely fastened.

Verify that all input and output cables are properly installed.

Verify that all antenna connectors are secure, tight, and weatherproofed.

332 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Appendix C Installing GNSS Antennas

Available GNSS Antenna Kits

Symmetricom does not recommend the use of GNSS splitters. However, if one is used, it must provide a load of at least 10mA.

Available GNSS Antenna Kits

Each of the GNSS antenna kits are available with cable lengths of 20, 40, 70, 150 and 230 meters each providing RF gain to the GNSS receiver of between 15 and 30 dB using combinations of a GNSS 26 dB gain active antenna, a GNSS 40 dB gain active antenna and a 25 dB gain GNSS in-line amplifier. Components are weather-proof packaged per IP67 for exposed locations. The GNSS Input Card provides power to the active antenna and in-line amplifier and then detects alarms on antenna connection open conditions.

Symmetricom does not recommend the use of GNSS splitters. Splitters reduce the reliability of the overall system, add additional delay, and may not provide a DC load to the unit. The TimeProvider 2700 requires at least 10mA of DC current load on the antenna port to prevent an open-circuit alarm. This alarm will prevent using GNSS as a reference.

All GNSS antenna kits include the antenna, mounting bracket, coaxial cable, required adapters, a lightning arrestor, and other kit components. The GNSS

antenna kits are listed in Table C-1 .

Table C-1. GNSS Antenna Kits for TimeProvider 2700

Antenna Kit

Cable Length

(meters)

Part Number min

990-13180-020 10 max

20 TP 2700 GNSS (GPS/GLONASS) Antenna Kit,

20 meter

TP 2700 GNSS (GPS/GLONASS) Antenna Kit,

40 meter

TP 2700 GNSS (GPS/GLONASS) Antenna Kit,

70 meter

TP 2700 GNSS (GPS/GLONASS) Antenna Kit,

150 meter

TP 2700 GNSS (GPS/GLONASS) Antenna Kit,

230 meter

990-13180-040 30

990-13180-070

990-13180-150

990-13180-230

58

124

202

40

70

150

230

Cable

Delay

(ns)

76

154

271

575

902

Note : The cable delay values correspond to the cable kit being used in its entirety without modification. The values assume that a splitter is not used. Splitters are not recommended.

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 333

Appendix C Installing GNSS Antennas

Antenna Coaxial Cable

Antenna Coaxial Cable

Table C-2. LMR-400 Antenna Coaxial Cable Accessories

Part Number Description

121-32212-00-2

12813080-000-0

Type N (male) connector for LMR-400 cable

Crimp Kit for LMR-400 or equivalent (10 ea. N-Type connector, crimp tool, weatherproof tape)

Contact your sales office for available cable lengths and specific cable item number.

Table C-3. LMR-400/LMR-400FR Antenna Coaxial Cable Specifications

Cable Type

LMR-400

Measured Loss

17.25 dB per 100 m

5.25 dB per 100 ft.

DC Resistance (  )

Shield – 0.00165 per ft.

Center – 0.00139 per ft.

Shield – 0.005 per m

Center – 0.0045 per m

Type Center

Conductor

0.109 inch Solid

(0.27686 cm or

(0.0602 cm

2

)

334 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

Appendix D Software Licenses

This product contains licensed third party software, including software available under the GPL licensing scheme. You can obtain these licenses and the open-source software by contacting Symmetricom Technical support at the following numbers:

Worldwide (Main Number): 1-408-428-7907

USA, Canada, Latin America including Caribbean, Pacific Rim including Asia,

Australia and New Zealand: 1-408-428-7907

USA toll-free: 1-888-367-7966 (1-888-FOR-SYMM)

Europe, Middle East & Africa: 49 700 32886435

An administrative fee may be charged to obtain the source code.

By using the TimeProvider 2300/2700, the user agrees to the terms of these licenses.

In This Appendix

Third-Party Software

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 335

Appendix D Software Licenses

Third-Party Software

Third-Party Software

The following is a list of third-party software applications provided with the

TimeProvider 2300/2700.

 libxml2 linux logrotate mtd-utils

 net-snmp net-tools openssh openssl

 popt sudo syslogd tcl

 tcpdump tftpd-hpa

 dhcp dhcphd dhcpv6

 dropbear dtc elfutils ethtool

 expect glibc iproute2 iptables

 iputils libnss-mdns libpam libpcap

336 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

 u-boot wget

 zlib

Appendix D Software Licenses

Third-Party Software

098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 337

Appendix D Software Licenses

Third-Party Software

338 TimeProvider 2300/2700 User’s Guide 098-00564-000 Revision A3 – July, 2013

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents